gtkmm r1051 - in trunk: . gtk/src
- From: murrayc svn gnome org
- To: svn-commits-list gnome org
- Subject: gtkmm r1051 - in trunk: . gtk/src
- Date: Mon, 20 Oct 2008 12:22:47 +0000 (UTC)
Author: murrayc
Date: Mon Oct 20 12:22:47 2008
New Revision: 1051
URL: http://svn.gnome.org/viewvc/gtkmm?rev=1051&view=rev
Log:
2008-10-20 Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc com>
* gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml: Regenerated.
* gtk/src/gtk_docs_override.xml: Added an override for
gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row() because gmmproc did not rename one
of the functions mentioned.
This adds documentation for the set_tooltip_*() methods.
Bug #547787 (John Hobbs)
Modified:
trunk/ChangeLog
trunk/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
trunk/gtk/src/gtk_docs_override.xml
Modified: trunk/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
==============================================================================
--- trunk/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml (original)
+++ trunk/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml Mon Oct 20 12:22:47 2008
@@ -14,30 +14,31 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_file">
<description>
-Return value: the paper height.
+Makes @status_icon display the file @filename.
+See gtk_status_icon_new_from_file() for details.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> a filename
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the paper height.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row">
<description>
Sets the tip area of @tooltip to be the area covered by the row at @path.
+See also gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().
Since: 2.12
@@ -173,20 +174,22 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new">
+<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_base_folder">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkComboBoxEntry which has a #GtkEntry as child. After
-construction, you should set a model using gtk_combo_box_set_model() and a
-text_column * using gtk_combo_box_entry_set_text_column().
-
+Sets the folder with respect to which completions occur.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser_entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="file">
+<parameter_description> file for a folder in the chooser entries current file system.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkComboBoxEntry.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end">
@@ -352,36 +355,59 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_colormap">
+<function name="gtk_cell_layout_reorder">
<description>
-Gets the colormap that will be used to render @widget. No reference will
-be added to the returned colormap; it should not be unreferenced.
+Re-inserts @cell at @position. Note that @cell has already to be packed
+into @cell_layout for this to function properly.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="cell_layout">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to reorder.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> New position to insert @cell at.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the colormap used by @widget
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_current_alpha">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint">
<description>
-Return value: an integer between 0 and 65535.
+This function tells GTK+ that the user interface for your
+application requires users to read across tree rows and associate
+cells with one another. By default, GTK+ will then render the tree
+with alternating row colors. Do &lt;emphasis&gt;not&lt;/emphasis&gt; use it
+just because you prefer the appearance of the ruled tree; that's a
+question for the theme. Some themes will draw tree rows in
+alternating colors even when rules are turned off, and users who
+prefer that appearance all the time can choose those themes. You
+should call this function only as a &lt;emphasis&gt;semantic&lt;/emphasis&gt;
+hint to the theme engine that your tree makes alternating colors
+useful from a functional standpoint (since it has lots of columns,
+generally).
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the tree requires reading across rows
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an integer between 0 and 65535.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_insert_action_group">
@@ -477,6 +503,35 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_startup_id">
+<description>
+Startup notification identifiers are used by desktop environment to
+track application startup, to provide user feedback and other
+features. This function changes the corresponding property on the
+underlying GdkWindow. Normally, startup identifier is managed
+automatically and you should only use this function in special cases
+like transferring focus from other processes. You should use this
+function before calling gtk_window_present() or any equivalent
+function generating a window map event.
+
+This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="startup_id">
+<parameter_description> a string with startup-notification identifier
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_reorderable">
<description>
Sets whether the notebook tab can be reordered
@@ -504,7 +559,7 @@
<function name="GtkTextBuffer">
<description>
-The end_user_action signal is emitted at the end of a single
+The ::end-user-action signal is emitted at the end of a single
user-visible operation #GtkTextBuffer.
See also:
@@ -575,17 +630,40 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkCellRendererCombo">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_custom">
<description>
-If %TRUE, the cell renderer will include an entry and allow to enter
-values other than the ones in the popup list.
+Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object with the
+given parameters.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> the paper name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="display_name">
+<parameter_description> the human-readable name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the paper width, in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the paper height, in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for @width and @height
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object, use gtk_paper_size_free()
+to free it
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_set_mark">
@@ -648,19 +726,19 @@
destroying the dialog if you wish to do so.
Typical usage of this function might be:
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+|[
gint result = gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
switch (result)
{
case GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT:
-do_application_specific_something (&lt;!-- --&gt;);
+do_application_specific_something ();
break;
default:
-do_nothing_since_dialog_was_cancelled (&lt;!-- --&gt;);
+do_nothing_since_dialog_was_cancelled ();
break;
}
gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
Note that even though the recursive main loop gives the effect of a
modal dialog (it prevents the user from interacting with other
@@ -691,64 +769,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_remove_page">
-<description>
-Removes a page from the notebook given its index
-in the notebook.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_num">
-<parameter_description> the index of a notebook page, starting
-from 0. If -1, the last page will
-be removed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_scale_button_new">
-<description>
-Creates a #GtkScaleButton, with a range between @min and @max, with
-a stepping of @step.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a stock icon size
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="min">
-<parameter_description> the minimum value of the scale (usually 0)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max">
-<parameter_description> the maximum value of the scale (usually 100)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="step">
-<parameter_description> the stepping of value when a scroll-wheel event,
-or up/down arrow event occurs (usually 2)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icons">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of icon names, or %NULL if
-you want to set the list later with gtk_scale_button_set_icons()
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkScaleButton
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_items">
<description>
Gets the list of recently used resources in form of #GtkRecentInfo objects.
@@ -772,42 +792,56 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_orientation">
+<function name="gtk_editable_select_region">
<description>
-Sets the ::orientation property which determines whether the labels
-are drawn beside the icons instead of below.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Selects the text between @start and @end. Both @start and @end are
+relative to the start of the content. Note that positions are specified
+in characters, not bytes.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the relative position of texts and icons
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> start of region
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> end of region
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_window_set_has_toplevel_focus">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new">
<description>
-Internal function that sets whether the keyboard focus for the
-toplevel window (taking into account inter-process embedding.)
+Creates a new #GtkComboBoxEntry which has a #GtkEntry as child. After
+construction, you should set a model using gtk_combo_box_set_model() and a
+text column using gtk_combo_box_entry_set_text_column().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> A new #GtkComboBoxEntry.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="GtkMountOperation">
+<description>
+#GtkMountOperation is an implementation of #GMountOperation that
+can be used with GIO functions for mounting volumes such as
+g_file_mount_enclosing_volume() or g_file_mount_mountable().
+
+When necessary, #GtkMountOperation shows dialogs to ask for passwords.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_toplevel_focus">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -859,59 +893,50 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_select_range">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_select_multiple">
<description>
-This function moves the "insert" and "selection_bound" marks
-simultaneously. If you move them in two steps
-with gtk_text_buffer_move_mark(), you will temporarily select a
-region in between their old and new locations, which can be pretty
-inefficient since the temporarily-selected region will force stuff
-to be recalculated. This function moves them as a unit, which can
-be optimized.
+Sets whether @chooser can select multiple items.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ins">
-<parameter_description> where to put the "insert" mark
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="bound">
-<parameter_description> where to put the "selection_bound" mark
+<parameter name="select_multiple">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if @chooser can select more than one item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_get_item">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_file">
<description>
-Obtains the menu item which corresponds to @path.
-
-If the widget corresponding to @path is a menu item which opens a
-submenu, then the item is returned. If you are interested in the submenu,
-use gtk_item_factory_get_widget() instead.
+Reads the page setup from the file @file_name.
+See gtk_page_setup_to_file().
-Deprecated: 2.4:
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the path to the menu item
+<parameter name="file_name">
+<parameter_description> the filename to read the page setup from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the menu item for the given path, or %NULL if @path doesn't
-lead to a menu item
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -934,20 +959,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_system_win32_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkFileSystemWin32 object. #GtkFileSystemWin32
-implements the #GtkFileSystem interface with direct access to
-the filesystem using Windows API calls
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkFileSystemWin32 object
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_container_get_focus_chain">
<description>
Retrieves the focus chain of the container, if one has been
@@ -1033,61 +1044,22 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_expander">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_website_label">
<description>
-Draws an expander as used in #GtkTreeView. @x and @y specify the
-center the expander. The size of the expander is determined by the
-"expander-size" style property of @widget. (If widget is not
-specified or doesn't have an "expander-size" property, an
-unspecified default size will be used, since the caller doesn't
-have sufficient information to position the expander, this is
-likely not useful.) The expander is expander_size pixels tall
-in the collapsed position and expander_size pixels wide in the
-expanded position.
+Return value: The label used for the website link. The string is owned by the about
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x position to draw the expander at
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y position to draw the expander at
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expander_style">
-<parameter_description> the style to draw the expander in; determines
-whether the expander is collapsed, expanded, or in an
-intermediate state.
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The label used for the website link. The string is owned by the about
+dialog and must not be modified.
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_inside_word">
@@ -1134,30 +1106,50 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_child_get_property">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first">
<description>
-Gets the value of a child property for @child and @container.
+Initializes @iter with the first iterator in the tree (the one at the path
+"0") and returns %TRUE. Returns %FALSE if the tree is empty.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="property_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the property to get
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_iter_is_valid">
+<description>
+WARNING: This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing
+purposes.
+
+Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkTreeStore.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> a location to return the value
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
+
+Since: 2.2
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_get_path">
@@ -1208,6 +1200,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkMountOperation
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent of the window, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkMountOperation
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_wrap_mode">
<description>
Gets the line wrapping for the view.
@@ -1247,22 +1257,56 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_use_color">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_set_drop_highlight_item">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR.
+Highlights @toolbar to give an idea of what it would look like
+if @item was added to @toolbar at the position indicated by @index_.
+If @item is %NULL, highlighting is turned off. In that case @index_
+is ignored.
+
+The @tool_item passed to this function must not be part of any widget
+hierarchy. When an item is set as drop highlight item it can not
+added to any widget hierarchy or used as highlight item for another
+toolbar.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem, or %NULL to turn of highlighting
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="index_">
+<parameter_description> a position on @toolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether to use color
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_remove_selection_clipboard">
+<description>
+Removes a #GtkClipboard added with
+gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard added to @buffer by
+gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard()
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_draw_vline">
@@ -1270,7 +1314,7 @@
Draws a vertical line from (@x, @y1_) to (@x, @y2_) in @window
using the given style and state.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_vline() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_vline() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1376,30 +1420,22 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_before">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_width">
<description>
-Inserts a new row before @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will
-be appended to the end of the list. @iter will be changed to point to this
-new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
-values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
+Obtains the width of the #GtkPrintContext, in pixels.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="sibling">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the width of @context
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_map">
@@ -1417,30 +1453,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Gets the built-in image for this icon, if any. To allow
-GTK+ to use built in icon images, you must pass the
-%GTK_ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN to
-gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo structure
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the built-in image pixbuf, or %NULL. No
-extra reference is added to the returned pixbuf, so if
-you want to keep it around, you must use g_object_ref().
-The returned image must not be modified.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkMenuToolButton using @icon_widget as icon and
@@ -1572,23 +1584,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_visible_vertical">
-<description>
-Return value: Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_paper_size_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object by parsing a
@@ -1632,6 +1627,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_dialog_get_color_selection">
+<description>
+Retrieves the #GtkColorSelection widget embedded in the dialog.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelectionDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the embedded #GtkColorSelection
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_expander_set_spacing">
<description>
Sets the spacing field of @expander, which is the number of pixels to
@@ -1653,28 +1666,41 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_relief_style">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_request_targets">
<description>
-Return value: The relief style of buttons on @toolbar.
+Requests the contents of the clipboard as list of supported targets.
+When the list is later received, @callback will be called.
+
+The @targets parameter to @callback will contain the resulting targets if
+the request succeeded, or %NULL if it failed.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> a function to call when the targets are received,
+or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called
+one way or the other.)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data to pass to @callback.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The relief style of buttons on @toolbar.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_draw_box">
<description>
Draws a box on @window with the given parameters.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_box() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_box() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1714,49 +1740,28 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_insert_with_values">
+<function name="gtk_image_get_icon_name">
<description>
-Creates a new row at @position. @iter will be changed to point to this
-new row. If @position is larger than the number of rows on the list, then
-the new row will be appended to the list. The row will be filled with
-the values given to this function.
-
-Calling
-&lt;literal&gt;gtk_tree_store_insert_with_values (tree_store, iter, position, ...)&lt;/literal&gt;
-has the same effect as calling
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
-gtk_tree_store_insert (tree_store, iter, position);
-gtk_tree_store_set (tree_store, iter, ...);
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
-with the different that the former will only emit a row_inserted signal,
-while the latter will emit row_inserted, row_changed and if the tree store
-is sorted, rows_reordered. Since emitting the rows_reordered signal
-repeatedly can affect the performance of the program,
-gtk_tree_store_insert_with_values() should generally be preferred when
-inserting rows in a sorted tree store.
+Gets the icon name and size being displayed by the #GtkImage.
+The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_ICON_NAME (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
+The returned string is owned by the #GtkImage and should not
+be freed.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set the new row, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> position to insert the new row
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> place to store an icon name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> pairs of column number and value, terminated with -1
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> place to store an icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -1838,22 +1843,27 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_layout">
+<function name="gtk_file_filter_get_needed">
<description>
-Creates a new #PangoLayout that is suitable for use
-with the #GtkPrintContext.
+Gets the fields that need to be filled in for the structure
+passed to gtk_file_filter_filter()
+
+This function will not typically be used by applications; it
+is intended principally for use in the implementation of
+#GtkFileChooser.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new Pango layout for @context
+<return> bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
+calling gtk_file_filter_filter()
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -1885,29 +1895,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_set_background">
-<description>
-Sets the background of @window to the background color or pixmap
-specified by @style for the given state.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_list_store_insert">
<description>
Creates a new row at @position. @iter will be changed to point to this new
@@ -1935,41 +1922,54 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_settings_get_for_screen">
+<function name="gtk_test_find_widget">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkSettings object for @screen, creating it if necessary.
+This function will search the descendants of @widget for a widget
+of type @widget_type that has a label matching @label_pattern next
+to it. This is most useful for automated GUI testing, e.g. to find
+the "OK" button in a dialog and synthesize clicks on it.
+However see gtk_test_find_label(), gtk_test_find_sibling() and
+gtk_test_widget_click() for possible caveats involving the search of
+such widgets and synthesizing widget events.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> Container widget, usually a GtkWindow.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label_pattern">
+<parameter_description> Shell-glob pattern to match a label string.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget_type">
+<parameter_description> Type of a aearched for label sibling widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkSettings object.
+<return> a valid widget if any is found or %NULL.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_opacity_control">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_target">
<description>
-Sets the @colorsel to use or not use opacity.
+Retrieves the target of the selection.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_opacity">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if @colorsel can set the opacity, %FALSE otherwise.
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the target of the selection.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_unmap">
@@ -2150,24 +2150,20 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_view_new_with_markup">
+<function name="gtk_printer_is_virtual">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellView widget, adds a #GtkCellRendererText
-to it, and makes its show @markup. The text can text can be
-marked up with the &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango text
-markup language&lt;/link&gt;.
-
+Return value: %TRUE if @printer is virtual
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="markup">
-<parameter_description> the text to display in the cell view
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
+<return> %TRUE if @printer is virtual
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -2232,6 +2228,24 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_test_list_all_types">
+<description>
+Return the type ids that have been registered after
+calling gtk_test_register_all_types().
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="n_types">
+<parameter_description> location to store number of types
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> 0-terminated array of type ids
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_func">
<description>
Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be @sort_func. If the
@@ -2264,72 +2278,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item">
-<description>
-Sets the #GtkMenuItem used in the toolbar overflow menu. The
- menu_item_id is used to identify the caller of this function and
-should also be used with gtk_tool_item_get_proxy_menu_item().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="menu_item_id">
-<parameter_description> a string used to identify @menu_item
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="menu_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuItem to be used in the overflow menu
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_usize">
-<description>
-Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget's size
-request will be @width by @height. You can use this function to
-force a widget to be either larger or smaller than it is. The
-strange "usize" name dates from the early days of GTK+, and derives
-from X Window System terminology. In many cases,
-gtk_window_set_default_size() is a better choice for toplevel
-windows than this function; setting the default size will still
-allow users to shrink the window. Setting the usize will force them
-to leave the window at least as large as the usize. When dealing
-with window sizes, gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can be a useful
-function as well.
-
-Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes,
-translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action
-can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's
-basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be
-correct.
-
-Deprecated: Use gtk_widget_set_size_request() instead.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> minimum width, or -1 to unset
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> minimum height, or -1 to unset
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_menu_label">
<description>
Retrieves the menu label widget of the page containing @child.
@@ -2377,52 +2325,38 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_layout_reorder">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_colormap">
<description>
-Re-inserts @cell at @position. Note that @cell has already to be packed
-into @cell_layout for this to function properly.
+Gets the colormap that will be used to render @widget. No reference will
+be added to the returned colormap; it should not be unreferenced.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_layout">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to reorder.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> New position to insert @cell at.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the colormap used by @widget
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_new_with_mnemonic">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_show_fill_level">
<description>
-Creates a new expander using @label as the text of the label.
-If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
-If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
-underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
-accelerator called a mnemonic.
-Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
+Gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text of the label with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkExpander widget.
+<return> %TRUE if @range shows the fill level.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -2444,30 +2378,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_label_widget">
-<description>
-Sets @label_widget as the widget that will be used as the label
-for @button. If @label_widget is %NULL the "label" property is used
-as label. If "label" is also %NULL, the label in the stock item
-determined by the "stock_id" property is used as label. If
-"stock_id" is also %NULL, @button does not have a label.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label_widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget used as label, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_label_get_attributes">
<description>
Gets the attribute list that was set on the label using
@@ -2510,33 +2420,22 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_item">
+<function name="gtk_container_get_focus_child">
<description>
-Creates an item for @entry.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Returns: The child widget which has the focus
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkItemFactoryEntry to create an item for
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_data">
-<parameter_description> data passed to the callback function of @entry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_type">
-<parameter_description> 1 if the callback function of @entry is of type
-#GtkItemFactoryCallback1, 2 if it is of type #GtkItemFactoryCallback2
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The child widget which has the focus
+inside @container, or %NULL if none is set.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_left_margin">
@@ -2558,7 +2457,7 @@
<function name="gtk_action_group_set_translation_domain">
<description>
-Sets the translation domain and uses dgettext() for translating the
+Sets the translation domain and uses g_dgettext() for translating the
@label and @tooltip of #GtkActionEntry&lt;!-- --&gt;s added by
gtk_action_group_add_actions().
@@ -2574,7 +2473,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="domain">
-<parameter_description> the translation domain to use for dgettext() calls
+<parameter_description> the translation domain to use for g_dgettext() calls
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -2645,30 +2544,20 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_get_color">
<description>
-This function tells GTK+ that the user interface for your
-application requires users to read across tree rows and associate
-cells with one another. By default, GTK+ will then render the tree
-with alternating row colors. Do &lt;emphasis&gt;not&lt;/emphasis&gt; use it
-just because you prefer the appearance of the ruled tree; that's a
-question for the theme. Some themes will draw tree rows in
-alternating colors even when rules are turned off, and users who
-prefer that appearance all the time can choose those themes. You
-should call this function only as a &lt;emphasis&gt;semantic&lt;/emphasis&gt;
-hint to the theme engine that your tree makes alternating colors
-useful from a functional standpoint (since it has lots of columns,
-generally).
+Sets @color to be the current color in the #GtkColorButton widget.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the tree requires reading across rows
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the current color.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -2847,7 +2736,7 @@
<description>
Changes the icon for a widget to a given widget. GTK+
will not destroy the icon, so if you don't want
-it to persist, you should connect to the "drag_end"
+it to persist, you should connect to the "drag-end"
signal and destroy it yourself.
</description>
@@ -2898,46 +2787,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_buildable_custom_tag_start">
-<description>
-This is called for each unknown element under &lt;child&gt;.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buildable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuildable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder used to construct this object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> child object or %NULL for non-child tags
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tagname">
-<parameter_description> name of tag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parser">
-<parameter_description> a #GMarkupParser structure to fill in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> return location for user data that will be passed in
-to parser functions
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if a object has a custom implementation, %FALSE
-if it doesn't.
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_set_has_tooltip">
<description>
Sets the has-tooltip property on @widget to @has_tooltip. See
@@ -3001,6 +2850,10 @@
set up accelerators on menu items gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path()
provides a somewhat more convenient interface.
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
@@ -3083,6 +2936,17 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem with an empty label.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_submenu">
<description>
Gets the submenu underneath this menu item, if any. See
@@ -3123,7 +2987,7 @@
<description>
Draws an extension, i.e. a notebook tab.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_extension() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_extension() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -3227,22 +3091,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_adjustment">
+<function name="gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkAdjustment associated with the #GtkScaleButton's scale.
-See gtk_range_get_adjustment() for details.
+Converts from a position in the entry contents (returned
+by gtk_entry_get_text()) to a position in the
+entry's #PangoLayout (returned by gtk_entry_get_layout(),
+with text retrieved via pango_layout_get_text()).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="layout_index">
+<parameter_description> byte index into the entry layout text
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the adjustment associated with the scale
-
-Since: 2.12
+<return> byte index into the entry contents
</return>
</function>
@@ -3283,34 +3151,22 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_n_pages">
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_get_image">
<description>
-Sets the number of pages in the document.
-
-This &lt;emphasis&gt;must&lt;/emphasis&gt; be set to a positive number
-before the rendering starts. It may be set in a
-#GtkPrintOperation::begin-print signal hander.
-
-Note that the page numbers passed to the
-#GtkPrintOperation::request-page-setup
-and #GtkPrintOperation::draw-page signals are 0-based, i.e. if
-the user chooses to print all pages, the last ::draw-page signal
-will be for page @n_pages - 1.
+Gets the dialog's image.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_pages">
-<parameter_description> the number of pages
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the dialog's image
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_unmaximize">
@@ -3322,7 +3178,7 @@
managers honor requests to unmaximize. But normally the window will
end up unmaximized. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
-You can track maximization via the "window_state_event" signal
+You can track maximization via the "window-state-event" signal
on #GtkWidget.
@@ -3411,6 +3267,27 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_calendar_set_detail_width_chars">
+<description>
+Updates the width of detail cells.
+See #GtkCalendar:detail-width-chars.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="chars">
+<parameter_description> detail width in characters.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_widget_coords">
<description>
Converts bin_window coordinates (see gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window())
@@ -3444,24 +3321,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_child_visible">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_format">
<description>
-Gets the value set with gtk_widget_set_child_visible().
-If you feel a need to use this function, your code probably
-needs reorganization.
-
-This function is only useful for container implementations and
-never should be called by an application.
+Retrieves the format of the selection.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the widget is mapped with the parent.
+<return> the format of the selection.
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -3504,28 +3378,78 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_calendar_select_month">
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_configure">
<description>
-Shifts the calendar to a different month.
+Sets all properties of the adjustment at once.
+
+Use this function to avoid multiple emissions of the "changed"
+signal. See gtk_adjustment_set_lower() for an alternative way
+of compressing multiple emissions of "changed" into one.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="month">
-<parameter_description> a month number between 0 and 11.
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the new value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="year">
-<parameter_description> the year the month is in.
+<parameter name="lower">
+<parameter_description> the new minimum value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="upper">
+<parameter_description> the new maximum value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step_increment">
+<parameter_description> the new step increment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_increment">
+<parameter_description> the new page increment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_size">
+<parameter_description> the new page size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, always
-</return>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_match_func">
+<description>
+Sets the match function for @completion to be @func. The match function
+is used to determine if a row should or should not be in the completion
+list.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkEntryCompletionMatchFunc to use.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func_data">
+<parameter_description> The user data for @func.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func_notify">
+<parameter_description> Destroy notifier for @func_data.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_set_ref">
@@ -3563,6 +3487,39 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_test_widget_click">
+<description>
+This function will generate a @button click (button press and button
+release event) in the middle of the first GdkWindow found that belongs
+to @widget.
+For %GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets like GtkButton, this will often be an
+input-only event window. For other widgets, this is usually widget-&gt;window.
+Certain caveats should be considered when using this function, in
+particular because the mouse pointer is warped to the button click
+location, see gdk_test_simulate_button() for details.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> Widget to generate a button click on.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> Number of the pointer button for the event, usually 1, 2 or 3.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> Keyboard modifiers the event is setup with.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> wether all actions neccessary for the button click simulation were carried out successfully.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_select_all">
<description>
Selects all the icons. @icon_view must has its selection mode set
@@ -3631,7 +3588,8 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to the location to store application info for target
+<parameter_description> a pointer to the location to store application info for target,
+or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -3677,25 +3635,45 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_wrap_license">
+<function name="gtk_builder_value_from_string">
<description>
-Sets whether the license text in @about is
-automatically wrapped.
+This function demarshals a value from a string. This function
+calls g_value_init() on the @value argument, so it need not be
+initialised beforehand.
+
+This function can handle char, uchar, boolean, int, uint, long,
+ulong, enum, flags, float, double, string, #GdkColor and
+#GtkAdjustment type values. Support for #GtkWidget type values is
+still to come.
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wrap_license">
-<parameter_description> whether to wrap the license
+<parameter name="pspec">
+<parameter_description> the #GParamSpec for the property
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> the string representation of the value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the #GValue to store the result in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
</function>
<function name="GtkAdjustment">
@@ -3713,6 +3691,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_overwrite_mode">
+<description>
+Sets whether the text is overwritten when typing in the #GtkEntry.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="overwrite">
+<parameter_description> new value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_get_type_hint">
<description>
Gets the type hint for this window. See gtk_window_set_type_hint().
@@ -3729,40 +3727,40 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_custom">
+<function name="GtkCellRendererCombo">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object with the
-given parameters.
+This signal is emitted each time after the user selected an item in
+the combo box, either by using the mouse or the arrow keys. Contrary
+to GtkComboBox, GtkCellRendererCombo::changed is not emitted for
+changes made to a selected item in the entry. The argument @new_iter
+corresponds to the newly selected item in the combo box and it is relative
+to the GtkTreeModel set via the model property on GtkCellRendererCombo.
+
+Note that as soon as you change the model displayed in the tree view,
+the tree view will immediately cease the editing operating. This
+means that you most probably want to refrain from changing the model
+until the combo cell renderer emits the edited or editing_canceled signal.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> the paper name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="display_name">
-<parameter_description> the human-readable name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the paper width, in units of @unit
+<parameter name="combo">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the paper height, in units of @unit
+<parameter name="path_string">
+<parameter_description> a string of the path identifying the edited cell
+(relative to the tree view model)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for @width and @height
+<parameter name="new_iter">
+<parameter_description> the new iter selected in the combo box
+(relative to the combo box model)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object, use gtk_paper_size_free()
-to free it
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_status_icon_is_embedded">
@@ -3877,40 +3875,39 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_visible_horizontal">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_refilter">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item is visible on toolbars that are
+Emits ::row_changed for each row in the child model, which causes
+the filter to re-evaluate whether a row is visible or not.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @tool_item is visible on toolbars that are
-docked horizontally.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution">
+<function name="_gtk_plug_add_to_socket">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION.
-
+Adds a plug to a socket within the same application.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="plug">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="socket_">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the resolution in dpi
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_slice">
@@ -4085,44 +4082,51 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_palette">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_title">
<description>
-Shows and hides the palette based upon the value of @has_palette.
+Sets the menu's title in tearoff mode.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_palette">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if palette is to be visible, %FALSE otherwise.
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> a title for the menu in tearoff mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_layout_clear_attributes">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_widget_new_with_backend">
<description>
-Clears all existing attributes previously set with
-gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes().
+Creates a new #GtkFileChooserWidget with a specified backend. This is
+especially useful if you use gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only() to allow
+non-local files. This is a file chooser widget that can be embedded in
+custom windows and it is the same widget that is used by
+#GtkFileChooserDialog.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_layout">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> Open or save mode for the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on.
+<parameter name="backend">
+<parameter_description> The name of the specific filesystem backend to use.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkFileChooserWidget
+
+Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_output_bin">
@@ -4148,7 +4152,7 @@
Draws a focus indicator around the given rectangle on @window using the
given style.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_focus() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_focus() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4180,32 +4184,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_groups_activate">
+<function name="gtk_icon_size_register_alias">
<description>
-Finds the first accelerator in any #GtkAccelGroup attached
-to @object that matches @accel_key and @accel_mods, and
-activates that accelerator.
-If an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress, %TRUE
-is returned.
+Registers @alias as another name for @target.
+So calling gtk_icon_size_from_name() with @alias as argument
+will return @target.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="object">
-<parameter_description> the #GObject, usually a #GtkWindow, on which
-to activate the accelerator.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> accelerator keyval from a key event
+<parameter name="alias">
+<parameter_description> an alias for @target
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> keyboard state mask from a key event
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> an existing icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the accelerator was handled, %FALSE otherwise
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_unit">
@@ -4256,20 +4253,64 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_get_event_widget">
+<function name="gtk_paint_slider">
<description>
-If @event is %NULL or the event was not associated with any widget,
-Return value: the widget that originally received @event, or %NULL
+Draws a slider in the given rectangle on @window using the
+given style and orientation.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> a shadow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the orientation to be used
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the widget that originally received @event, or %NULL
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_get_default_files">
@@ -4287,6 +4328,32 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_box_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkHBox.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the box' orientation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="homogeneous">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if all children are to be given equal space allocations.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="spacing">
+<parameter_description> the number of pixels to place by default between children.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkHBox.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_add_editable">
<description>
Adds an "empty" row at the beginning of the model. This does not refer to
@@ -4308,6 +4375,37 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_load_key_file">
+<description>
+Reads the print settings from the group @group_name in @key_file.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the settings from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group to use, or %NULL to use the default
+"Print Settings"
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_pos">
<description>
Sets the edge at which the tabs for switching pages in the
@@ -4342,11 +4440,11 @@
Note that the background is still drawn when the widget is mapped.
If this is not suitable (e.g. because you want to make a transparent
window using an RGBA visual), you can work around this by doing:
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+|[
gtk_widget_realize (window);
gdk_window_set_back_pixmap (window-&gt;window, NULL, FALSE);
gtk_widget_show (window);
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -4385,24 +4483,18 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_set_title">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_new">
<description>
-Modifies the @title of the browse dialog used by @button.
+Creates a new #GtkPageSetup.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> the button widget to modify.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the new browse dialog title.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkPageSetup.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_new">
@@ -4440,6 +4532,8 @@
Sets the current color in an HSV color selector. Color component values must
be in the [0.0, 1.0] range.
+Since: 2.14
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="hsv">
@@ -4462,78 +4556,37 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_handle">
+<function name="gtk_calendar_thaw">
<description>
-Draws a handle as used in #GtkHandleBox and #GtkPaned.
+Does nothing. Previously defrosted a calendar; all the changes made
+since the last gtk_calendar_freeze() were displayed.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_handle() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.8:
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the handle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the handle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> with of the handle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height of the handle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the orientation of the handle
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_clear">
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_is_showing">
<description>
-The default handler for the GtkWidget::selection_clear_event
-signal.
-
+Returns: %TRUE if @op is currently displaying a window
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> the event
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the event was handled, otherwise false
-
-Since: 2.2
+<return> %TRUE if @op is currently displaying a window
-Deprecated: 2.4: Instead of calling this function, chain up from
-your selection_clear_event handler. Calling this function
-from any other context is illegal.
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -4601,51 +4654,30 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_check_version">
+<function name="gtk_builder_add_from_file">
<description>
-Checks that the GTK+ library in use is compatible with the
-given version. Generally you would pass in the constants
-#GTK_MAJOR_VERSION, #GTK_MINOR_VERSION, #GTK_MICRO_VERSION
-as the three arguments to this function; that produces
-a check that the library in use is compatible with
-the version of GTK+ the application or module was compiled
-against.
-
-Compatibility is defined by two things: first the version
-of the running library is newer than the version
- required_major required_minor @required_micro. Second
-the running library must be binary compatible with the
-version @required_major required_minor required_micro
-(same major version.)
-
-This function is primarily for GTK+ modules; the module
-can call this function to check that it wasn't loaded
-into an incompatible version of GTK+. However, such a
-a check isn't completely reliable, since the module may be
-linked against an old version of GTK+ and calling the
-old version of gtk_check_version(), but still get loaded
-into an application using a newer version of GTK+.
+Parses a file containing a &lt;link linkend="BUILDER-UI"&gt;GtkBuilder
+UI definition&lt;/link&gt; and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="required_major">
-<parameter_description> the required major version.
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="required_minor">
-<parameter_description> the required minor version.
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> the name of the file to parse
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="required_micro">
-<parameter_description> the required micro version.
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %NULL if the GTK+ library is compatible with the
-given version, or a string describing the version mismatch.
-The returned string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified
-or freed.
+<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
+
+Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -4666,23 +4698,28 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_ui">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label">
<description>
-Creates a &lt;link linkend="XML-UI"&gt;UI definition&lt;/link&gt; of the merged UI.
-
+Changes the tab label for @child. If %NULL is specified
+for @tab_label, then the page will have the label 'page N'.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tab_label">
+<parameter_description> the tab label widget to use, or %NULL for default tab
+label.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated string containing an XML representation of
-the merged UI.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="GtkAboutDialog">
@@ -4697,30 +4734,89 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_text_length">
<description>
-Insert a #GtkToolItem into the toolbar at position @pos. If @pos is
-0 the item is prepended to the start of the toolbar. If @pos is
-negative, the item is appended to the end of the toolbar.
+Retrieves the current length of the text in
+ entry
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description> the position of the new item
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the current number of characters
+in #GtkEntry, or 0 if there are none.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_data">
+<description>
+Retrieves the raw data of the selection.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the raw data of the selection.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert">
+<description>
+Insert a #GtkToolItem into the toolbar at position @pos. If @pos is
+0 the item is prepended to the start of the toolbar. If @pos is
+negative, the item is appended to the end of the toolbar.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pos">
+<parameter_description> the position of the new item
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_orientation">
+<description>
+Sets the ::orientation property which determines whether the labels
+are drawn beside the icons instead of below.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the relative position of texts and icons
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_widget_propagate_screen_changed">
@@ -4742,20 +4838,22 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_remove_selection_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_icon_set">
<description>
-Removes a #GtkClipboard added with
-gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard().
+See gtk_image_new_from_icon_set() for details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard added to @buffer by
-gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard()
+<parameter name="icon_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -4823,6 +4921,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="_gtk_window_set_has_toplevel_focus">
+<description>
+Internal function that sets whether the keyboard focus for the
+toplevel window (taking into account inter-process embedding.)
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="has_toplevel_focus">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_with_valuesv">
<description>
A variant of gtk_list_store_insert_with_values() which
@@ -4932,6 +5049,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_overwrite_mode">
+<description>
+Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_overwrite_mode().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether the text is overwritten when typing.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_lines">
<description>
Moves @count lines backward, if possible (if @count would move
@@ -4958,6 +5093,32 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_show_about_dialog">
+<description>
+This is a convenience function for showing an application's about box.
+The constructed dialog is associated with the parent window and
+reused for future invocations of this function.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="first_property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the first property
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties, %NULL-terminated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_send_expose">
<description>
Very rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
@@ -4988,27 +5149,29 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_set_image">
+<function name="gtk_rc_parse_color">
<description>
-Set the image of @button to the given widget. Note that
-it depends on the #GtkSettings:gtk-button-images setting whether the
-image will be displayed or not, you don't have to call
-gtk_widget_show() on @image yourself.
+Parses a color in the &lt;link linkend="color=format"&gt;format&lt;/link&gt; expected
+in a RC file.
+
+Note that theme engines should use gtk_rc_parse_color_full() in
+order to support symbolic colors.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+<parameter name="scanner">
+<parameter_description> a #GScanner
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a widget to set as the image for the button
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GdkColor structure in which to store the result
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %G_TOKEN_NONE if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token
+that was expected but not found
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_grid_lines">
@@ -5029,19 +5192,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_socket_get_private">
-<description>
- socket: a #GtkSocket
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return>the private data associated with a GtkSocket, creating it
-first if necessary.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_printer">
<description>
Convenience function to obtain the value of
@@ -5061,23 +5211,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_handle_position">
-<description>
-Gets the handle position of the handle box. See
-gtk_handle_box_set_handle_position().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="handle_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the current handle position.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_store_insert_after">
<description>
Inserts a new row after @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will be
@@ -5200,20 +5333,21 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_spacing">
+<function name="gtk_paned_get_child1">
<description>
-Return value: the space between cells
+Obtains the first child of the paned widget.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="paned">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaned widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the space between cells
+<return> first child, or %NULL if it is not set.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -5243,53 +5377,36 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_paste_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_ruler_get_range">
<description>
-Pastes the contents of a clipboard at the insertion point, or at
- override_location (Note: pasting is asynchronous, that is, we'll
-ask for the paste data and return, and at some point later after
-the main loop runs, the paste data will be inserted.)
+Retrieves values indicating the range and current position of a #GtkRuler.
+See gtk_ruler_set_range().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="ruler">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRuler
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkClipboard to paste from
+<parameter name="lower">
+<parameter_description> location to store lower limit of the ruler, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="override_location">
-<parameter_description> location to insert pasted text, or %NULL for
-at the cursor
+<parameter name="upper">
+<parameter_description> location to store upper limit of the ruler, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="default_editable">
-<parameter_description> whether the buffer is editable by default
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> location to store the current position of the mark on the ruler, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_owner">
-<description>
-If the clipboard contents callbacks were set with
-gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner(), and the gtk_clipboard_set_with_data() or
-gtk_clipboard_clear() has not subsequently called, returns the owner set
-by gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+<parameter name="max_size">
+<parameter_description> location to store the maximum size of the ruler used when calculating
+the space to leave for the text, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the owner of the clipboard, if any; otherwise %NULL.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_begin_move_drag">
@@ -5420,6 +5537,23 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_relief_style">
+<description>
+Return value: The relief style of buttons on @shell.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="shell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The relief style of buttons on @shell.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_drag_source_set_icon_name">
<description>
Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
@@ -5460,21 +5594,84 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_recent_chooser_get_recent_manager">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_size_list">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkRecentManager used by @chooser.
+This returns the #GtkTreeeView used to list font sizes.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the recent manager for @chooser.
+<return> A #GtkWidget.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_spacing">
+<description>
+Return value: the space between cells
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the space between cells
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_select_range">
+<description>
+This function moves the "insert" and "selection_bound" marks
+simultaneously. If you move them in two steps
+with gtk_text_buffer_move_mark(), you will temporarily select a
+region in between their old and new locations, which can be pretty
+inefficient since the temporarily-selected region will force stuff
+to be recalculated. This function moves them as a unit, which can
+be optimized.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ins">
+<parameter_description> where to put the "insert" mark
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bound">
+<parameter_description> where to put the "selection_bound" mark
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_get_action">
+<description>
+Gets the action for this entry.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser_entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the action
</return>
</function>
@@ -5495,33 +5692,72 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_new_from_key_file">
+<function name="gtk_paint_box_gap">
<description>
-Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
- key_file Returns a new #GtkPageSetup object with the restored
-page setup, or %NULL if an error occurred.
-
+Draws a box in @window using the given style and state and shadow type,
+leaving a gap in one side.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
-to use the default name "Page Setup"
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_side">
+<parameter_description> side in which to leave the gap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_x">
+<parameter_description> starting position of the gap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_width">
+<parameter_description> width of the gap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the restored #GtkPageSetup
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_scrolled_window_get_spacing">
@@ -5672,24 +5908,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_get_items">
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_set_parent">
<description>
-Gets the list of recently used resources.
+Sets the transient parent for windows shown by the
+#GtkMountOperation.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent of the window, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a list of newly allocated #GtkRecentInfo objects. Use
-gtk_recent_info_unref() on each item inside the list, and then
-free the list itself using g_list_free().
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_text">
@@ -5720,34 +5957,46 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_insert_page">
+<function name="gtk_test_text_set">
<description>
-Insert a page into @notebook at the given position.
+Set the text string of @widget to @string if it is a GtkLabel,
+GtkEditable (entry and text widgets) or GtkTextView.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> valid widget pointer.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> a 0-terminated C string
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_tag_toggle">
+<description>
+Moves forward to the next toggle (on or off) of the
+#GtkTextTag @tag, or to the next toggle of any tag if
+ tag is %NULL. If no matching tag toggles are found,
+Return value: whether we found a tag toggle after @iter
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page,
-or -1 to append the page after all other pages.
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting from 0) of the inserted
-page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
+<return> whether we found a tag toggle after @iter
</return>
</function>
@@ -5811,60 +6060,16 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_for_text">
-<description>
-Requests the contents of the clipboard as text and converts
-the result to UTF-8 if necessary. This function waits for
-the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
-timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated UTF-8 string which must
-be freed with g_free(), or %NULL if retrieving
-the selection data failed. (This could happen
-for various reasons, in particular if the
-clipboard was empty or if the contents of the
-clipboard could not be converted into text form.)
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_file_system_get_parent">
+<function name="_gtk_socket_end_embedding">
<description>
-Gets the name of the parent folder of a path. If the path has no parent, as when
-you request the parent of a file system root, then @parent will be set to %NULL.
+ socket: a #GtkSocket
+Called to end the embedding of a plug in the socket.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_system">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> base path name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> location to store parent path name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the operation was successful: @parent will be set to
-the name of the @path's parent, or to %NULL if @path is already a file system
-root. If the operation fails, this function returns %FALSE, sets @parent to
-NULL, and sets the @error value if it is specified.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_overwrite_mode">
@@ -5885,29 +6090,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_preview_render_page">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_side_image">
<description>
-Renders a page to the preview, using the print context that
-was passed to the #GtkPrintOperation::preview handler together
-with @preview.
-
-Note that this function requires a suitable cairo context to
-be associated with the print context.
+Gets the header image for @page.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="preview">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperationPreview
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_nr">
-<parameter_description> the page to render
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the side image for @page, or %NULL
+if there's no side image for the page.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_toggle_action_toggled">
@@ -6029,87 +6232,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_set_translation_domain">
-<description>
-Sets the translation domain of @builder.
-See #GtkBuilder:translation-domain.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="domain">
-<parameter_description> the translation domain or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_deserialize_set_can_create_tags">
+<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_get_file">
<description>
-Use this function to allow a rich text deserialization function to
-create new tags in the receiving buffer. Note that using this
-function is almost always a bad idea, because the rich text
-functions you register should know how to map the rich text format
-they handler to your text buffers set of tags.
-
-The ability of creating new (arbitrary!) tags in the receiving buffer
-is meant for special rich text formats like the internal one that
-is registered using gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset(),
-because that format is essentially a dump of the internal structure
-of the source buffer, including its tag names.
-
-You should allow creation of tags only if you know what you are
-doing, e.g. if you defined a tagset name for your application
-suite's text buffers and you know that it's fine to receive new
-tags from these buffers, because you know that your application can
-handle the newly created tags.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkAtom representing a registered rich text format
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="can_create_tags">
-<parameter_description> whether deserializing this format may create tags
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Gets the path for a particular row in @model.
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_menu_label">
-<description>
-Changes the menu label for the page containing @child.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the child widget
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="menu_label">
-<parameter_description> the menu label, or NULL for default
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row of @model
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the file. This object is owned by @model and
+or freed. If you want to save the path for later use,
+you must take a ref, since the object may be freed
+on later changes to the file system.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset">
@@ -6187,7 +6330,7 @@
<description>
Initializes an item factory.
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -6236,6 +6379,27 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_link_button_set_visited">
+<description>
+Sets the 'visited' state of the URI where the #GtkLinkButton
+points. See gtk_link_button_get_visited() for more details.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="link_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLinkButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="visited">
+<parameter_description> the new 'visited' state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_class_find_style_property">
<description>
Finds a style property of a widget class by name.
@@ -6258,6 +6422,32 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_line_yrange">
+<description>
+Find the range of y coordinates for the paragraph containing
+the given iter.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> location to store the top of the paragraph in pixels,
+or %NULL.
+ height location to store the height of the paragraph in pixels,
+or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_combo_box_popup">
<description>
Pops up the menu or dropdown list of @combo_box.
@@ -6329,46 +6519,38 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_prepend_item">
+<function name="SECTION">
<description>
-Adds a new button to the beginning (top or left edges) of the given toolbar.
-
- callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use the GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC() to cast the function to #GtkSignalFunc.
+The #GtkToolShell interface allows container widgets to provide additional
+information when embedding #GtkToolItem widgets.
+ see_also: #GtkToolbar, #GtkToolItem
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> give your toolbar button a label.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> a string that appears when the user holds the mouse over this item.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> use with #GtkTipsQuery.
+<parameter name="short_description">
+<parameter_description> Interface for containers containing #GtkToolItem widgets.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to any data you wish to be passed to the callback.
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_rc_find_module_in_path">
+<description>
+Searches for a theme engine in the GTK+ search path. This function
+is not useful for applications and should not be used.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="module_file">
+<parameter_description> name of a theme engine
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new toolbar item as a #GtkWidget.
+<return> The filename, if found (must be freed with g_free()),
+otherwise %NULL.
</return>
</function>
@@ -6384,22 +6566,61 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_website_label">
+<function name="gtk_paint_expander">
<description>
-Return value: The label used for the website link. The string is owned by the about
+Draws an expander as used in #GtkTreeView. @x and @y specify the
+center the expander. The size of the expander is determined by the
+"expander-size" style property of @widget. (If widget is not
+specified or doesn't have an "expander-size" property, an
+unspecified default size will be used, since the caller doesn't
+have sufficient information to position the expander, this is
+likely not useful.) The expander is expander_size pixels tall
+in the collapsed position and expander_size pixels wide in the
+expanded position.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x position to draw the expander at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y position to draw the expander at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expander_style">
+<parameter_description> the style to draw the expander in; determines
+whether the expander is collapsed, expanded, or in an
+intermediate state.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The label used for the website link. The string is owned by the about
-dialog and must not be modified.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords">
@@ -6440,27 +6661,20 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_height">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_unset_model_drag_dest">
<description>
-Gets the paper height of the #GtkPaperSize, in
-units of @unit.
+Undoes the effect of gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_dest().
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the paper height
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_printer_is_default">
@@ -6661,6 +6875,9 @@
<description>
Sets the URL to use for the website link.
+Note that that the hook functions need to be set up
+before calling this function.
+
Since: 2.6
</description>
@@ -6783,6 +7000,45 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_current_page">
+<description>
+Sets the current page number. If @current_page is not -1, this enables
+the current page choice for the range of pages to print.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="current_page">
+<parameter_description> the current page number.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_copy_clipboard">
+<description>
+Copies the currently-selected text to a clipboard.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkClipboard object to copy to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_homogeneous">
<description>
Sets whether @tool_item is to be allocated the same size as other
@@ -6805,65 +7061,95 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_style">
+<function name="gtk_builder_add_from_string">
<description>
-Retrieves whether the toolbar has text, icons, or both . See
-gtk_toolbar_set_style().
-
+Parses a string containing a &lt;link linkend="BUILDER-UI"&gt;GtkBuilder
+UI definition&lt;/link&gt; and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> the string to parse
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="length">
+<parameter_description> the length of @buffer (may be -1 if @buffer is nul-terminated)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current style of @toolbar
+<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
+
+Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_path">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_ok_button">
<description>
-Sets the current folder for @chooser from a #GtkFilePath.
-Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri().
+Gets the 'OK' button.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkFilePath for the new folder
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GtkWidget used in the dialog for the 'OK' button.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_border">
+<description>
+Sets the width the border around the tab labels
+in a notebook. This is equivalent to calling
+gtk_notebook_set_tab_hborder (@notebook, @border_width) followed
+by gtk_notebook_set_tab_vborder (@notebook, @border_width).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="border_width">
+<parameter_description> width of the border around the tab labels.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the folder could be changed successfully, %FALSE
-otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_column_span_column">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_new_from_stock">
<description>
-Returns: the column span column.
+Creates a new #GtkToolButton containing the image and text from a
+stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
+and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
+
+It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the column span column.
+<return> A new #GtkToolButton
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -6967,42 +7253,29 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_has_frame">
+<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_right_justified">
<description>
-(Note: this is a special-purpose function for the framebuffer port,
-that causes GTK+ to draw its own window border. For most applications,
-you want gtk_window_set_decorated() instead, which tells the window
-manager whether to draw the window border.)
-
-If this function is called on a window with setting of %TRUE, before
-it is realized or showed, it will have a "frame" window around
- window-&gt;window, accessible in @window-&gt;frame. Using the signal
-frame_event you can receive all events targeted at the frame.
-
-This function is used by the linux-fb port to implement managed
-windows, but it could conceivably be used by X-programs that
-want to do their own window decorations.
+Gets whether the menu item appears justified at the right
+side of the menu bar.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> a boolean
+<parameter name="menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the menu item will appear at the
+far right if added to a menu bar.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert">
<description>
Inserts @len bytes of @text at position @iter. If @len is -1,
@text must be nul-terminated and will be inserted in its
-entirety. Emits the "insert_text" signal; insertion actually occurs
+entirety. Emits the "insert-text" signal; insertion actually occurs
in the default handler for the signal. @iter is invalidated when
insertion occurs (because the buffer contents change), but the
default signal handler revalidates it to point to the end of the
@@ -7074,12 +7347,12 @@
gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes() on the newly created #GtkTreeViewColumn.
Here's a simple example:
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+|[
enum { TEXT_COLUMN, COLOR_COLUMN, N_COLUMNS };
...
{
GtkTreeViewColumn *column;
-GtkCellRenderer *renderer = gtk_cell_renderer_text_new (&lt;!-- --&gt;);
+GtkCellRenderer *renderer = gtk_cell_renderer_text_new ();
column = gtk_tree_view_column_new_with_attributes ("Title",
renderer,
@@ -7087,7 +7360,7 @@
"foreground", COLOR_COLUMN,
NULL);
}
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
</description>
@@ -7188,33 +7461,19 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri">
+<function name="_gtk_get_module_path">
<description>
-Gets the current folder of @chooser as an URI.
-See gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri().
-
-Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
-(e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents"), which is &lt;emphasis&gt;not the same&lt;/emphasis&gt;
-as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
-#GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_SELECT_FOLDER mode
-(e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents/selected-folder/". To get the
-currently-selected folder in that mode, use gtk_file_chooser_get_uri() as the
-usual way to get the selection.
+Determines the search path for a particular type of module.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> the type of the module, for instance 'modules', 'engines', immodules'
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the URI for the current folder. Free with g_free(). This
-function will also return %NULL if the file chooser was unable to load the
-last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling
-gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri() on a nonexistent folder.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> the search path for the module type. Free with g_strfreev().
</return>
</function>
@@ -7389,43 +7648,68 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_new">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_markup">
<description>
-Creates a new file-selecting button widget.
+Parses @str which is marked up with the &lt;link
+linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango text markup language&lt;/link&gt;, setting the
+label's text and attribute list based on the parse results. If the @str is
+external data, you may need to escape it with g_markup_escape_text() or
+g_markup_printf_escaped()&lt;!-- --&gt;:
+|[
+char *markup;
+markup = g_markup_printf_escaped ("&lt;span style=\"italic\"&gt;&percnt;s&lt;/span&gt;", str);
+gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (label), markup);
+g_free (markup);
+]|
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the title of the browse dialog.
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the open mode for the widget.
+<parameter name="str">
+<parameter_description> a markup string (see &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango markup format&lt;/link&gt;)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new button widget.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_default_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon">
<description>
-Returns: the default page setup
+Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. This icon is used when
+the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
+managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
+frame, or display it in other contexts.
+
+The icon should be provided in whatever size it was naturally
+drawn; that is, don't scale the image before passing it to
+GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute, when the desired
+final size is known, to allow best quality.
+
+If you have your icon hand-drawn in multiple sizes, use
+gtk_window_set_icon_list(). Then the best size will be used.
+
+This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon_list()
+with a 1-element list.
+
+See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
+for all windows in your application in one go.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> icon image, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default page setup
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_width">
@@ -7449,38 +7733,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_set_drop_highlight_item">
-<description>
-Highlights @toolbar to give an idea of what it would look like
-if @item was added to @toolbar at the position indicated by @index_.
-If @item is %NULL, highlighting is turned off. In that case @index_
-is ignored.
-
-The @tool_item passed to this function must not be part of any widget
-hierarchy. When an item is set as drop highlight item it can not
-added to any widget hierarchy or used as highlight item for another
-toolbar.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem, or %NULL to turn of highlighting
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="index_">
-<parameter_description> a position on @toolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_private">
<description>
Return value: %TRUE if the recent chooser should show private items,
@@ -7561,6 +7813,7 @@
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_item">
<description>
Sets the tip area of @tooltip to be the area covered by the item at @path.
+See also gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().
Since: 2.12
@@ -7648,20 +7901,27 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_get_model">
+<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf">
<description>
-Return value: the model
+Gets the built-in image for this icon, if any. To allow
+GTK+ to use built in icon images, you must pass the
+%GTK_ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN to
+gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="reference">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference
+<parameter name="icon_info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo structure
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the model
+<return> the built-in image pixbuf, or %NULL. No
+extra reference is added to the returned pixbuf, so if
+you want to keep it around, you must use g_object_ref().
+The returned image must not be modified.
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -7697,6 +7957,36 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_from_file">
+<description>
+Sets the icon for @window.
+Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
+
+This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon()
+with a pixbuf created by loading the image from @filename.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> location of icon file
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="err">
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
+
+Since: 2.2
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_cursor_visible">
<description>
Sets whether the insertion cursor should be shown. Generally,
@@ -7743,63 +8033,57 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_convert">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_lookup_by_gicon">
<description>
-Requests the contents of a selection. When received,
-a "selection_received" signal will be generated.
+Looks up an icon and returns a structure containing
+information such as the filename of the icon.
+The icon can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
+gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> The widget which acts as requestor
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> Which selection to get
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> the #GIcon to look up
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> Form of information desired (e.g., STRING)
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> desired icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="time_">
-<parameter_description> Time of request (usually of triggering event)
- In emergency, you could use #GDK_CURRENT_TIME
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if requested succeeded. %FALSE if we could not process
-request. (e.g., there was already a request in process for
-this widget).
+<return> a #GtkIconInfo structure containing
+information about the icon, or %NULL if the icon
+wasn't found. Free with gtk_icon_info_free()
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_name">
<description>
-This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder models that
-support the #GtkDragSourceIface and the #GtkDragDestIface. Both
-#GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support these. If @reorderable is %TRUE, then
-the user can reorder the model by dragging and dropping rows. The
-developer can listen to these changes by connecting to the model's
-row_inserted and row_deleted signals.
+Gets the name of the #GtkPaperSize.
-This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any
-reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably
-handle drag and drop manually.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="reorderable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the tree can be reordered.
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the name of @size
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_to_file">
@@ -7900,7 +8184,7 @@
<description>
Sets the cursor position in an entry to the given value.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_editable_set_position() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_set_position() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -7921,17 +8205,37 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_get_im_module_file">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_label_widget">
<description>
-Obtains the path to the IM modules file. See the documentation
-of the &lt;link linkend="im-module-file"&gt;&lt;envar&gt;GTK_IM_MODULE_FILE&lt;/envar&gt;&lt;/link&gt;
-environment variable for more details.
+Return value: The widget used as label on @button, or %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated string containing the name of the file
-listing the IM modules available for loading
+<return> The widget used as label on @button, or %NULL.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_window">
+<description>
+Return value: @widget's window.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> @widget's window.
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -7963,11 +8267,31 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_orientation">
+<description>
+Gets the orientation of the #GtkScaleButton's popup window.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GtkScaleButton's orientation.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_hsv_to_rgb">
<description>
Converts a color from RGB space to HSV. Input values must be in the
[0.0, 1.0] range; output values will be in the same range.
+Since: 2.14
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="r">
@@ -7998,25 +8322,22 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_width">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_adjustment">
<description>
-Return value: the page width.
+Replaces the #GtkAdjustment associated with @spin_button.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment to replace the existing adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page width.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_serialize">
@@ -8141,22 +8462,41 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs">
+<function name="gtk_layout_get_bin_window">
<description>
-Sets whether to show the tabs for the notebook or not.
+Retrieve the bin window of the layout used for drawing operations.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_tabs">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the tabs should be shown.
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GdkWindow
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_exists">
+<description>
+Checks whether the resource pointed by @info still exists. At
+the moment this check is done only on resources pointing to local files.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the resource exists
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="GtkMenuBar">
@@ -8206,7 +8546,7 @@
Draws an option menu tab (i.e. the up and down pointing arrows)
in the given rectangle on @window using the given parameters.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_tab() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_tab() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8246,6 +8586,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_size">
+<description>
+The selected font size.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #gint representing the font size selected, or -1
+if not.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_target_list_ref">
<description>
Increases the reference count of a #GtkTargetList by one.
@@ -8314,6 +8673,28 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_drag_source_row_draggable">
+<description>
+Asks the #GtkTreeDragSource whether a particular row can be used as
+the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn't implement
+this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="drag_source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeDragSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> row on which user is initiating a drag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the row can be dragged
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_move">
<description>
Asks the &lt;link linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt; to move
@@ -8471,45 +8852,20 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_group">
+<function name="gtk_expander_get_use_markup">
<description>
-Gets the current group identificator pointer for @notebook.
-
+Return value: %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="expander">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the group identificator, or %NULL if none is set.
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_recent_filter_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRecentFilter with no rules added to it.
-Such filter does not accept any recently used resources, so is not
-particularly useful until you add rules with
-gtk_recent_filter_add_pattern(), gtk_recent_filter_add_mime_type(),
-gtk_recent_filter_add_application(), gtk_recent_filter_add_age().
-To create a filter that accepts any recently used resource, use:
-
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
-GtkRecentFilter *filter = gtk_recent_filter_new (&lt;!-- --&gt;);
-gtk_recent_filter_add_pattern (filter, "*");
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkRecentFilter
+<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -8535,6 +8891,28 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new file-selecting button widget.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the title of the browse dialog.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the open mode for the widget.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new button widget.
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="_gtk_plug_focus_first_last">
<description>
@plug: a #GtkPlug
@@ -8612,18 +8990,20 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_min_width">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_orientation">
<description>
-Return value: The minimum width of the @tree_column.
+Retrieves the current orientation of the toolbar. See
+gtk_toolbar_set_orientation().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The minimum width of the @tree_column.
+<return> the orientation
</return>
</function>
@@ -8690,20 +9070,21 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> The label displayed in menu items and on buttons
+<parameter_description> The label displayed in menu items and on buttons, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> A tooltip for this action
+<parameter_description> A tooltip for this action, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> The stock icon to display in widgets representing this action
+<parameter_description> The stock icon to display in widgets representing this
+action, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> The value which gtk_radio_action_get_current_value() should return
-if this action is selected.
+<parameter_description> The value which gtk_radio_action_get_current_value() should
+return if this action is selected.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -8757,9 +9138,9 @@
of the language which is currently used in the user interface.
Using gettext(), a simple way to achieve that is to mark the
string for translation:
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+|[
gtk_about_dialog_set_translator_credits (about, _("translator-credits"));
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
It is a good idea to use the customary msgid "translator-credits" for this
purpose, since translators will already know the purpose of that msgid, and
since #GtkAboutDialog will detect if "translator-credits" is untranslated
@@ -8921,6 +9302,27 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_not_found">
+<description>
+Sets whether @chooser should display the recently used resources that
+it didn't find. This only applies to local resources.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="show_not_found">
+<parameter_description> whether to show the local items we didn't find
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_active">
<description>
Activates or deactivates a cell renderer.
@@ -8954,21 +9356,24 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_popup_completion">
+<function name="gtk_entry_prepend_text">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if popup completion is turned on
+Prepends the given text to the contents of the widget.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_insert_text() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> the text to prepend
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if popup completion is turned on
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_modify_font">
@@ -9036,6 +9441,82 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_icon_size">
+<description>
+Retrieves the icon size for the tool shell. Tool items must not call this
+function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_icon_size() instead.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="shell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the current size for icons of @shell
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_style_copy">
+<description>
+Creates a copy of the passed in #GtkStyle object.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a copy of @style
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_layout_offsets">
+<description>
+
+Obtains the position of the #PangoLayout used to render text
+in the entry, in widget coordinates. Useful if you want to line
+up the text in an entry with some other text, e.g. when using the
+entry to implement editable cells in a sheet widget.
+
+Also useful to convert mouse events into coordinates inside the
+#PangoLayout, e.g. to take some action if some part of the entry text
+is clicked.
+
+Note that as the user scrolls around in the entry the offsets will
+change; you'll need to connect to the "notify::scroll-offset"
+signal to track this. Remember when using the #PangoLayout
+functions you need to convert to and from pixels using
+PANGO_PIXELS() or #PANGO_SCALE.
+
+Keep in mind that the layout text may contain a preedit string, so
+gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index() and
+gtk_entry_text_index_to_layout_index() are needed to convert byte
+indices in the layout to byte indices in the entry contents.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> location to store X offset of layout, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> location to store Y offset of layout, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_sensitive">
<description>
Sets the sensitivity of a widget. A widget is sensitive if the user
@@ -9211,64 +9692,42 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden">
<description>
-Sets @iter to be the child of @parent, using the given index. The first
-index is 0. If @n is too big, or @parent has no children, @iter is set
-to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned. @parent will remain a valid
-node after this function has been called. As a special case, if @parent is
-%NULL, then the @n&lt;!-- --&gt;th root node is set.
+Sets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to set to the nth child.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to get the child from, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n">
-<parameter_description> Then index of the desired child.
+<parameter name="show_hidden">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if hidden files and folders should be displayed.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @parent has an @n&lt;!-- --&gt;th child.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order">
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_job_count">
<description>
-Changes the appearance of the sort indicator.
-
-This &lt;emphasis&gt;does not&lt;/emphasis&gt; actually sort the model. Use
-gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_column_id() if you want automatic sorting
-support. This function is primarily for custom sorting behavior, and should
-be used in conjunction with gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column() to do
-that. For custom models, the mechanism will vary.
+Gets the number of jobs currently queued on the printer.
-The sort indicator changes direction to indicate normal sort or reverse sort.
-Note that you must have the sort indicator enabled to see anything when
-calling this function; see gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="order">
-<parameter_description> sort order that the sort indicator should indicate
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the number of jobs on @printer
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_queue_draw">
@@ -9428,25 +9887,27 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_artists">
+<function name="gtk_widget_common_ancestor">
<description>
-Sets the strings which are displayed in the artists tab
-of the secondary credits dialog.
+Find the common ancestor of @widget_a and @widget_b that
+is closest to the two widgets.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="widget_a">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="artists">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
+<parameter name="widget_b">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the closest common ancestor of @widget_a and
+ widget_b or %NULL if @widget_a and @widget_b do not
+share a common ancestor.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_page_set">
@@ -9562,20 +10023,15 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_version">
+<function name="_gtk_path_bar_up">
<description>
-Sets the version string to display in the about dialog.
-
-Since: 2.6
+If the selected button in the pathbar is not the furthest button "up" (in the
+root direction), act as if the user clicked on the next button up.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="version">
-<parameter_description> the version string
+<parameter name="path_bar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPathBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -9626,6 +10082,31 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter_from_string">
+<description>
+Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path_string, if it
+exists. Otherwise, @iter is left invalid and %FALSE is returned.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path_string">
+<parameter_description> A string representation of a #GtkTreePath.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_set_group">
<description>
Adds @button to @group, removing it from the group it belonged to before.
@@ -9668,7 +10149,7 @@
using the given style and state and shadow type, leaving a
gap in one side.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_shadow_gap() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_shadow_gap() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -9730,7 +10211,7 @@
windows. But normally the window will end up restored to its normal
state. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
-You can track the fullscreen state via the "window_state_event" signal
+You can track the fullscreen state via the "window-state-event" signal
on #GtkWidget.
Since: 2.2
@@ -9745,19 +10226,53 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_is_valid">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_index">
<description>
-Check if there are any invalid regions in a #GtkTextLayout's buffer
+Same as gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset(), but works with a
+&lt;emphasis&gt;byte&lt;/emphasis&gt; index. The given byte index must be at
+the start of a character, it can't be in the middle of a UTF-8
+encoded character.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="byte_on_line">
+<parameter_description> a byte index relative to the start of @iter's current line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if any invalid regions were found
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_lines">
+<description>
+Moves @count visible lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
+past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
+the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
+onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
+moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
+the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
+moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of lines to move forward
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+
+Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
@@ -9935,54 +10450,96 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_get_row_drag_data">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_unselect_path">
<description>
-Obtains a @tree_model and @path from selection data of target type
-%GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW. Normally called from a drag_data_received handler.
-This function can only be used if @selection_data originates from the same
-process that's calling this function, because a pointer to the tree model
-is being passed around. If you aren't in the same process, then you'll
-get memory corruption. In the #GtkTreeDragDest drag_data_received handler,
-you can assume that selection data of type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW is
-in from the current process. The returned path must be freed with
-gtk_tree_path_free().
+Unselects the row at @path.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> row in @tree_model
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath to be unselected.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @selection_data had target type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW and
-is otherwise valid
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_row_spacing">
+<function name="gtk_paint_layout">
<description>
-Return value: the space between rows
+Draws a layout on @window using the given parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_text">
+<parameter_description> whether to use the text or foreground
+graphics context of @style
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> the layout to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the space between rows
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_remove_space">
+<description>
+Removes a space from the specified position.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the index of the space to remove.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_can_insert">
@@ -10010,36 +10567,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_match_func">
-<description>
-Sets the match function for @completion to be @func. The match function
-is used to determine if a row should or should not be in the completion
-list.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkEntryCompletionMatchFunc to use.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func_data">
-<parameter_description> The user data for @func.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func_notify">
-<parameter_description> Destroy notifier for @func_data.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_icon_size">
<description>
Return value: a #GtkIconSize indicating the icon size used for @tool_item
@@ -10143,6 +10670,32 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_is_uris_available">
+<description>
+Test to see if there is a list of URIs available to be pasted
+This is done by requesting the TARGETS atom and checking
+if it contains the URI targets. This function
+waits for the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
+timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
+
+This function is a little faster than calling
+gtk_clipboard_wait_for_uris() since it doesn't need to retrieve
+the actual URI data.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE is there is an URI list available, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_disconnect_accelerator">
<description>
Undoes the effect of one call to gtk_action_connect_accelerator().
@@ -10252,7 +10805,7 @@
a stock item.
If no function is registered for a translation domain,
-dgettext() is used.
+g_dgettext() is used.
Since: 2.8
@@ -10272,7 +10825,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="notify">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDestroyNotify that is called when @data is
+<parameter_description> a #GDestroyNotify that is called when @data is
no longer needed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -10334,26 +10887,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_get_animation">
-<description>
-Gets the #GdkPixbufAnimation being displayed by the #GtkImage.
-The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
-%GTK_IMAGE_ANIMATION (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
-The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
-returned animation.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the displayed animation, or %NULL if the image is empty
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_activate_default">
<description>
Activates the default widget for the window, unless the current
@@ -10410,7 +10943,7 @@
last time it was saved. Whenever the buffer is saved to disk, call
gtk_text_buffer_set_modified (@buffer, FALSE). When the buffer is modified,
it will automatically toggled on the modified bit again. When the modified
-bit flips, the buffer emits a "modified_changed" signal.
+bit flips, the buffer emits a "modified-changed" signal.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -10481,27 +11014,26 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_visible">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_right_margin">
<description>
-Sets the ::visible property of the action to @visible. Note that
-this doesn't necessarily mean effective visibility. See
-gtk_action_is_visible()
-for that.
+Gets the default right margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="visible">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to make the action visible
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the default right margin
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_orientation">
@@ -10572,30 +11104,9 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_has_key">
-<description>
-Return value: %TRUE, if @key has a value
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @key has a value
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_model_row_has_child_toggled">
<description>
-Emits the "row_has_child_toggled" signal on @tree_model. This should be
+Emits the "row-has-child-toggled" signal on @tree_model. This should be
called by models after the child state of a node changes.
</description>
@@ -10616,22 +11127,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_action_groups">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard">
<description>
-Return value: a #GList of action groups. The list is owned by GTK+
+Adds @clipboard to the list of clipboards in which the selection
+contents of @buffer are available. In most cases, @clipboard will be
+the #GtkClipboard of type %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY for a view of @buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GList of action groups. The list is owned by GTK+
-and should not be modified.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_bytes_in_line">
@@ -10649,39 +11162,21 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_context_simple_add_table">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_relief_style">
<description>
-Adds an additional table to search to the input context.
-Each row of the table consists of @max_seq_len key symbols
-followed by two #guint16 interpreted as the high and low
-words of a #gunicode value. Tables are searched starting
-from the last added.
-
-The table must be sorted in dictionary order on the
-numeric value of the key symbol fields. (Values beyond
-the length of the sequence should be zero.)
+Return value: The relief style of buttons on @toolbar.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context_simple">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIMContextSimple
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> the table
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_seq_len">
-<parameter_description> Maximum length of a sequence in the table
-(cannot be greater than #GTK_MAX_COMPOSE_LEN)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_seqs">
-<parameter_description> number of sequences in the table
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The relief style of buttons on @toolbar.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_size">
@@ -10723,38 +11218,47 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_get_n_pages">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment">
<description>
-Return value: The number of pages in the @assistant.
+Hooks up an adjustment to the cursor position in an entry, so that when
+the cursor is moved, the adjustment is scrolled to show that position.
+See gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
+the adjustment.
+
+The adjustment has to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system
+as the entry.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the cursor
+is moved, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The number of pages in the @assistant.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_get_n_pages">
<description>
-Retrieves the source icon name, or %NULL if none is set. The
-icon_name is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
-persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
-
+Return value: The number of pages in the @assistant.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> icon name. This string must not be modified or freed.
+<return> The number of pages in the @assistant.
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -10796,55 +11300,50 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_set">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_focus_on_map">
<description>
-Stores new data into a #GtkSelectionData object. Should
-&lt;emphasis&gt;only&lt;/emphasis&gt; be called from a selection handler callback.
-Zero-terminates the stored data.
+Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_focus_on_map().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> the type of selection data
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> format (number of bits in a unit)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> pointer to the data (will be copied)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description> length of the data
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if window should receive the input focus when
+mapped.
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_select_multiple">
+<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_vadjustment">
<description>
-Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
-selector. See gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple().
+Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a
+child of the container is focused, the adjustment is scrolled to
+show that widget. This function sets the vertical alignment. See
+gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
+the adjustment and gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment() for setting
+the horizontal adjustment.
+The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate
+system as the allocation for immediate children of the container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the focus
+is moved among the descendents of @container
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if multiple files can be selected.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_assistant_set_current_page">
@@ -10882,6 +11381,8 @@
#GtkBox:fill and #GtkBox:padding, are given their default
values, %TRUE, %TRUE, and 0, respectively.
+Deprecated: 2.14: Use gtk_box_pack_start()
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="box">
@@ -10917,19 +11418,31 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkBuilder">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_new_from_key_file">
<description>
-The translation domain used when translating property values that
-have been marked as translatable in interface descriptions.
-If the translation domain is %NULL, #GtkBuilder uses gettext(),
-otherwise dgettext().
-
-Since: 2.12
+Reads the print settings from the group @group_name in @key_file.
+Return value: the restored #GtkPrintSettings
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the settings from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group to use, or %NULL to use
+the default "Print Settings"
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the restored #GtkPrintSettings
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_focus_on_click">
@@ -10984,51 +11497,74 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_get_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_insert_with_values">
<description>
-Gets the icon name and size being displayed by the #GtkImage.
-The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
-%GTK_IMAGE_ICON_NAME (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
-The returned string is owned by the #GtkImage and should not
-be freed.
+Creates a new row at @position. @iter will be changed to point to this
+new row. If @position is larger than the number of rows on the list, then
+the new row will be appended to the list. The row will be filled with
+the values given to this function.
-Since: 2.6
+Calling
+&lt;literal&gt;gtk_tree_store_insert_with_values (tree_store, iter, position, ...)&lt;/literal&gt;
+has the same effect as calling
+|[
+gtk_tree_store_insert (tree_store, iter, position);
+gtk_tree_store_set (tree_store, iter, ...);
+]|
+with the different that the former will only emit a row_inserted signal,
+while the latter will emit row_inserted, row_changed and if the tree store
+is sorted, rows_reordered. Since emitting the rows_reordered signal
+repeatedly can affect the performance of the program,
+gtk_tree_store_insert_with_values() should generally be preferred when
+inserting rows in a sorted tree store.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> place to store an icon name
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set the new row, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> place to store an icon size
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> position to insert the new row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> pairs of column number and value, terminated with -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_width_chars">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_copyright">
<description>
-Retrieves the desired width of @label, in characters. See
-gtk_label_set_width_chars().
+Sets the copyright string to display in the about dialog.
+This should be a short string of one or two lines.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="copyright">
+<parameter_description> the copyright string
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the width of the label in characters.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_im_context_focus_in">
@@ -11095,18 +11631,63 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_modal">
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_add_full">
<description>
-Sets a window modal or non-modal. Modal windows prevent interaction
-with other windows in the same application. To keep modal dialogs
-on top of main application windows, use
-gtk_window_set_transient_for() to make the dialog transient for the
-parent; most &lt;link linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window managers&lt;/link&gt;
-will then disallow lowering the dialog below the parent.
+Adds a new resource, pointed by @uri, into the recently used
+resources list, using the metadata specified inside the #GtkRecentData
+structure passed in @recent_data.
+The passed URI will be used to identify this resource inside the
+list.
+In order to register the new recently used resource, metadata about
+the resource must be passed as well as the URI; the metadata is
+stored in a #GtkRecentData structure, which must contain the MIME
+type of the resource pointed by the URI; the name of the application
+that is registering the item, and a command line to be used when
+launching the item.
-</description>
+Optionally, a #GtkRecentData structure might contain a UTF-8 string
+to be used when viewing the item instead of the last component of the
+URI; a short description of the item; whether the item should be
+considered private - that is, should be displayed only by the
+applications that have registered it.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> a valid URI
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="recent_data">
+<parameter_description> metadata of the resource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the new item was successfully added to the
+recently used resources list, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_set_modal">
+<description>
+Sets a window modal or non-modal. Modal windows prevent interaction
+with other windows in the same application. To keep modal dialogs
+on top of main application windows, use
+gtk_window_set_transient_for() to make the dialog transient for the
+parent; most &lt;link linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window managers&lt;/link&gt;
+will then disallow lowering the dialog below the parent.
+
+
+
+</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="window">
<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
@@ -11120,21 +11701,23 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_size_register_alias">
+<function name="gtk_style_set_background">
<description>
-Registers @alias as another name for @target.
-So calling gtk_icon_size_from_name() with @alias as argument
-will return @target.
-
+Sets the background of @window to the background color or pixmap
+specified by @style for the given state.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="alias">
-<parameter_description> an alias for @target
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> an existing icon size
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -11207,7 +11790,10 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_args">
<parameter_description> number of arguments to @signal_name
-@: arguments to @signal_name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments to @signal_name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -11237,21 +11823,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_show_fill_level">
+<function name="gtk_expander_new_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-Gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically.
+Creates a new expander using @label as the text of the label.
+If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
+If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
+underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
+accelerator called a mnemonic.
+Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkRange
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text of the label with an underscore in front of the
+mnemonic character
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @range shows the fill level.
+<return> a new #GtkExpander widget.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -11321,79 +11913,71 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index">
+<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_adjustment">
<description>
-Converts from a position in the entry contents (returned
-by gtk_entry_get_text()) to a position in the
-entry's #PangoLayout (returned by gtk_entry_get_layout(),
-with text retrieved via pango_layout_get_text()).
+Gets the #GtkAdjustment associated with the #GtkScaleButton's scale.
+See gtk_range_get_adjustment() for details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="layout_index">
-<parameter_description> byte index into the entry layout text
+</parameters>
+<return> the adjustment associated with the scale
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status_string">
+<description>
+Return value: a string representation of the status
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> byte index into the entry contents
+<return> a string representation of the status
+of the print operation
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_set_value">
+<function name="GtkRadioToolButton">
<description>
-Sets the data in the cell specified by @iter and @column.
-The type of @value must be convertible to the type of the
-column.
+Sets a new group for a radio tool button.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter for the row being modified
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> column number to modify
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> new value for the cell
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_filter_get_needed">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_layout">
<description>
-Gets the fields that need to be filled in for the structure
-passed to gtk_file_filter_filter()
-
-This function will not typically be used by applications; it
-is intended principally for use in the implementation of
-#GtkFileChooser.
+Creates a new #PangoLayout that is suitable for use
+with the #GtkPrintContext.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
-calling gtk_file_filter_filter()
+<return> a new Pango layout for @context
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -11415,33 +11999,31 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_set_activate">
+<function name="gtk_container_forall">
<description>
-Find a key binding matching @keyval and @modifiers within
- binding_set and activate the binding on @object.
-
+Invokes @callback on each child of @container, including children
+that are considered "internal" (implementation details of the
+container). "Internal" children generally weren't added by the user
+of the container, but were added by the container implementation
+itself. Most applications should use gtk_container_foreach(),
+rather than gtk_container_forall().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> @binding_set to activate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key value of the binding
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> key modifier of the binding
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> a callback
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="object">
-<parameter_description> object to activate when binding found
+<parameter name="callback_data">
+<parameter_description> callback user data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if a binding was found and activated
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new">
@@ -11578,6 +12160,24 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_width_chars">
+<description>
+Retrieves the width in characters of the @button widget's entry and/or label.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the button widget to examine.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> an integer width (in characters) that the button will use to size itself.
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_show_expanders">
<description>
Sets whether to draw and enable expanders and indent child rows in
@@ -11604,72 +12204,33 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_box_gap">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_new_from_key_file">
<description>
-Draws a box in @window using the given style and state and shadow type,
-leaving a gap in one side.
+Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
+ key_file Returns a new #GtkPageSetup object with the restored
+page setup, or %NULL if an error occurred.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_side">
-<parameter_description> side in which to leave the gap
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_x">
-<parameter_description> starting position of the gap
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
+to use the default name "Page Setup"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_width">
-<parameter_description> width of the gap
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the restored #GtkPageSetup
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_expander_set_label">
@@ -11808,39 +12369,55 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_display_name">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_complete">
<description>
-Gets the name of the resource. If none has been defined, the basename
-of the resource is obtained.
+Gets whether @page is complete..
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the display name of the resource. The returned string
-is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
+<return> %TRUE if @page is complete.
Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_get_module_path">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri">
<description>
-Determines the search path for a particular type of module.
+Gets the current folder of @chooser as an URI.
+See gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri().
+
+Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
+(e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents"), which is &lt;emphasis&gt;not the same&lt;/emphasis&gt;
+as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
+#GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_SELECT_FOLDER mode
+(e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents/selected-folder/". To get the
+currently-selected folder in that mode, use gtk_file_chooser_get_uri() as the
+usual way to get the selection.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> the type of the module, for instance 'modules', 'engines', immodules'
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the search path for the module type. Free with g_strfreev().
+<return> the URI for the current folder. Free with g_free(). This
+function will also return %NULL if the file chooser was unable to load the
+last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling
+gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri() on a nonexistent folder.
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -11925,6 +12502,23 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_visibility">
+<description>
+Retrieves whether the text in @entry is visible. See
+gtk_entry_set_visibility().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the text is currently visible
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label_text">
<description>
Creates a new label and sets it as the tab label for the page
@@ -12012,23 +12606,52 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_exists">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_margin">
<description>
-Checks whether the resource pointed by @info still exists. At
-the moment this check is done only on resources pointing to local files.
+Sets the ::margin property which specifies the space
+which is inserted at the top, bottom, left and right
+of the icon view.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="margin">
+<parameter_description> the margin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the resource exists
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<function name="gtk_action_connect_proxy">
+<description>
+Connects a widget to an action object as a proxy. Synchronises
+various properties of the action with the widget (such as label
+text, icon, tooltip, etc), and attaches a callback so that the
+action gets activated when the proxy widget does.
+
+If the widget is already connected to an action, it is disconnected
+first.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> the proxy widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_binding_set_new">
@@ -12048,43 +12671,58 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_get_use_markup">
+<function name="gtk_recent_filter_new">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup
+Creates a new #GtkRecentFilter with no rules added to it.
+Such filter does not accept any recently used resources, so is not
+particularly useful until you add rules with
+gtk_recent_filter_add_pattern(), gtk_recent_filter_add_mime_type(),
+gtk_recent_filter_add_application(), gtk_recent_filter_add_age().
+To create a filter that accepts any recently used resource, use:
+|[
+GtkRecentFilter *filter = gtk_recent_filter_new ();
+gtk_recent_filter_add_pattern (filter, "*");
+]|
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="expander">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup
+<return> a new #GtkRecentFilter
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_prepend_text">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_new">
<description>
-Prepends the given text to the contents of the widget.
+Creates a new #GtkIconView widget
-Deprecated: gtk_entry_prepend_text() is deprecated and should not
-be used in newly-written code. Use gtk_editable_insert_text()
-instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the text to prepend
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly created #GtkIconView widget
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_popup_completion">
+<description>
+Return value: %TRUE if popup completion is turned on
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if popup completion is turned on
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_increments">
@@ -12147,6 +12785,10 @@
might not be the case if conflicting accelerators are locked). Successful
changes are indicated by a %TRUE return value.
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="accel_path">
@@ -12170,26 +12812,23 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_set_resize_mode">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_max_width_chars">
<description>
-Sets the resize mode for the container.
+Retrieves the desired maximum width of @label, in characters. See
+gtk_label_set_width_chars().
-The resize mode of a container determines whether a resize request
-will be passed to the container's parent, queued for later execution
-or executed immediately.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="resize_mode">
-<parameter_description> the new resize mode
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the maximum width of the label in characters.
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_has_frame">
@@ -12250,7 +12889,7 @@
in which case the window will be maximized when it appears onscreen
initially.
-You can track maximization via the "window_state_event" signal
+You can track maximization via the "window-state-event" signal
on #GtkWidget.
@@ -12330,7 +12969,8 @@
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_tips">
<description>
-Gets whether @chooser should display tooltips.
+Gets whether @chooser should display tooltips containing the full path
+of a recently user resource.
</description>
@@ -12350,8 +12990,8 @@
<function name="gtk_printer_list_papers">
<description>
Lists all the paper sizes @printer supports.
-This will return an empty list unless the printer's details are
-available. See gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
+This will return and empty list unless the printer's details are
+available, see gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
</description>
@@ -12432,6 +13072,34 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_test_spin_button_click">
+<description>
+This function will generate a @button click in the upwards or downwards
+spin button arrow areas, usually leading to an increase or decrease of
+spin button's value.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="spinner">
+<parameter_description> valid GtkSpinButton widget.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> Number of the pointer button for the event, usually 1, 2 or 3.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="upwards">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE for upwards arrow click, %FALSE for downwards arrow click.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> wether all actions neccessary for the button click simulation were carried out successfully.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_group_id">
<description>
Gets the current group identificator for @notebook.
@@ -12447,7 +13115,7 @@
<return> the group identificator, or -1 if none is set.
Since: 2.10
-Deprecated:2.12: use gtk_notebook_get_group() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.12: use gtk_notebook_get_group() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -12560,22 +13228,28 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_width_chars">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_gicon">
<description>
-Retrieves the width in characters of the @button widget's entry and/or label.
+See gtk_image_new_from_gicon() for details.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> the button widget to examine.
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> an icon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> an icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an integer width (in characters) that the button will use to size itself.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_scrollable">
@@ -12597,6 +13271,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_view_new_with_markup">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkCellView widget, adds a #GtkCellRendererText
+to it, and makes its show @markup. The text can text can be
+marked up with the &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango text
+markup language&lt;/link&gt;.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="markup">
+<parameter_description> the text to display in the cell view
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_select_all">
<description>
Selects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
@@ -12642,29 +13337,29 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_newv">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_extension_events">
<description>
-Non-vararg creation function. Used primarily by language bindings.
-
+Sets the extension events mask to @mode. See #GdkExtensionMode
+and gdk_input_set_extension_events().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="n_columns">
-<parameter_description> number of columns in the list store
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="types">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GType types for the columns, from first to last
+<parameter name="mode">
+<parameter_description> bitfield of extension events to receive
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkListStore
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_length">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_use_color">
<description>
-Return value: the length value of @key, converted to @unit
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12672,16 +13367,8 @@
<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit of the return value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the length value of @key, converted to @unit
+<return> whether to use color
Since: 2.10
</return>
@@ -12705,25 +13392,22 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_sentence">
<description>
-Looks up the string value associated with @key.
+Determines whether @iter ends a sentence. Sentence boundaries are
+determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language
+(if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary
+algorithms).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the string value for @key
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> %TRUE if @iter is at the end of a sentence.
</return>
</function>
@@ -12781,68 +13465,31 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_vline">
+<function name="gtk_test_find_label">
<description>
-Draws a vertical line from (@x, @y1_) to (@x, @y2_) in @window
-using the given style and state.
+This function will search @widget and all its descendants for a GtkLabel
+widget with a text string matching @label_pattern.
+The @label_pattern may contain asterisks '*' and question marks '?' as
+placeholders, g_pattern_match() is used for the matching.
+Note that locales other than "C" tend to alter (translate" label strings,
+so this function is genrally only useful in test programs with
+predetermined locales, see gtk_test_init() for more details.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y1_">
-<parameter_description> the starting y coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y2_">
-<parameter_description> the ending y coordinate
+<parameter_description> Valid label or container widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_printer_is_virtual">
-<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @printer is virtual
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="label_pattern">
+<parameter_description> Shell-glob pattern to match a label string.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @printer is virtual
+<return> a GtkLabel widget if any is found.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -12956,6 +13603,54 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_paint_vline">
+<description>
+Draws a vertical line from (@x, @y1_) to (@x, @y2_) in @window
+using the given style and state.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y1_">
+<parameter_description> the starting y coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y2_">
+<parameter_description> the ending y coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_resizable">
<description>
If @resizable is %TRUE, then the user can explicitly resize the column by
@@ -13045,7 +13740,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>value: the default column spacing
+<return> the default column spacing
</return>
</function>
@@ -13099,29 +13794,53 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_window">
+<function name="GtkCellRenderer">
<description>
-Retrieves the #GdkWindow corresponding to an area of the text view;
-possible windows include the overall widget window, child windows
-on the left, right, top, bottom, and the window that displays the
-text buffer. Windows are %NULL and nonexistent if their width or
-height is 0, and are nonexistent before the widget has been
-realized.
+This signal gets emitted when a cell starts to be edited.
+The indended use of this signal is to do special setup
+on @editable, e.g. adding a #GtkEntryCompletion or setting
+up additional columns in a #GtkComboBox.
+
+Note that GTK+ doesn't guarantee that cell renderers will
+continue to use the same kind of widget for editing in future
+releases, therefore you should check the type of @editable
+before doing any specific setup, as in the following example:
+|[
+static void
+text_editing_started (GtkCellRenderer *cell,
+GtkCellEditable *editable,
+const gchar *path,
+gpointer data)
+{
+if (GTK_IS_ENTRY (editable))
+{
+GtkEntry *entry = GTK_ENTRY (editable);
+
+/&ast; ... create a GtkEntryCompletion &ast;/
+
+gtk_entry_set_completion (entry, completion);
+}
+}
+]|
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="renderer">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="win">
-<parameter_description> window to get
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellEditable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the path identifying the edited cell
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GdkWindow, or %NULL
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_image_targets">
@@ -13144,6 +13863,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_button_set_orientation">
+<description>
+Sets the orientation of the #GtkScaleButton's popup window.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the new orientation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_button_get_use_stock">
<description>
Return value: %TRUE if the button label is used to
@@ -13161,42 +13900,44 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_has_default_sort_func">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_action">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE, if the model has a default sort function
+Returns: the action that a widget is a proxy for, or
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="sortable">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSortable
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if the model has a default sort function
+<return> the action that a widget is a proxy for, or
+%NULL, if it is not attached to an action.
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_bounds">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_right_margin">
<description>
-Retrieves the first and last iterators in the buffer, i.e. the
-entire buffer lies within the range [ start,@end).
+Gets the right margin in units of @unit.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with first position in the buffer
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with the end iterator
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the right margin
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_job_set_track_print_status">
@@ -13289,7 +14030,7 @@
be %NULL.
@callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use the GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC() to cast the function to #GtkSignalFunc.
+arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
</description>
@@ -13337,6 +14078,8 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the new toolbar element as a #GtkWidget.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -13373,26 +14116,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_action">
-<description>
-Sets action which is performed by the file selector using this entry.
-The #GtkFileChooserEntry will use different completion strategies for
-different actions.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser_entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action which is performed by the file selector using this entry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_color_button_set_alpha">
<description>
Sets the current opacity to be @alpha.
@@ -13429,20 +14152,19 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_add_tearoffs">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_digits">
<description>
-Return value: whether tearoff menu items are added
+Fetches the precision of @spin_button. See gtk_spin_button_set_digits().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether tearoff menu items are added
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> the current precision
</return>
</function>
@@ -13603,7 +14325,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_model_rows_reordered">
<description>
-Emits the "rows_reordered" signal on @tree_model. This should be called by
+Emits the "rows-reordered" signal on @tree_model. This should be called by
models when their rows have been reordered.
</description>
@@ -13751,28 +14473,85 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_set_markup">
+<function name="GtkSettings">
<description>
-Sets the text of the message dialog to be @str, which is marked
-up with the &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango text markup
-language&lt;/link&gt;.
+How long to show the last input character in hidden
+entries. This value is in milliseconds. 0 disables showing the
+last char. 600 is a good value for enabling it.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="message_dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_item">
+<description>
+Creates an item for @entry.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="str">
-<parameter_description> markup string (see &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango markup format&lt;/link&gt;)
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkItemFactoryEntry to create an item for
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback_data">
+<parameter_description> data passed to the callback function of @entry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback_type">
+<parameter_description> 1 if the callback function of @entry is of type
+#GtkItemFactoryCallback1, 2 if it is of type #GtkItemFactoryCallback2
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_display">
+<description>
+Retrieves the display of the selection.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the display of the selection.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_menu_get_accel_path">
+<description>
+Retrieves the accelerator path set on the menu.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkMenu
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the accelerator path set on the menu.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_get_visual">
<description>
Gets the visual that will be used to render @widget.
@@ -13816,38 +14595,48 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_connect">
+<function name="gtk_paint_hline">
<description>
-Installs an accelerator in this group. When @accel_group is being activated
-in response to a call to gtk_accel_groups_activate(), @closure will be
-invoked if the @accel_key and @accel_mods from gtk_accel_groups_activate()
-match those of this connection.
-
-The signature used for the @closure is that of #GtkAccelGroupActivate.
-
-Note that, due to implementation details, a single closure can only be
-connected to one accelerator group.
+Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
+using the given style and state.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_flags">
-<parameter_description> a flag mask to configure this accelerator
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="closure">
-<parameter_description> closure to be executed upon accelerator activation
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x1">
+<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x2">
+<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -13857,7 +14646,9 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_child_iter_to_iter">
<description>
Sets @sort_iter to point to the row in @tree_model_sort that corresponds to
-the row pointed at by @child_iter.
+the row pointed at by @child_iter. If @sort_iter was not set, %FALSE
+is returned. Note: a boolean is only returned since 2.14.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13874,14 +14665,16 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE, if @sort_iter was set, i.e. if @sort_iter is a
+valid iterator pointer to a visible row in the child model.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_unref">
<description>
Inverse of gtk_widget_ref(). Equivalent to g_object_unref().
-Deprecated:2.12: Use g_object_unref() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use g_object_unref() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13893,24 +14686,45 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_reorderable">
+<function name="gtk_widget_destroyed">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the @tree_column can be reordered by the user.
+This function sets * widget_pointer to %NULL if @widget_pointer !=
+%NULL. It's intended to be used as a callback connected to the
+"destroy" signal of a widget. You connect gtk_widget_destroyed()
+as a signal handler, and pass the address of your widget variable
+as user data. Then when the widget is destroyed, the variable will
+be set to %NULL. Useful for example to avoid multiple copies
+of the same dialog.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget_pointer">
+<parameter_description> address of a variable that contains @widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the @tree_column can be reordered by the user.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_modal">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_role">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the window is set to be modal and
+This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
+
+In combination with the window title, the window role allows a
+&lt;link linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt; to identify "the
+same" window when an application is restarted. So for example you
+might set the "toolbox" role on your app's toolbox window, so that
+when the user restarts their session, the window manager can put
+the toolbox back in the same place.
+
+If a window already has a unique title, you don't need to set the
+role, since the WM can use the title to identify the window when
+restoring the session.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13918,9 +14732,53 @@
<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
+<parameter name="role">
+<parameter_description> unique identifier for the window to be used when restoring a session
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the window is set to be modal and
-establishes a grab when shown
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_set">
+<description>
+Precursor of g_object_set().
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use g_object_set() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="first_property_name">
+<parameter_description> name of first property to set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties,
+%NULL-terminated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_tooltip_window">
+<description>
+Return value: The #GtkWindow of the current tooltip.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The #GtkWindow of the current tooltip.
+
+Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -13942,6 +14800,10 @@
their accelerators at runtime. More details about accelerator paths
and their default setups can be found at gtk_accel_map_add_entry().
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="menu">
@@ -13956,47 +14818,78 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_list">
+<function name="gtk_binding_entry_skip">
<description>
-Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. The icon is used when
-the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
-managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
-frame, or display it in other contexts.
-
-gtk_window_set_icon_list() allows you to pass in the same icon in
-several hand-drawn sizes. The list should contain the natural sizes
-your icon is available in; that is, don't scale the image before
-passing it to GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute,
-when the desired final size is known, to allow best quality.
-
-By passing several sizes, you may improve the final image quality
-of the icon, by reducing or eliminating automatic image scaling.
-
-Recommended sizes to provide: 16x16, 32x32, 48x48 at minimum, and
-larger images (64x64, 128x128) if you have them.
-
-See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
-for all windows in your application in one go.
+Install a binding on @binding_set which causes key lookups
+to be aborted, to prevent bindings from lower priority sets
+to be activated.
-Note that transient windows (those who have been set transient for another
-window using gtk_window_set_transient_for()) will inherit their
-icon from their transient parent. So there's no need to explicitly
-set the icon on transient windows.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="binding_set">
+<parameter_description> @binding_set to skip an entry of
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> list of #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> key value of binding to skip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to skip
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_upper">
+<description>
+Retrieves the maximum value of the adjustment.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The current maximum value of the adjustment.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_test_find_sibling">
+<description>
+This function will search siblings of @base_widget and siblings of its
+ancestors for all widgets matching @widget_type.
+Of the matching widgets, the one that is geometrically closest to
+ base_widget will be returned.
+The general purpose of this function is to find the most likely "action"
+widget, relative to another labeling widget. Such as finding a
+button or text entry widget, given it's corresponding label widget.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="base_widget">
+<parameter_description> Valid widget, part of a widget hierarchy
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget_type">
+<parameter_description> Type of a aearched for sibling widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a widget of type @widget_type if any is found.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_attributes_copy">
<description>
Copies @src and returns a new #GtkTextAttributes.
@@ -14054,6 +14947,24 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_page_size">
+<description>
+Retrieves the page size of the adjustment.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The current page size of the adjustment.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_list_filters">
<description>
Lists the current set of user-selectable filters; see
@@ -14076,6 +14987,25 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_select_multiple">
+<description>
+Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
+selector. See gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if multiple files can be selected.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_inside_sentence">
<description>
Determines whether @iter is inside a sentence (as opposed to in
@@ -14096,20 +15026,23 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_pdf">
+<function name="gtk_container_class_list_child_properties">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @printer accepts PDF
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="cclass">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainerClass
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_properties">
+<parameter_description> location to return the number of child properties found
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @printer accepts PDF
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> a newly allocated %NULL-terminated array of #GParamSpec*.
+The array must be freed with g_free().
+all child properties of a container class.
</return>
</function>
@@ -14134,21 +15067,36 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_column_spacing">
+<function name="gtk_draw_string">
<description>
-Sets the ::column-spacing property which specifies the space
-which is inserted between the columns of the icon view.
+Draws a text string on @window with the given parameters.
-Since: 2.6
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_layout() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="column_spacing">
-<parameter_description> the column spacing
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> the string to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -14173,26 +15121,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_page_set">
-<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSet value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_from_widget">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem adding it to the same group as @group.
@@ -14278,33 +15206,27 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_add_mark">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_new">
<description>
-Adds the mark at position @where. The mark must not be added to
-another buffer, and if its name is not %NULL then there must not
-be another mark in the buffer with the same name.
-
-Emits the "mark_set" signal as notification of the mark's initial
-placement.
+Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with @child_model as the child_model
+and @root as the virtual root.
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mark">
-<parameter_description> the mark to add
+<parameter name="child_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="where">
-<parameter_description> location to place mark
+<parameter name="root">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new #GtkTreeModel.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_item_remove_submenu">
@@ -14325,6 +15247,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_valid">
+<description>
+Return value: %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="reference">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon">
<description>
Looks up a named icon and returns a structure containing
@@ -14389,6 +15326,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_file">
+<description>
+Gets the #GFile that should be previewed in a custom preview
+Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GFile for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file
+is selected. Free with g_object_unref().
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_end">
<description>
Moves @iter forward to the "end iterator," which points one past the last
@@ -14432,7 +15389,7 @@
<description>
Draws a polygon on @window with the given parameters.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_polygon() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_polygon() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14501,7 +15458,7 @@
&lt;literal&gt;"&lt;name&gt;"&lt;/literal&gt; prefix of @path as the @path argument
for gtk_item_factory_new().
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14601,20 +15558,18 @@
<function name="_gtk_im_module_get_default_context_id">
<description>
-Return the context_id of the best IM context type
-for the given locale ID.
+Return the context_id of the best IM context type
+for the given window.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="locale">
-<parameter_description> a locale id in the form 'en_US'
+<parameter name="client_window">
+<parameter_description> a window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the context ID (will never be %NULL)
-the value is newly allocated and must be freed
-with g_free().
</return>
</function>
@@ -14780,26 +15735,19 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_line_end">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_cursor_visible">
<description>
-Moves the iterator to point to the paragraph delimiter characters,
-which will be either a newline, a carriage return, a carriage
-return/newline in sequence, or the Unicode paragraph separator
-character. If the iterator is already at the paragraph delimiter
-characters, moves to the paragraph delimiter characters for the
-next line. If @iter is on the last line in the buffer, which does
-not end in paragraph delimiters, moves to the end iterator (end of
-the last line), and returns %FALSE.
+Find out whether the cursor is being displayed.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if we moved and the new location is not the end iterator
+<return> whether the insertion mark is visible
</return>
</function>
@@ -14866,7 +15814,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the path of current folder - this value is owned by the
+<return> the file for the current folder - this value is owned by the
chooser entry and must not be modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -14917,54 +15865,28 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkCellRenderer">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_uri">
<description>
-This signal gets emitted when a cell starts to be edited.
-The indended use of this signal is to do special setup
-on @editable, e.g. adding a #GtkEntryCompletion or setting
-up additional columns in a #GtkComboBox.
-
-Note that GTK+ doesn't guarantee that cell renderers will
-continue to use the same kind of widget for editing in future
-releases, therefore you should check the type of @editable
-before doing any specific setup, as in the following example:
+Gets the URI for the currently selected file in
+the file selector. If multiple files are selected,
+one of the filenames will be returned at random.
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
-static void
-text_editing_started (GtkCellRenderer *cell,
-GtkCellEditable *editable,
-const gchar *path,
-gpointer data)
-{
-if (GTK_IS_ENTRY (editable))
-{
-GtkEntry *entry = GTK_ENTRY (editable);
-&lt;!-- --&gt;
-/&lt;!-- --&gt;* ... create a GtkEntryCompletion *&lt;!-- --&gt;/
-&lt;!-- --&gt;
-gtk_entry_set_completion (entry, completion);
-}
-}
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
+folder.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="renderer">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkCellEditable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the path identifying the edited cell
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The currently selected URI, or %NULL
+if no file is selected. Free with g_free()
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_action_set_current_value">
@@ -14988,6 +15910,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_get_context_id">
+<description>
+Gets the id of the currently active slave of the @context.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the id of the currently active slave
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_get_image">
<description>
Gets the widget that is currently set as the image of @image_menu_item.
@@ -15048,59 +15988,47 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_filter">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_item_width">
<description>
-Sets the current filter; only the files that pass the
-filter will be displayed. If the user-selectable list of filters
-is non-empty, then the filter should be one of the filters
-in that list. Setting the current filter when the list of
-filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed
-set of files without letting the user change it.
+Sets the ::item-width property which specifies the width
+to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will
+automatically determine a suitable item size.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
+<parameter name="item_width">
+<parameter_description> the width for each item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation">
+<function name="gtk_layout_get_hadjustment">
<description>
-Sets whether a file chooser in GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode will present
-a confirmation dialog if the user types a file name that already exists. This
-is %FALSE by default.
-
-Regardless of this setting, the @chooser will emit the "confirm-overwrite"
-signal when appropriate.
+This function should only be called after the layout has been
+placed in a #GtkScrolledWindow or otherwise configured for
+scrolling. It returns the #GtkAdjustment used for communication
+between the horizontal scrollbar and @layout.
-If all you need is the stock confirmation dialog, set this property to %TRUE.
-You can override the way confirmation is done by actually handling the
-"confirm-overwrite" signal; please refer to its documentation for the
-details.
+See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="do_overwrite_confirmation">
-<parameter_description> whether to confirm overwriting in save mode
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> horizontal scroll adjustment
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_get_style_by_paths">
@@ -15112,12 +16040,13 @@
would be items inside a GNOME canvas widget.
The action of gtk_rc_get_style() is similar to:
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
-gtk_widget_path (widget, NULL, &amp;path, NULL);
-gtk_widget_class_path (widget, NULL, &amp;class_path, NULL);
-gtk_rc_get_style_by_paths (gtk_widget_get_settings (widget), path, class_path,
+|[
+gtk_widget_path (widget, NULL, &path, NULL);
+gtk_widget_class_path (widget, NULL, &class_path, NULL);
+gtk_rc_get_style_by_paths (gtk_widget_get_settings (widget),
+path, class_path,
G_OBJECT_TYPE (widget));
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
</description>
@@ -15150,41 +16079,19 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all">
-<description>
-Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_complete">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_value">
<description>
-Gets whether @page is complete..
+Gets the current value of the range.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @page is complete.
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> current value of the range.
</return>
</function>
@@ -15268,8 +16175,7 @@
instead, since you can't pass the markup string either
as the format (it might contain '%' characters) or as a string
argument.
-
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+|[
GtkWidget *dialog;
dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (main_application_window,
GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
@@ -15278,7 +16184,7 @@
NULL);
gtk_message_dialog_set_markup (GTK_MESSAGE_DIALOG (dialog),
markup);
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
</description>
@@ -15375,6 +16281,28 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_test_slider_get_value">
+<description>
+Retrive the literal adjustment value for GtkRange based
+widgets and spin buttons. Note that the value returned by
+this function is anything between the lower and upper bounds
+of the adjustment belonging to @widget, and is not a percentage
+as passed in to gtk_test_slider_set_perc().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> valid widget pointer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> adjustment-&gt;value for an adjustment belonging to @widget.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_pixels_inside_wrap">
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_text_view_set_pixels_inside_wrap().
@@ -15564,6 +16492,29 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_set_visible">
+<description>
+Sets the ::visible property of the action to @visible. Note that
+this doesn't necessarily mean effective visibility. See
+gtk_action_is_visible()
+for that.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="visible">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to make the action visible
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_view_set_background_color">
<description>
Sets the background color of @view.
@@ -15656,30 +16607,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_get_size">
-<description>
-Gets the size that has been set on the layout, and that determines
-the total extents of the layout's scrollbar area. See
-gtk_layout_set_size ().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> location to store the width set on @layout, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> location to store the height set on @layout, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_expand">
<description>
Return %TRUE if the column expands to take any available space.
@@ -15718,29 +16645,23 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_line_offset">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_logo_icon_name">
<description>
-Obtains an iterator pointing to @char_offset within the given
-line. The @char_offset must exist, offsets off the end of the line
-are not allowed. Note &lt;emphasis&gt;characters&lt;/emphasis&gt;, not bytes;
-UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.
+Sets the pixbuf to be displayed as logo in
+the about dialog. If it is %NULL, the default
+window icon set with gtk_window_set_default_icon()
+will be used.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="line_number">
-<parameter_description> line number counting from 0
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="char_offset">
-<parameter_description> char offset from start of line
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -15763,60 +16684,27 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_right_margin">
-<description>
-Gets the right margin in units of @unit.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the right margin
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_file_system_volume_render_icon">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_bounds">
<description>
-Renders an icon suitable for a file #GtkFileSystemVolume.
-
+Retrieves the first and last iterators in the buffer, i.e. the
+entire buffer lies within the range [ start,@end).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_system">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="volume">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemVolume
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> Reference widget to render icons.
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixel_size">
-<parameter_description> Size of the icon.
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with first position in the buffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with the end iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkPixbuf containing an icon, or NULL if the icon could not
-be rendered. In the latter case, the @error value will be set as
-appropriate.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_context_get_height">
@@ -15908,49 +16796,25 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_add_full">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_add_tearoffs">
<description>
-Adds a new resource, pointed by @uri, into the recently used
-resources list, using the metadata specified inside the #GtkRecentData
-structure passed in @recent_data.
-
-The passed URI will be used to identify this resource inside the
-list.
-
-In order to register the new recently used resource, metadata about
-the resource must be passed as well as the URI; the metadata is
-stored in a #GtkRecentData structure, which must contain the MIME
-type of the resource pointed by the URI; the name of the application
-that is registering the item, and a command line to be used when
-launching the item.
-
-Optionally, a #GtkRecentData structure might contain a UTF-8 string
-to be used when viewing the item instead of the last component of the
-URI; a short description of the item; whether the item should be
-considered private - that is, should be displayed only by the
-applications that have registered it.
+Sets whether the popup menu should have a tearoff
+menu item.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> a valid URI
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="recent_data">
-<parameter_description> metadata of the resource
+<parameter name="add_tearoffs">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to add tearoff menu items
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the new item was successfully added to the
-recently used resources list, %FALSE otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_set_restrict_to_fill_level">
@@ -16003,22 +16867,35 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_get_active">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_query_tab_label_packing">
<description>
-Queries a #GtkToggleToolButton and returns its current state.
-Return value: %TRUE if the toggle tool button is pressed in, %FALSE if not
+Query the packing attributes for the tab label of the page
+containing @child.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToggleToolButton
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> location to store the expand value (or NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fill">
+<parameter_description> location to store the fill value (or NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pack_type">
+<parameter_description> location to store the pack_type (or NULL)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the toggle tool button is pressed in, %FALSE if not
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_to_key_file">
@@ -16046,19 +16923,43 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accessible_connect_widget_destroyed">
+<function name="GtkDialog">
<description>
-This function specifies the callback function to be called when the widget
-corresponding to a GtkAccessible is destroyed.
+The default spacing used between elements of the
+content area of the dialog, as returned by
+gtk_dialog_get_content_area(), unless gtk_box_set_spacing()
+was called on that widget directly.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accessible">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccessible
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_recent_filter_get_needed">
+<description>
+Gets the fields that need to be filled in for the structure
+passed to gtk_recent_filter_filter()
+
+This function will not typically be used by applications; it
+is intended principally for use in the implementation of
+#GtkRecentChooser.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
+calling gtk_recent_filter_filter()
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_error">
@@ -16104,6 +17005,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_test_text_get">
+<description>
+Retrive the text string of @widget if it is a GtkLabel,
+GtkEditable (entry and text widgets) or GtkTextView.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> valid widget pointer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> new 0-terminated C string, needs to be releaed with g_free().
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_get_cursor_hadjustment">
<description>
Retrieves the horizontal cursor adjustment for the entry.
@@ -16143,6 +17063,24 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_column">
+<description>
+Return value: the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
+used, or -1 if this is disabled.
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_offset">
<description>
Return value: a character offset
@@ -16261,6 +17199,9 @@
<description>
Sets if the tooltips of a toolbar should be active or not.
+Deprecated: 2.14: The toolkit-wide #GtkSettings:gtk-enable-tooltips property
+is now used instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="toolbar">
@@ -16315,41 +17256,49 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_socket_add_window">
+<function name="_gtk_widget_set_pointer_window">
<description>
- socket: a #GtkSocket
- xid: the native identifier for a window
- need_reparent: whether the socket's plug's window needs to be
-reparented to the socket
-
-Adds a window to a GtkSocket.
+Sets pointer window for @widget. Does not ref @pointer_window.
+Actually stores it on the #GdkScreen, but you don't need to know that.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pointer_window">
+<parameter_description> the new pointer window.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_path_from_widget">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_current_page">
<description>
-If @widget has been created by an item factory, returns the full path
-to it. (The full path of a widget is the concatenation of the factory
-path specified in gtk_item_factory_new() with the path specified in the
-#GtkItemFactoryEntry from which the widget was created.)
+Switches to the page number @page_num.
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Note that due to historical reasons, GtkNotebook refuses
+to switch to a page unless the child widget is visible.
+Therefore, it is recommended to show child widgets before
+adding them to a notebook.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_num">
+<parameter_description> index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.
+If negative, the last page will be used. If greater
+than the number of pages in the notebook, nothing
+will be done.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the full path to @widget if it has been created by an item
-factory, %NULL otherwise. This value is owned by GTK+ and must not be
-modified or freed.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_title">
@@ -16424,66 +17373,95 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_size">
+<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_new_with_stock_from_widget">
<description>
-Obtains the current size of @window. If @window is not onscreen,
-it returns the size GTK+ will suggest to the &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt; for the initial window
-size (but this is not reliably the same as the size the window
-manager will actually select). The size obtained by
-gtk_window_get_size() is the last size received in a
-#GdkEventConfigure, that is, GTK+ uses its locally-stored size,
-rather than querying the X server for the size. As a result, if you
-call gtk_window_resize() then immediately call
-gtk_window_get_size(), the size won't have taken effect yet. After
-the window manager processes the resize request, GTK+ receives
-notification that the size has changed via a configure event, and
-the size of the window gets updated.
+Creates a new #GtkRadioToolButton adding it to the same group as @group.
+The new #GtkRadioToolButton will contain an icon and label from the
+stock item indicated by @stock_id.
-Note 1: Nearly any use of this function creates a race condition,
-because the size of the window may change between the time that you
-get the size and the time that you perform some action assuming
-that size is the current size. To avoid race conditions, connect to
-"configure_event" on the window and adjust your size-dependent
-state to match the size delivered in the #GdkEventConfigure.
-Note 2: The returned size does &lt;emphasis&gt;not&lt;/emphasis&gt; include the
-size of the window manager decorations (aka the window frame or
-border). Those are not drawn by GTK+ and GTK+ has no reliable
-method of determining their size.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> An existing #GtkRadioToolButton.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of a stock item
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A new #GtkRadioToolButton
-Note 3: If you are getting a window size in order to position
-the window onscreen, there may be a better way. The preferred
-way is to simply set the window's semantic type with
-gtk_window_set_type_hint(), which allows the window manager to
-e.g. center dialogs. Also, if you set the transient parent of
-dialogs with gtk_window_set_transient_for() window managers
-will often center the dialog over its parent window. It's
-much preferred to let the window manager handle these
-things rather than doing it yourself, because all apps will
-behave consistently and according to user prefs if the window
-manager handles it. Also, the window manager can take the size
-of the window decorations/border into account, while your
-application cannot.
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
+</function>
-In any case, if you insist on application-specified window
-positioning, there's &lt;emphasis&gt;still&lt;/emphasis&gt; a better way than
-doing it yourself - gtk_window_set_position() will frequently
-handle the details for you.
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_context">
+<description>
+This function is supposed to be used in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip
+signal handler for #GtkTreeView. The @x, @y and @keyboard_tip values
+which are received in the signal handler, should be passed to this
+function without modification.
+
+The return value indicates whether there is a tree view row at the given
+coordinates (%TRUE) or not (%FALSE) for mouse tooltips. For keyboard
+tooltips the row returned will be the cursor row. When %TRUE, then any of
+ model, @path and @iter which have been provided will be set to point to
+that row and the corresponding model. @x and @y will always be converted
+to be relative to @tree_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> return location for width, or %NULL
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> return location for height, or %NULL
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyboard_tip">
+<parameter_description> whether this is a keyboard tooltip or not
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeModel or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreePath or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeIter or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether or not the given tooltip context points to a row.
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_view_set_left_margin">
+<description>
+Sets the default left margin for text in @text_view.
+Tags in the buffer may override the default.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="left_margin">
+<parameter_description> left margin in pixels
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -16684,28 +17662,31 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_foreach">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_load_file">
<description>
-Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
-If @func returns %TRUE, then the tree ceases to be walked, and
-gtk_tree_model_foreach() returns.
+Reads the print settings from @file_name.
+See gtk_print_settings_to_file().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> A function to be called on each row
+<parameter name="file_name">
+<parameter_description> the filename to read the settings from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> User data to passed to func.
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_expand_row">
@@ -16858,6 +17839,29 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_file">
+<description>
+Gets the #GFile for the currently selected file in
+the file selector. If multiple files are selected,
+one of the files will be returned at random.
+
+If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
+folder.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a selected #GFile
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_set_reallocate_redraws">
<description>
Sets the @reallocate_redraws flag of the container to the given value.
@@ -16908,38 +17912,39 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_wrap_width">
+<function name="gtk_builder_set_translation_domain">
<description>
-Sets the wrap width of @combo_box to be @width. The wrap width is basically
-the preferred number of columns when you want the popup to be layed out
-in a table.
+Sets the translation domain of @builder.
+See #GtkBuilder:translation-domain.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> Preferred number of columns
+<parameter name="domain">
+<parameter_description> the translation domain or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_prefix">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_homogeneous_tabs">
<description>
-Requests a prefix insertion.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Sets whether the tabs must have all the same size or not.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="homogeneous">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if all tabs should be the same size.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -17099,6 +18104,23 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_margin">
+<description>
+Return value: the space at the borders
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the space at the borders
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_paint_handle">
<description>
Draws a handle as used in #GtkHandleBox and #GtkPaned.
@@ -17223,57 +18245,90 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter">
+<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_custom">
<description>
-Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path.
+Adds rule to a filter that allows files based on a custom callback
+function. The bitfield @needed which is passed in provides information
+about what sorts of information that the filter function needs;
+this allows GTK+ to avoid retrieving expensive information when
+it isn't needed by the filter.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="needed">
+<parameter_description> bitfield of flags indicating the information that the custom
+filter function needs.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> callback function; if the function returns %TRUE, then
+the file will be displayed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @func
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="notify">
+<parameter_description> function to call to free @data when it is no longer needed.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_connect_signals">
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_upper">
<description>
-This method is a simpler variation of gtk_builder_connect_signals_full().
-It uses #GModule's introspective features (by opening the module %NULL)
-to look at the application's symbol table. From here it tries to match
-the signal handler names given in the interface description with
-symbols in the application and connects the signals.
+Sets the maximum value of the adjustment.
-Note that this function will not work correctly if #GModule is not
-supported on the platform.
+Note that values will be restricted by
+&lt;literal&gt;upper - page-size&lt;/literal&gt; if the page-size
+property is nonzero.
-Since: 2.12
+See gtk_adjustment_set_lower() about how to compress multiple
+emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
+properties.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a structure sent in as user data to all signals
+<parameter name="upper">
+<parameter_description> the new maximum value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_attr_appearance_new">
+<description>
+Create a new font description attribute. (This attribute
+allows setting family, style, weight, variant, stretch,
+and size simultaneously.)
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="desc">
+<parameter_description>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return>
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_dialog_add_action_widget">
<description>
Adds an activatable widget to the action area of a #GtkDialog,
@@ -17318,6 +18373,10 @@
So a full valid accelerator path may look like:
"&lt;Gimp-Toolbox&gt;/File/Dialogs/Tool Options...".
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="accel_path">
@@ -17336,62 +18395,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_model">
<description>
-This function registers a rich text serialization @function along with
-its @mime_type with the passed @buffer.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mime_type">
-<parameter_description> the format's mime-type
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="function">
-<parameter_description> the serialize function to register
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> %function's user_data
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data_destroy">
-<parameter_description> a function to call when @user_data is no longer needed
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
-format's mime-type.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
+Sets the model used by @combo_box to be @model. Will unset a previously set
+model (if applicable). If model is %NULL, then it will unset the model.
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_current_page">
-<description>
-Switches to the page number @page_num.
+Note that this function does not clear the cell renderers, you have to
+call gtk_cell_layout_clear() yourself if you need to set up different
+cell renderers for the new model.
-Note that due to historical reasons, GtkNotebook refuses
-to switch to a page unless the child widget is visible.
-Therefore, it is recommended to show child widgets before
-adding them to a notebook.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_num">
-<parameter_description> index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.
-If negative, the last page will be used. If greater
-than the number of pages in the notebook, nothing
-will be done.
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -17432,6 +18454,27 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_files">
+<description>
+Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of @chooser
+as #GFile. An internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_get_uris().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GSList containing a #GFile for each selected
+file and subfolder in the current folder. Free the returned list
+with g_slist_free(), and the files with g_object_unref().
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_visible">
<description>
Return value: whether the column is visible or not. If it is visible, then
@@ -17525,32 +18568,22 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_layout_pack_start">
+<function name="gtk_plug_get_socket_window">
<description>
-Packs the @cell into the beginning of @cell_layout. If @expand is %FALSE,
-then the @cell is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
-is divided evenly between cells for which @expand is %TRUE.
-
-Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
+Retrieves the socket the plug is embedded in.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_layout">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @cell_layout.
+<parameter name="plug">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the window of the socket, or %NULL
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_mark">
@@ -17600,21 +18633,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_reset_default_sort_func">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_width">
<description>
-This resets the default sort function to be in the 'unsorted' state. That
-is, it is in the same order as the child model. It will re-sort the model
-to be in the same order as the child model only if the #GtkTreeModelSort
-is in 'unsorted' state.
+Gets the paper width of the #GtkPaperSize, in
+units of @unit.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the paper width
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_list_store_swap">
@@ -17672,7 +18711,9 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_view_unset_rows_drag_source">
<description>
-Undoes the effect of gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_source().
+Undoes the effect of
+gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_source(). Calling this method sets
+reorderable to %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -17782,59 +18823,28 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkRecentChooserMenu">
+<function name="gtk_dialog_get_response_for_widget">
<description>
-Whether the first ten items in the menu should be prepended by
-a number acting as a unique mnemonic.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Gets the response id of a widget in the action area
+of a dialog.
-<function name="gtk_box_pack_start">
-<description>
-Adds @child to @box, packed with reference to the start of @box.
-The @child is packed after any other child packed with reference
-to the start of @box.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be added to @box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the new child is to be given extra space allocated to
- box The extra space will be divided evenly between all children of
- box that use this option
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if space given to @child by the @expand option is
-actually allocated to @child, rather than just padding it. This
-parameter has no effect if @expand is set to %FALSE. A child is
-always allocated the full height of a #GtkHBox and the full width
-of a #GtkVBox. This option affects the other dimension
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding">
-<parameter_description> extra space in pixels to put between this child and its
-neighbors, over and above the global amount specified by
-#GtkBox:spacing property. If @child is a widget at one of the
-reference ends of @box, then @padding pixels are also put between
- child and the reference edge of @box
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a widget in the action area of @dialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the response id of @widget, or %GTK_RESPONSE_NONE
+if @widget doesn't have a response id set.
+
+Since: 2.8
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_bar_get_pack_direction">
@@ -17980,10 +18990,10 @@
Sets the character to use in place of the actual text when
gtk_entry_set_visibility() has been called to set text visibility
to %FALSE. i.e. this is the character used in "password mode" to
-show the user how many characters have been typed. The default
-invisible char is an asterisk ('*'). If you set the invisible char
-to 0, then the user will get no feedback at all; there will be
-no text on the screen as they type.
+show the user how many characters have been typed. By default, GTK+
+picks the best invisible char available in the current font. If you
+set the invisible char to 0, then the user will get no feedback
+at all; there will be no text on the screen as they type.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -18048,7 +19058,7 @@
<description>
This function does the same as gtk_widget_queue_draw().
-Deprecated: Use gtk_widget_queue_draw() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.2: Use gtk_widget_queue_draw() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -18155,24 +19165,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_base_folder">
-<description>
-Sets the folder with respect to which completions occur.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser_entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> path of a folder in the chooser entries current file system.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_item_set_submenu">
<description>
Sets or replaces the menu item's submenu, or removes it when a %NULL
@@ -18208,7 +19200,8 @@
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_tips">
<description>
-Sets whether to show a tooltips on the widget.
+Sets whether to show a tooltips containing the full path of each
+recently used resource in a #GtkRecentChooser widget.
Since: 2.10
@@ -18270,30 +19263,22 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_forward_display_line">
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_get_screen">
<description>
-Moves the given @iter forward by one display (wrapped) line.
-A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
-separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
-Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
-wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
-same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
-they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
-views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
+Gets the screen on which windows of the #GtkMountOperation
+will be shown.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
+<return> the screen on which windows of @op are shown
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -18547,39 +19532,28 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_system_insert_bookmark">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_length">
<description>
-Adds a path for a folder to the user's bookmarks list. If the operation
-succeeds, the "bookmarks_changed" signal will be emitted. Bookmark paths are
-unique; if you try to insert a @path that already exists, the operation will
-fail and the @error will be set to #GTK_FILE_SYSTEM_ERROR_ALREADY_EXISTS. To
-reorder the list of bookmarks, use gtk_file_system_remove_bookmark() to
-remove the path in question, and call gtk_file_system_insert_bookmark() with
-the new position for the path.
-
+Return value: the length value of @key, converted to @unit
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_system">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> path of the bookmark to add
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> index in the bookmarks list at which the @path should be inserted; use 0
-for the beginning, and -1 or the number of bookmarks itself for the end of the list.
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit of the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> TRUE if the operation succeeds, FALSE otherwise. In the latter case,
-the @error value will be set.
+<return> the length value of @key, converted to @unit
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -18627,6 +19601,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_child_visible">
+<description>
+Gets the value set with gtk_widget_set_child_visible().
+If you feel a need to use this function, your code probably
+needs reorganization.
+
+This function is only useful for container implementations and
+never should be called by an application.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the widget is mapped with the parent.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_spacing">
<description>
Sets the ::spacing property which specifies the space
@@ -18698,10 +19693,10 @@
<function name="gtk_scale_button_set_icons">
<description>
-Sets the icons to be used by the scale button.
+Sets the icons to be used by the scale button.
For details, see the #GtkScaleButton:icons property.
-Since 2.12
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -18757,52 +19752,55 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_socket_handle_map_request">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_clear">
<description>
- socket: a #GtkSocket
+Removes all rows from the list store.
-Called from the GtkSocket backend when the plug has been mapped.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkListStore.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_expander">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_direction">
<description>
-Draws an expander as used in #GtkTreeView.
+Gets the reading direction for a particular widget. See
+gtk_widget_set_direction().
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_expander() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x position to draw the expander at
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y position to draw the expander at
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="expander_style">
-<parameter_description> the style to draw the expander in
+</parameters>
+<return> the reading direction for the widget.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_menu_get_monitor">
+<description>
+Retrieves the number of the monitor on which to show the menu.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenu
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the number of the monitor on which the menu should
+be popped up or -1, if no monitor has been set
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_hsv_is_adjusting">
@@ -18823,6 +19821,8 @@
<return> TRUE if clients can ignore changes to the color value, since
they may be transitory, or FALSE if they should consider the color value
status to be final.
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -18840,7 +19840,7 @@
in which case the window will be kept above when it appears onscreen
initially.
-You can track the above state via the "window_state_event" signal
+You can track the above state via the "window-state-event" signal
on #GtkWidget.
Note that, according to the &lt;ulink
@@ -19023,7 +20023,8 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GdkPixbuf containing the icon, or %NULL.
+<return> a #GdkPixbuf containing the icon, or %NULL. Use
+g_object_unref() when finished using the icon.
Since: 2.10
</return>
@@ -19117,15 +20118,15 @@
builders might want to treat them in a different way.
Here is a simple example:
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
-gtk_widget_push_composite_child (&lt;!-- --&gt;);
+|[
+gtk_widget_push_composite_child ();
scrolled_window-&gt;hscrollbar = gtk_hscrollbar_new (hadjustment);
gtk_widget_set_composite_name (scrolled_window-&gt;hscrollbar, "hscrollbar");
-gtk_widget_pop_composite_child (&lt;!-- --&gt;);
+gtk_widget_pop_composite_child ();
gtk_widget_set_parent (scrolled_window-&gt;hscrollbar,
GTK_WIDGET (scrolled_window));
g_object_ref (scrolled_window-&gt;hscrollbar);
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -19133,28 +20134,22 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_drag_dest_item">
+<function name="gtk_font_button_get_font_name">
<description>
-Gets information about the item that is highlighted for feedback.
+Retrieves the name of the currently selected font.
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the highlighted item, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
+<parameter name="font_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an internal copy of the font name which must not be freed.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_remove">
@@ -19179,31 +20174,19 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_move_before">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_use_markup">
<description>
-Moves @iter in @tree_store to the position before @position. @iter and
- position should be in the same level. Note that this function only
-works with unsorted stores. If @position is %NULL, @iter will be
-moved to the end of the level.
-
-Since: 2.2
+Return value: %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter or %NULL.
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_visible_text">
@@ -19294,25 +20277,22 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set">
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_set_markup">
<description>
-Precursor of g_object_set().
+Sets the text of the message dialog to be @str, which is marked
+up with the &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango text markup
+language&lt;/link&gt;.
-Deprecated: Use g_object_set() instead.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_property_name">
-<parameter_description> name of first property to set
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties,
-%NULL-terminated
+<parameter name="str">
+<parameter_description> markup string (see &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango markup format&lt;/link&gt;)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -19411,6 +20391,13 @@
area will be set to the full area covered by @column. See also
gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().
+Note that if @path is not specified and @cell is set and part of a column
+containing the expander, the tooltip might not show and hide at the correct
+position. In such cases @path must be set to the current node under the
+mouse cursor for this function to operate correctly.
+
+See also gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
+
Since: 2.12
</description>
@@ -19432,7 +20419,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererText or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRenderer or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -19490,6 +20477,38 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_test_widget_send_key">
+<description>
+This function will generate keyboard press and release events in
+the middle of the first GdkWindow found that belongs to @widget.
+For %GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets like GtkButton, this will often be an
+input-only event window. For other widgets, this is usually widget-&gt;window.
+Certain caveats should be considered when using this function, in
+particular because the mouse pointer is warped to the key press
+location, see gdk_test_simulate_key() for details.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> Widget to generate a key press and release on.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> A Gdk keyboard value.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> Keyboard modifiers the event is setup with.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> wether all actions neccessary for the key event simulation were carried out successfully.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="GtkLabel">
<description>
The desired maximum width of the label, in characters. If this property
@@ -19579,25 +20598,23 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_current_page">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_completion_prefix">
<description>
-Sets the current page number. If @current_page is not -1, this enables
-the current page choice for the range of pages to print.
+Get the original text entered by the user that triggered
+the completion or %NULL if there's no completion ongoing.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="current_page">
-<parameter_description> the current page number.
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the prefix for the current completion
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_message_dialog_set_image">
@@ -19638,33 +20655,11 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri">
-<description>
-Gets the URI that should be previewed in a custom preview
-widget. See gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the URI for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file is
-selected. Free with g_free().
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_append_text">
<description>
Appends the given text to the contents of the widget.
-Deprecated: gtk_entry_append_text() is deprecated and should not
-be used in newly-written code. Use gtk_editable_insert_text()
-instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_insert_text() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -19841,19 +20836,24 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_label_set_accel_closure">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_label_widget">
<description>
-Sets the closure to be monitored by this accelerator label. The closure
-must be connected to an accelerator group; see gtk_accel_group_connect().
+Sets @label_widget as the widget that will be used as the label
+for @button. If @label_widget is %NULL the "label" property is used
+as label. If "label" is also %NULL, the label in the stock item
+determined by the "stock_id" property is used as label. If
+"stock_id" is also %NULL, @button does not have a label.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelLabel
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_closure">
-<parameter_description> the closure to monitor for accelerator changes.
+<parameter name="label_widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget used as label, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -19973,20 +20973,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_system_unix_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkFileSystemUnix object. #GtkFileSystemUnix
-implements the #GtkFileSystem interface with direct access to
-the filesystem using Unix/Linux API calls
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkFileSystemUnix object
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_radio_action_get_current_value">
<description>
Obtains the value property of the currently active member of
@@ -20058,32 +21044,44 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_validate_yrange">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_position">
<description>
-Ensure that a region of a #GtkTextLayout is valid. The ::changed
-signal will be emitted if any lines are validated.
+Retrieves the iterator pointing to the character at buffer
+coordinates @x and @y. Buffer coordinates are coordinates for
+the entire buffer, not just the currently-displayed portion.
+If you have coordinates from an event, you have to convert
+those to buffer coordinates with
+gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords().
+
+Note that this is different from gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_location(),
+which returns cursor locations, i.e. positions &lt;emphasis&gt;between&lt;/emphasis&gt;
+characters.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="anchor">
-<parameter_description> iter pointing into a line that will be used as the
-coordinate origin
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y0_">
-<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
-which to begin validation. (The offset here is in pixels
-after validation.)
+<parameter name="trailing">
+<parameter_description> location to store an integer indicating where
+in the grapheme the user clicked. It will either be
+zero, or the number of characters in the grapheme.
+0 represents the trailing edge of the grapheme.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y1_">
-<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
-which to end validation. (The offset here is in pixels
-after validation.)
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x position, in buffer coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y position, in buffer coordinates
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -20100,10 +21098,10 @@
Calling
&lt;literal&gt;gtk_list_store_insert_with_values(list_store, iter, position...)&lt;/literal&gt;
has the same effect as calling
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+|[
gtk_list_store_insert (list_store, iter, position);
gtk_list_store_set (list_store, iter, ...);
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
with the difference that the former will only emit a row_inserted signal,
while the latter will emit row_inserted, row_changed and, if the list store
is sorted, rows_reordered. Since emitting the rows_reordered signal
@@ -20137,19 +21135,13 @@
<function name="GtkRecentChooser">
<description>
-This signal is emitted when the user "activates" a recent item
-in the recent chooser. This can happen by double-clicking on an item
-in the recently used resources list, or by pressing
-&lt;keycap&gt;Enter&lt;/keycap&gt;.
+The #GtkRecentFilter object to be used when displaying
+the recently used resources.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -20188,6 +21180,10 @@
Note that you do need to set an accelerator on the parent menu with
gtk_menu_set_accel_group() for this to work.
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="menu_item">
@@ -20203,26 +21199,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_selection_set_select_multiple">
-<description>
-Sets whether the user is allowed to select multiple files in the file list.
-Use gtk_file_selection_get_selections () to get the list of selected files.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filesel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSelection
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="select_multiple">
-<parameter_description> whether or not the user is allowed to select multiple
-files in the file list.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_size_group_get_widgets">
<description>
Return value: a #GSList of widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
@@ -20255,22 +21231,23 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_size_group_set_ignore_hidden">
+<function name="gtk_editable_set_position">
<description>
-Sets whether unmapped widgets should be ignored when
-calculating the size.
-
-Since: 2.8
+Sets the cursor position in the editable to the given value.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ignore_hidden">
-<parameter_description> whether unmapped widgets should be ignored
-when calculating the size
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the position of the cursor. The cursor is displayed
+before the character with the given (base 0) index in the editable.
+The value must be less than or equal to the number of characters
+in the editable. A value of -1 indicates that the position should
+be set after the last character of the editable. Note that this
+position is in characters, not in bytes.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -20313,27 +21290,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_get_paths">
-<description>
-Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of @chooser
-as #GtkFilePath. An internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_get_uris().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GSList containing a #GtkFilePath for each selected
-file and subfolder in the current folder. Free the returned list
-with g_slist_free(), and the paths with gtk_file_path_free().
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_label">
<description>
Return value: the tab label
@@ -20444,45 +21400,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_value_from_string">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_wrap_license">
<description>
-This function demarshals a value from a string. This function
-calls g_value_init() on the @value argument, so it need not be
-initialised beforehand.
-
-This function can handle char, uchar, boolean, int, uint, long,
-ulong, enum, flags, float, double, string, #GdkColor and
-#GtkAdjustment type values. Support for #GtkWidget type values is
-still to come.
+Sets whether the license text in @about is
+automatically wrapped.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pspec">
-<parameter_description> the #GParamSpec for the property
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> the string representation of the value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> the #GValue to store the result in
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="wrap_license">
+<parameter_description> whether to wrap the license
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_cursor_position">
@@ -20571,71 +21507,86 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkToggleAction">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_file">
<description>
-If the toggle action should be active in or not.
+Sets the current folder for @chooser from a #GFile.
+Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_rc_add_default_file">
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="file">
+<parameter_description> the #GFile for the new folder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the folder could be changed successfully, %FALSE
+otherwise.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_label_get_ellipsize">
<description>
-Adds a file to the list of files to be parsed at the
-end of gtk_init().
+Return value: #PangoEllipsizeMode
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> the pathname to the file. If @filename is not absolute, it
-is searched in the current directory.
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> #PangoEllipsizeMode
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status_string">
+<function name="gtk_rc_add_default_file">
<description>
-Return value: a string representation of the status
+Adds a file to the list of files to be parsed at the
+end of gtk_init().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> the pathname to the file. If @filename is not absolute, it
+is searched in the current directory.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a string representation of the status
-of the print operation
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height">
<description>
-Makes @status_icon display the file @filename.
-See gtk_status_icon_new_from_file() for details.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Return value: the paper height.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> a filename
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the paper height.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_backspace">
@@ -20677,26 +21628,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_get_color">
-<description>
-Sets @color to be the current color in the #GtkColorButton widget.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the current color.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_group_add_action">
<description>
Adds an action object to the action group. Note that this function
@@ -20722,26 +21653,41 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_add">
+<function name="gtk_scale_button_new">
<description>
-Add a tag to the table. The tag is assigned the highest priority
-in the table.
+Creates a #GtkScaleButton, with a range between @min and @max, with
+a stepping of @step.
- tag must not be in a tag table already, and may not have
-the same name as an already-added tag.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
+<parameter name="min">
+<parameter_description> the minimum value of the scale (usually 0)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max">
+<parameter_description> the maximum value of the scale (usually 100)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> the stepping of value when a scroll-wheel event,
+or up/down arrow event occurs (usually 2)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icons">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of icon names, or %NULL if
+you want to set the list later with gtk_scale_button_set_icons()
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkScaleButton
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_left_margin">
@@ -20768,44 +21714,29 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_destroyed">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_reorderable">
<description>
-This function sets * widget_pointer to %NULL if @widget_pointer !=
-%NULL. It's intended to be used as a callback connected to the
-"destroy" signal of a widget. You connect gtk_widget_destroyed()
-as a signal handler, and pass the address of your widget variable
-as user data. Then when the widget is destroyed, the variable will
-be set to %NULL. Useful for example to avoid multiple copies
-of the same dialog.
+Return value: %TRUE if the @tree_column can be reordered by the user.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget_pointer">
-<parameter_description> address of a variable that contains @widget
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the @tree_column can be reordered by the user.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_select_multiple">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_unlock">
<description>
-Sets whether @chooser can select multiple items.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Undoes the last call to gtk_accel_group_lock() on this @accel_group.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="select_multiple">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if @chooser can select more than one item
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -20853,44 +21784,55 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_iter_is_valid">
+<function name="gtk_container_child_get_property">
<description>
-WARNING: This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing
-purposes.
-
-Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkTreeStore.
-
+Gets the value of a child property for @child and @container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the property to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> a location to return the value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkToolButton">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset">
<description>
-This signal is emitted when the tool button is clicked with the mouse
-or activated with the keyboard.
+This function registers GTK+'s internal rich text serialization
+format with the passed @buffer. See
+gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset() for details.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbutton">
-<parameter_description> the object that emitted the signal
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tagset_name">
+<parameter_description> an optional tagset name, on %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
+format's mime-type.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_attributes_new">
@@ -20969,30 +21911,35 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_request_targets">
+<function name="gtk_im_context_simple_add_table">
<description>
-Requests the contents of the clipboard as list of supported targets.
-When the list is later received, @callback will be called.
-
-The @targets parameter to @callback will contain the resulting targets if
-the request succeeded, or %NULL if it failed.
+Adds an additional table to search to the input context.
+Each row of the table consists of @max_seq_len key symbols
+followed by two #guint16 interpreted as the high and low
+words of a #gunicode value. Tables are searched starting
+from the last added.
-Since: 2.4
+The table must be sorted in dictionary order on the
+numeric value of the key symbol fields. (Values beyond
+the length of the sequence should be zero.)
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+<parameter name="context_simple">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIMContextSimple
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> a function to call when the targets are received,
-or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called
-one way or the other.)
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> the table
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data to pass to @callback.
+<parameter name="max_seq_len">
+<parameter_description> Maximum length of a sequence in the table
+(cannot be greater than #GTK_MAX_COMPOSE_LEN)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_seqs">
+<parameter_description> number of sequences in the table
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -21001,10 +21948,11 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_iter_copy">
<description>
-Creates a dynamically allocated tree iterator as a copy of @iter. This
-function is not intended for use in applications, because you can just copy
-the structs by value (&lt;literal&gt;GtkTreeIter new_iter = iter;&lt;/literal&gt;). You
-must free this iter with gtk_tree_iter_free ().
+Creates a dynamically allocated tree iterator as a copy of @iter.
+This function is not intended for use in applications, because you
+can just copy the structs by value
+(&lt;literal&gt;GtkTreeIter new_iter = iter;&lt;/literal&gt;).
+You must free this iter with gtk_tree_iter_free().
</description>
@@ -21037,20 +21985,19 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_tooltip_window">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_modal">
<description>
-Return value: The #GtkWindow of the current tooltip.
+Return value: %TRUE if the window is set to be modal and
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The #GtkWindow of the current tooltip.
-
-Since: 2.12
+<return> %TRUE if the window is set to be modal and
+establishes a grab when shown
</return>
</function>
@@ -21182,7 +22129,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="at_line_end">
-<parameter_description> whether cursor i sdrawn at line end, not over some
+<parameter_description> whether cursor is drawn at line end, not over some
character
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -21209,6 +22156,30 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_page_increment">
+<description>
+Sets the page increment of the adjustment.
+
+See gtk_adjustment_set_lower() about how to compress multiple
+emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
+properties.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_increment">
+<parameter_description> the new page increment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_attributes">
<description>
Computes the effect of any tags applied to this spot in the
@@ -21247,6 +22218,29 @@
gtk_tree_model_filter_refilter() to keep the visibility information of
the model uptodate.
+Note that @func is called whenever a row is inserted, when it may still be
+empty. The visible function should therefore take special care of empty
+rows, like in the example below.
+
+&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+static gboolean
+visible_func (GtkTreeModel *model,
+GtkTreeIter *iter,
+gpointer data)
+{
+/&ast; Visible if row is non-empty and first column is "HI" &ast;/
+gchar *str;
+gboolean visible = FALSE;
+
+gtk_tree_model_get (model, iter, 0, &str, -1);
+if (str && strcmp (str, "HI") == 0)
+visible = TRUE;
+g_free (str);
+
+return visible;
+}
+&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+
Since: 2.4
</description>
@@ -21300,21 +22294,22 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_refilter">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_visible_horizontal">
<description>
-Emits ::row_changed for each row in the child model, which causes
-the filter to re-evaluate whether a row is visible or not.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item is visible on toolbars that are
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @tool_item is visible on toolbars that are
+docked horizontally.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="GtkEntry">
@@ -21329,30 +22324,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_role">
+<function name="gtk_cell_layout_clear_attributes">
<description>
-This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
-
-In combination with the window title, the window role allows a
-&lt;link linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt; to identify "the
-same" window when an application is restarted. So for example you
-might set the "toolbox" role on your app's toolbox window, so that
-when the user restarts their session, the window manager can put
-the toolbox back in the same place.
-
-If a window already has a unique title, you don't need to set the
-role, since the WM can use the title to identify the window when
-restoring the session.
+Clears all existing attributes previously set with
+gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="cell_layout">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="role">
-<parameter_description> unique identifier for the window to be used when restoring a session
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -21426,13 +22412,14 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_search_column">
<description>
Sets @column as the column where the interactive search code should
-search in.
+search in for the current model.
-If the sort column is set, users can use the "start-interactive-search"
+If the search column is set, users can use the "start-interactive-search"
key binding to bring up search popup. The enable-search property controls
whether simply typing text will also start an interactive search.
-Note that @column refers to a column of the model.
+Note that @column refers to a column of the current model. The search
+column is reset to -1 when the model is changed.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21479,32 +22466,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_system_volume_get_icon_name">
-<description>
-Gets an icon name suitable for a #GtkFileSystemVolume.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_system">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="volume">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemVolume
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> An icon name which can be used for rendering an icon for
-this volume, or %NULL if no icon name could be found. In the latter
-case, the @error value will be set as appropriate.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_insert">
<description>
Return value: insertion point mark
@@ -21520,45 +22481,42 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_system_volume_free">
+<function name="gtk_box_pack_start">
<description>
-Frees a #GtkFileSystemVolume structure as returned by
-gtk_file_system_list_volumes().
+Adds @child to @box, packed with reference to the start of @box.
+The @child is packed after any other child packed with reference
+to the start of @box.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_system">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystem
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="volume">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemVolume
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be added to @box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_binding_entry_skip">
-<description>
-Since: 2.12
-
-Install a binding on @binding_set which causes key lookups
-to be aborted, to prevent bindings from lower priority sets
-to be activated.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> @binding_set to skip an entry of
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the new child is to be given extra space allocated to
+ box The extra space will be divided evenly between all children of
+ box that use this option
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key value of binding to skip
+<parameter name="fill">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if space given to @child by the @expand option is
+actually allocated to @child, rather than just padding it. This
+parameter has no effect if @expand is set to %FALSE. A child is
+always allocated the full height of a #GtkHBox and the full width
+of a #GtkVBox. This option affects the other dimension
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to skip
+<parameter name="padding">
+<parameter_description> extra space in pixels to put between this child and its
+neighbors, over and above the global amount specified by
+#GtkBox:spacing property. If @child is a widget at one of the
+reference ends of @box, then @padding pixels are also put between
+ child and the reference edge of @box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -21638,55 +22596,103 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_tag_toggle">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_insert_page">
<description>
-Moves forward to the next toggle (on or off) of the
-#GtkTextTag @tag, or to the next toggle of any tag if
- tag is %NULL. If no matching tag toggles are found,
-Return value: whether we found a tag toggle after @iter
+Insert a page into @notebook at the given position.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tab_label">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page,
+or -1 to append the page after all other pages.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether we found a tag toggle after @iter
+<return> the index (starting from 0) of the inserted
+page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_system_path_is_local">
+<function name="gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query">
<description>
-Checks whether a #GtkFilePath is local; that is whether
-gtk_file_system_path_to_filename would return non-%NULL.
+Triggers a new tooltip query on @display, in order to update the current
+visible tooltip, or to show/hide the current tooltip. This function is
+useful to call when, for example, the state of the widget changed by a
+key press.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filesystem">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystem
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkFilePath from that filesystem
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_deserialize_set_can_create_tags">
+<description>
+Use this function to allow a rich text deserialization function to
+create new tags in the receiving buffer. Note that using this
+function is almost always a bad idea, because the rich text
+functions you register should know how to map the rich text format
+they handler to your text buffers set of tags.
+
+The ability of creating new (arbitrary!) tags in the receiving buffer
+is meant for special rich text formats like the internal one that
+is registered using gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset(),
+because that format is essentially a dump of the internal structure
+of the source buffer, including its tag names.
+
+You should allow creation of tags only if you know what you are
+doing, e.g. if you defined a tagset name for your application
+suite's text buffers and you know that it's fine to receive new
+tags from these buffers, because you know that your application can
+handle the newly created tags.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkAtom representing a registered rich text format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="can_create_tags">
+<parameter_description> whether deserializing this format may create tags
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the path is loca
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_get_child_requisition">
<description>
This function is only for use in widget implementations. Obtains
@widget-&gt;requisition, unless someone has forced a particular
-geometry on the widget (e.g. with gtk_widget_set_usize()), in which
-case it returns that geometry instead of the widget's requisition.
+geometry on the widget (e.g. with gtk_widget_set_size_request()),
+in which case it returns that geometry instead of the widget's
+requisition.
This function differs from gtk_widget_size_request() in that
it retrieves the last size request value from @widget-&gt;requisition,
@@ -21715,40 +22721,88 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_find_module_in_path">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_prepend_item">
<description>
-Searches for a theme engine in the GTK+ search path. This function
-is not useful for applications and should not be used.
+Adds a new button to the beginning (top or left edges) of the given toolbar.
+
+ callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
+arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="module_file">
-<parameter_description> name of a theme engine
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> give your toolbar button a label.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_text">
+<parameter_description> a string that appears when the user holds the mouse over this item.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
+<parameter_description> use with #GtkTipsQuery.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to any data you wish to be passed to the callback.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The filename, if found (must be freed with g_free()),
-otherwise %NULL.
+<return> the new toolbar item as a #GtkWidget.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_plug_add_to_socket">
+<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_accel_path">
<description>
-Adds a plug to a socket within the same application.
+Retrieve the accelerator path that was previously set on @menu_item.
+
+See gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() for details.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="plug">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug
+<parameter name="menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkMenuItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="socket_">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket
+</parameters>
+<return> the accelerator path corresponding to this menu item's
+functionality, or %NULL if not set
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution">
+<description>
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the resolution in dpi
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_draw_hline">
@@ -21756,7 +22810,7 @@
Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
using the given style and state.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_hline() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_hline() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -21919,20 +22973,17 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_label_widget">
+<function name="gtk_rc_get_im_module_file">
<description>
-Return value: The widget used as label on @button, or %NULL.
+Obtains the path to the IM modules file. See the documentation
+of the &lt;link linkend="im-module-file"&gt;&lt;envar&gt;GTK_IM_MODULE_FILE&lt;/envar&gt;&lt;/link&gt;
+environment variable for more details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The widget used as label on @button, or %NULL.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> a newly-allocated string containing the name of the file
+listing the IM modules available for loading
</return>
</function>
@@ -21954,22 +23005,25 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_adjustment">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_width">
<description>
-Replaces the #GtkAdjustment associated with @spin_button.
+Return value: the page width.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment to replace the existing adjustment
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the page width.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_ensure_style">
@@ -22163,6 +23217,30 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_page_size">
+<description>
+Sets the page size of the adjustment.
+
+See gtk_adjustment_set_lower() about how to compress multiple
+emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
+properties.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_size">
+<parameter_description> the new page size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="GtkToolItem">
<description>
This signal is emitted when the toolitem's tooltip changes.
@@ -22275,6 +23353,8 @@
<description>
Inserts a widget in the toolbar at the given position.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="toolbar">
@@ -22365,13 +23445,13 @@
To reliably find the toplevel #GtkWindow, use
gtk_widget_get_toplevel() and check if the %TOPLEVEL flags
is set on the result.
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+|[
GtkWidget *toplevel = gtk_widget_get_toplevel (widget);
if (GTK_WIDGET_TOPLEVEL (toplevel))
{
-[ Perform action on toplevel. ]
+/&ast; Perform action on toplevel. &ast;/
}
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
</description>
@@ -22449,25 +23529,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkFileChooserButtons">
-<description>
-The ::file-set signal is emitted when the user selects a file.
-
-Note that this signal is only emitted when the &lt;emphasis&gt;user&lt;/emphasis&gt;
-changes the file.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="GtkMenuShell">
<description>
A boolean that determines whether the menu and its submenus grab the
@@ -22498,50 +23559,17 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_new_from_key_file">
+<function name="GtkBuilder">
<description>
-Reads the print settings from the group @group_name in @key_file.
-Return value: the restored #GtkPrintSettings
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the settings from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the group to use
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the restored #GtkPrintSettings
+The translation domain used when translating property values that
+have been marked as translatable in interface descriptions.
+If the translation domain is %NULL, #GtkBuilder uses gettext(),
+otherwise g_dgettext().
Since: 2.12
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_stock">
-<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_stock() for details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> a stock icon name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a stock icon size
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -22594,37 +23622,37 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_inline_completion">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_value">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if inline completion is turned on
+Get the value in the @spin_button.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if inline completion is turned on
-
-Since: 2.6
+<return> the value of @spin_button
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_visibility">
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_lower">
<description>
-Retrieves whether the text in @entry is visible. See
-gtk_entry_set_visibility().
+Retrieves the minimum value of the adjustment.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the text is currently visible
+<return> The current minimum value of the adjustment.
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -22694,21 +23722,21 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_copy">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_icon_name">
<description>
-Copies an existing #GtkPaperSize.
-
+Returns: the icon name or %NULL if the window has
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="other">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a copy of @other
+<return> the icon name or %NULL if the window has
+no themed icon
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -22799,42 +23827,44 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_title">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_palette">
<description>
-Sets the menu's title in tearoff mode.
+Shows and hides the palette based upon the value of @has_palette.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> a title for the menu in tearoff mode
+<parameter name="has_palette">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if palette is to be visible, %FALSE otherwise.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_sentence">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get">
<description>
-Determines whether @iter ends a sentence. Sentence boundaries are
-determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language
-(if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary
-algorithms).
+Looks up the string value associated with @key.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter is at the end of a sentence.
+<return> the string value for @key
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -22884,32 +23914,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_widget_new_with_backend">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkFileChooserWidget with a specified backend. This is
-especially useful if you use gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only() to allow
-non-local files. This is a file chooser widget that can be embedded in
-custom windows and it is the same widget that is used by
-#GtkFileChooserDialog.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> Open or save mode for the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="backend">
-<parameter_description> The name of the specific filesystem backend to use.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkFileChooserWidget
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_label_set_ellipsize">
<description>
Sets the mode used to ellipsize (add an ellipsis: "...") to the text
@@ -22972,24 +23976,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_duplex">
-<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether to print the output in duplex.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_int">
<description>
Return value: the integer value of @key
@@ -23065,23 +24051,26 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_default_attributes">
<description>
-Creates a status icon displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
-If the current icon theme is changed, the icon will be updated
-appropriately.
+Obtains a copy of the default text attributes. These are the
+attributes used for text unless a tag overrides them.
+You'd typically pass the default attributes in to
+gtk_text_iter_get_attributes() in order to get the
+attributes in effect at a given text position.
+
+The return value is a copy owned by the caller of this function,
+and should be freed.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> a new #GtkTextAttributes
</return>
</function>
@@ -23095,7 +24084,7 @@
gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() would not. Now both functions ensure
the background will be redrawn.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.2: Use gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23178,6 +24167,23 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_pdf">
+<description>
+Return value: %TRUE if @printer accepts PDF
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @printer accepts PDF
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_for_display">
<description>
Return value: the appropriate clipboard object. If no
@@ -23205,25 +24211,63 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_set_model">
+<function name="gtk_button_new_from_stock">
<description>
-Sets the model of @tree_model_sort to be @model. If @model is %NULL,
-then the old model is unset. The sort function is unset as a result
-of this call. The model will be in an unsorted state until a sort
-function is set.
+Creates a new #GtkButton containing the image and text from a stock item.
+Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK and
+#GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
+
+If @stock_id is unknown, then it will be treated as a mnemonic
+label (as for gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic()).
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModelSort.
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL.
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkButton
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_get_size">
+<description>
+Return value: number of tags in @table
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> number of tags in @table
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_selection_bounds">
+<description>
+Return value: whether the selection has nonzero length
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with selection start
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with selection end
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether the selection has nonzero length
+</return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_action_sync_menu_visible">
@@ -23280,6 +24324,8 @@
Sets the tip area of @tooltip to the area which @cell occupies in
the item pointed to by @path. See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().
+See also gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
+
Since: 2.12
</description>
@@ -23403,48 +24449,39 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_reshow_with_initial_size">
+<function name="gtk_settings_get_for_screen">
<description>
-Hides @window, then reshows it, resetting the
-default size and position of the window. Used
-by GUI builders only.
+Gets the #GtkSettings object for @screen, creating it if necessary.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GtkSettings object.
+
+Since: 2.2
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_modify_text">
+<function name="gtk_printer_is_active">
<description>
-Sets the text color for a widget in a particular state. All other
-style values are left untouched. The text color is the foreground
-color used along with the base color (see gtk_widget_modify_base())
-for widgets such as #GtkEntry and #GtkTextView. See also
-gtk_widget_modify_style().
+Return value: %TRUE if @printer is active
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state">
-<parameter_description> the state for which to set the text color
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),
-or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
-of gtk_widget_modify_text().
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @printer is active
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_container_unset_focus_chain">
@@ -23491,6 +24528,33 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area">
+<description>
+Sets the area of the widget, where the contents of this tooltip apply,
+to be @rect (in widget coordinates). This is especially useful for
+properly setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView rows and cells, #GtkIconViews,
+etc.
+
+For setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView, please refer to the convenience
+functions for this: gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row() and
+gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_cell().
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="rect">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_size_lookup">
<description>
Obtains the pixel size of a semantic icon size, possibly
@@ -23611,55 +24675,36 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_string">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_column_spacing">
<description>
-Draws a text string on @window with the given parameters.
+Sets the ::column-spacing property which specifies the space
+which is inserted between the columns of the icon view.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_layout() instead.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> the string to draw
+<parameter name="column_spacing">
+<parameter_description> the column spacing
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_set_left_margin">
+<function name="gtk_editable_copy_clipboard">
<description>
-Sets the default left margin for text in @text_view.
-Tags in the buffer may override the default.
+Copies the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
+puts it on the clipboard.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="left_margin">
-<parameter_description> left margin in pixels
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -23695,16 +24740,9 @@
<function name="GtkProgressBar">
<description>
-The preferred place to ellipsize the string, if the progressbar does
-not have enough room to display the entire string, specified as a
-#PangoEllisizeMode.
-
-Note that setting this property to a value other than
-%PANGO_ELLIPSIZE_NONE has the side-effect that the progressbar requests
-only enough space to display the ellipsis "...". Another means to set a
-progressbar's width is gtk_widget_set_size_request().
+The minimum vertical height of the progress bar.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23831,28 +24869,17 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_dialog_get_response_for_widget">
+<function name="GtkRecentChooserMenu">
<description>
-Gets the response id of a widget in the action area
-of a dialog.
+Whether the first ten items in the menu should be prepended by
+a number acting as a unique mnemonic.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget in the action area of @dialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the response id of @widget, or %GTK_RESPONSE_NONE
-if @widget doesn't have a response id set.
-
-Since: 2.8
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_get_inverted">
@@ -23936,30 +24963,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_angle">
-<description>
-Sets the angle of rotation for the label. An angle of 90 reads from
-from bottom to top, an angle of 270, from top to bottom. The angle
-setting for the label is ignored if the label is selectable,
-wrapped, or ellipsized.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="angle">
-<parameter_description> the angle that the baseline of the label makes with
-the horizontal, in degrees, measured counterclockwise
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_table_get_row_spacing">
<description>
Gets the amount of space between row @row, and
@@ -24106,58 +25109,57 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_plug_construct">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_tags">
<description>
-Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
- socket_id This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from #GtkPlug.
+Return value: list of #GtkTextTag
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="plug">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="socket_id">
-<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> list of #GtkTextTag
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_tags">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_line">
<description>
-Return value: list of #GtkTextTag
+Moves @iter to the start of the next visible line. Returns %TRUE if there
+was a next line to move to, and %FALSE if @iter was simply moved to
+the end of the buffer and is now not dereferenceable, or if @iter was
+already at the end of the buffer.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> list of #GtkTextTag
+<return> whether @iter can be dereferenced
+
+Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_line">
+<function name="gtk_action_create_menu_item">
<description>
-Moves @iter to the start of the next visible line. Returns %TRUE if there
-was a next line to move to, and %FALSE if @iter was simply moved to
-the end of the buffer and is now not dereferenceable, or if @iter was
-already at the end of the buffer.
+Creates a menu item widget that proxies for the given action.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter can be dereferenced
+<return> a menu item connected to the action.
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -24226,7 +25228,7 @@
Deletes the menu items which were created from the @entries by the given
item factory.
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -24330,44 +25332,22 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_position">
+<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_add">
<description>
-Retrieves the iterator pointing to the character at buffer
-coordinates @x and @y. Buffer coordinates are coordinates for
-the entire buffer, not just the currently-displayed portion.
-If you have coordinates from an event, you have to convert
-those to buffer coordinates with
-gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords().
-
-Note that this is different from gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_location(),
-which returns cursor locations, i.e. positions &lt;emphasis&gt;between&lt;/emphasis&gt;
-characters.
+Add a tag to the table. The tag is assigned the highest priority
+in the table.
-Since: 2.6
+ tag must not be in a tag table already, and may not have
+the same name as an already-added tag.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="trailing">
-<parameter_description> location to store an integer indicating where
-in the grapheme the user clicked. It will either be
-zero, or the number of characters in the grapheme.
-0 represents the trailing edge of the grapheme.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x position, in buffer coordinates
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y position, in buffer coordinates
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -24409,6 +25389,8 @@
<description>
Adds a new space to the beginning of the toolbar.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="toolbar">
@@ -24419,33 +25401,45 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_child_type">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_example_icon_name">
<description>
-Return value: a #GType.
+Gets the name of an icon that is representative of the
+current theme (for instance, to use when presenting
+a list of themes to the user.)
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GType.
+<return> the name of an example icon or %NULL.
+Free with g_free().
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_new">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_set_title">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkPageSetup.
+Modifies the @title of the browse dialog used by @button.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the button widget to modify.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the new browse dialog title.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPageSetup.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets">
@@ -24587,21 +25581,28 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_get_location">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_bottom_margin">
<description>
-Return value: the location of @printer
+Sets the bottom margin of the #GtkPageSetup.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="margin">
+<parameter_description> the new bottom margin in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the units for @margin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the location of @printer
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_icon_widget">
@@ -24623,22 +25624,15 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_foreach_unfiltered">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_prev_page">
<description>
-Loops over all entries in the accelerator map, and execute
- foreach_func on each. The signature of @foreach_func is that of
-#GtkAccelMapForeach, the @changed parameter indicates whether
-this accelerator was changed during runtime (thus, would need
-saving during an accelerator map dump).
+Switches to the previous page. Nothing happens if the current page
+is the first page.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to be passed into @foreach_func
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="foreach_func">
-<parameter_description> function to be executed for each accel map entry
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -24697,59 +25691,72 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_grab_focus">
+<function name="gtk_binding_set_by_class">
<description>
-Causes @widget to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
-inside. @widget must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
-something like #GtkFrame won't work. (More precisely, it must have the
-%GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set.)
+This function returns the binding set named after the type name of
+the passed in class structure. New binding sets are created on
+demand by this function.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="object_class">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkObject class
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the binding set corresponding to @object_class
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_get_size">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_set_model">
<description>
-Return value: number of tags in @table
+Sets the model of @tree_model_sort to be @model. If @model is %NULL,
+then the old model is unset. The sort function is unset as a result
+of this call. The model will be in an unsorted state until a sort
+function is set.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModelSort.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> number of tags in @table
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_selection_bounds">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_add_mark">
<description>
-Return value: whether the selection has nonzero length
+Adds the mark at position @where. The mark must not be added to
+another buffer, and if its name is not %NULL then there must not
+be another mark in the buffer with the same name.
+
+Emits the "mark-set" signal as notification of the mark's initial
+placement.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with selection start
+<parameter name="mark">
+<parameter_description> the mark to add
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with selection end
+<parameter name="where">
+<parameter_description> location to place mark
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the selection has nonzero length
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_drag_update">
@@ -24863,7 +25870,7 @@
The operation of the @mouse_button and the @time_ parameters is the same
as the @button and @activation_time parameters for gtk_menu_popup().
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -24876,7 +25883,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDestroyNotify function to be called on @popup_data when
+<parameter_description> a #GDestroyNotify function to be called on @popup_data when
the menu is unposted
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -24921,23 +25928,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new_merge_id">
-<description>
-Return value: an unused merge id.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an unused merge id.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_entry">
<description>
Return value: the entry currently in use as search entry.
@@ -25014,17 +26004,48 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_calendar_thaw">
+<function name="gtk_draw_handle">
<description>
-Does nothing. Previously defrosted a calendar; all the changes made
-since the last gtk_calendar_freeze() were displayed.
+Draws a handle as used in #GtkHandleBox and #GtkPaned.
-Deprecated: 2.8:
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_handle() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the handle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the handle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> with of the handle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height of the handle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the orientation of the handle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -25053,25 +26074,59 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_deiconify">
+<function name="gtk_orientable_get_orientation">
<description>
-Asks to deiconify (i.e. unminimize) the specified @window. Note
-that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely deiconified
-afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;) could iconify it
-again before your code which assumes deiconification gets to run.
+Retrieves the orientation of the @orientable.
-You can track iconification via the "window_state_event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="orientable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkOrientable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the orientation of the @orientable.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_cell_view_get_model">
+<description>
+Returns: a #GtkTreeModel used or %NULL
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GtkTreeModel used or %NULL
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri">
+<description>
+Gets the URI that should be previewed in a custom preview
+widget. See gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the URI for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file is
+selected. Free with g_free().
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_uri">
@@ -25119,9 +26174,21 @@
<function name="GtkMenu">
<description>
-A boolean that indicates whether the menu is torn-off.
+Arbitrary constant to scale down the size of the scroll arrow.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="_gtk_socket_handle_map_request">
+<description>
+ socket: a #GtkSocket
+
+Called from the GtkSocket backend when the plug has been mapped.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -25239,46 +26306,32 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags_by_name">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_move_mark_onscreen">
<description>
-Same as gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags(), but allows you
-to pass in tag names instead of tag objects.
+Moves a mark within the buffer so that it's
+located within the currently-visible text area.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> position in @buffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> UTF-8 text
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="len">
-<parameter_description> length of @text, or -1
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_tag_name">
-<parameter_description> name of a tag to apply to @text
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> more tag names
+<parameter name="mark">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextMark
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the mark moved (wasn't already onscreen)
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_menu_entries">
<description>
Creates the menu items from the @entries.
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -25327,47 +26380,37 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_default">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_set_orientation">
<description>
-Gets the icon theme for the default screen. See
-gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen().
-
+Sets whether a toolbar should appear horizontally or vertically.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> a new #GtkOrientation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
-the default screen. This icon theme is associated with
-the screen and can be used as long as the screen
-is open. Do not ref or unref it.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_system_volume_mount">
+<function name="_gtk_socket_remove_grabbed_key">
<description>
-Tries to mount an unmounted volume. This may cause the "volumes-changed"
-signal in the @file_system to be emitted.
+ socket: a #GtkSocket
+ keyval: a key
+ modifiers: modifiers for the key
+Called from the GtkSocket backend when the corresponding plug has
+told the socket to remove a key grab.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_system">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="volume">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemVolume
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> TRUE if the @volume was mounted successfully, FALSE otherwise.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="GtkAssistant">
@@ -25411,6 +26454,7 @@
The list is terminated by a -1. For example, to set column 0 with type
%G_TYPE_STRING to "Foo", you would write &lt;literal&gt;gtk_list_store_set (store, iter,
0, "Foo", -1)&lt;/literal&gt;.
+The value will be copied or referenced by the store if appropriate.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -25430,25 +26474,44 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_delete_entry">
+<function name="gtk_buildable_custom_tag_start">
<description>
-Deletes the menu item which was created from @entry by the given
-item factory.
+This is called for each unknown element under &lt;child&gt;.
-Deprecated: 2.4:
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
+<parameter name="buildable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuildable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactoryEntry
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder used to construct this object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> child object or %NULL for non-child tags
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tagname">
+<parameter_description> name of tag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parser">
+<parameter_description> a #GMarkupParser structure to fill in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> return location for user data that will be passed in
+to parser functions
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if a object has a custom implementation, %FALSE
+if it doesn't.
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_manager_move_item">
@@ -25552,79 +26615,121 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_path_to_child_path">
+<function name="gtk_widget_child_notify">
<description>
-Converts @filter_path to a path on the child model of @filter. That is,
- filter_path points to a location in @filter. The returned path will
-point to the same location in the model not being filtered. If @filter_path
-does not point to a location in the child model, %NULL is returned.
+Emits a #GtkWidget::child-notify signal for the
+&lt;link linkend="child-properties"&gt;child property&lt;/link&gt; @child_property
+on @widget.
+This is the analogue of g_object_notify() for child properties.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter_path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert.
+<parameter name="child_property">
+<parameter_description> the name of a child property installed on the
+class of @widget&lt;!-- --&gt;'s parent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_current_uri">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_detachable">
<description>
-Gets the URI currently selected by @chooser.
-
+Return Value: TRUE if the tab is detachable.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a child #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated string holding a URI.
+<return> TRUE if the tab is detachable.
Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_add_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_check_version">
<description>
-Parses a file containing a &lt;link linkend="BUILDER-UI"&gt;GtkBuilder
-UI definition&lt;/link&gt; and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
+Checks that the GTK+ library in use is compatible with the
+given version. Generally you would pass in the constants
+#GTK_MAJOR_VERSION, #GTK_MINOR_VERSION, #GTK_MICRO_VERSION
+as the three arguments to this function; that produces
+a check that the library in use is compatible with
+the version of GTK+ the application or module was compiled
+against.
+
+Compatibility is defined by two things: first the version
+of the running library is newer than the version
+ required_major required_minor @required_micro. Second
+the running library must be binary compatible with the
+version @required_major required_minor required_micro
+(same major version.)
+
+This function is primarily for GTK+ modules; the module
+can call this function to check that it wasn't loaded
+into an incompatible version of GTK+. However, such a
+a check isn't completely reliable, since the module may be
+linked against an old version of GTK+ and calling the
+old version of gtk_check_version(), but still get loaded
+into an application using a newer version of GTK+.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+<parameter name="required_major">
+<parameter_description> the required major version.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> the name of the file to parse
+<parameter name="required_minor">
+<parameter_description> the required minor version.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="required_micro">
+<parameter_description> the required micro version.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
-
-Since: 2.12
+<return> %NULL if the GTK+ library is compatible with the
+given version, or a string describing the version mismatch.
+The returned string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified
+or freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_statusbar_get_has_resize_grip">
+<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_orientation">
<description>
-Returns: %TRUE if the statusbar has a resize grip.
+Retrieves the current orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
+call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_orientation()
+instead.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="shell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the current orientation of @shell
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_statusbar_get_has_resize_grip">
+<description>
+Returns: %TRUE if the statusbar has a resize grip.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -25637,42 +26742,40 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_factory_remove_default">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_update_policy">
<description>
-Removes an icon factory from the list of default icon
-factories. Not normally used; you might use it for a library that
-can be unloaded or shut down.
-
+Sets the update behavior of a spin button. This determines whether the
+spin button is always updated or only when a valid value is set.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="factory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory previously added with gtk_icon_factory_add_default()
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="policy">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButtonUpdatePolicy value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_system_volume_get_base_path">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_icons">
<description>
-Queries the base path for a volume. For example, a CD-ROM device may yield a
-path of "/mnt/cdrom".
+Retrieves whether @chooser should show an icon near the resource.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_system">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="volume">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemVolume
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkFilePath with the base mount path of the specified
- volume
+<return> %TRUE if the icons should be displayed, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -25712,15 +26815,16 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the label displayed in menu items and on buttons
+<parameter_description> the label displayed in menu items and on buttons, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> a tooltip for the action
+<parameter_description> a tooltip for the action, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the stock icon to display in widgets representing the action
+<parameter_description> the stock icon to display in widgets representing the
+action, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -25734,7 +26838,7 @@
<description>
Creates a new #GtkFileSystemModel object. The #GtkFileSystemModel
object wraps a #GtkFileSystem interface as a #GtkTreeModel.
-Using the @root_path and @max_depth parameters, the tree model
+Using the @root_file and @max_depth parameters, the tree model
can be restricted to a subportion of the entire file system.
@@ -25744,26 +26848,19 @@
<parameter_description> an object implementing #GtkFileSystem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="root_path">
-<parameter_description> the path of root of the file system to display
+<parameter name="root_file">
+<parameter_description> the root file path to show.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="max_depth">
-<parameter_description> the maximum depth from the children of @root_path
+<parameter_description> the maximum depth from the children of @root_file
or the roots of the file system to display in
the file selector). A depth of 0 displays
-only the immediate children of @root_path,
+only the immediate children of @root_file,
or the roots of the filesystem. -1 for no
maximum depth.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="types">
-<parameter_description> a bitmask indicating the types of information
-that is desired about the files. This will
-determine what information is returned by
-_gtk_file_system_model_get_info().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
@@ -25849,55 +26946,55 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_ui">
<description>
-Changes the tab label for @child. If %NULL is specified
-for @tab_label, then the page will have the label 'page N'.
+Creates a &lt;link linkend="XML-UI"&gt;UI definition&lt;/link&gt; of the merged UI.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the page
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description> the tab label widget to use, or %NULL for default tab
-label.
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A newly allocated string containing an XML representation of
+the merged UI.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_backward_display_line_start">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_set_forward_page_func">
<description>
-Moves the given @iter backward to the next display line start.
-A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
-separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
-Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
-wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
-same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
-they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
-views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
+Sets the page forwarding function to be @page_func, this function will
+be used to determine what will be the next page when the user presses
+the forward button. Setting @page_func to %NULL will make the assistant
+to use the default forward function, which just goes to the next visible
+page.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="page_func">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAssistantPageFunc, or %NULL to use the default one
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> user data for @page_func
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> destroy notifier for @data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_selection_get_select_multiple">
@@ -25933,6 +27030,25 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_size_entry">
+<description>
+This returns the #GtkEntry used to allow the user to edit the font
+number manually instead of selecting it from the list of font sizes.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #GtkWidget.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_embed_delegate_iface_init">
<description>
An interface-initialization function for use in cases where an object is
@@ -25972,6 +27088,23 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_group_list_windows">
+<description>
+Returns: A newly-allocated list of windows inside the group.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindowGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly-allocated list of windows inside the group.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_get_menu">
<description>
Gets the #GtkMenu associated with #GtkMenuToolButton.
@@ -26083,20 +27216,20 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_new_with_model">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_default_direction">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with @child_model as the child model.
-
+Sets the default reading direction for widgets where the
+direction has not been explicitly set by gtk_widget_set_direction().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="child_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
+<parameter name="dir">
+<parameter_description> the new default direction. This cannot be
+%GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkTreeModel.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_path_prepend_index">
@@ -26118,57 +27251,64 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget">
+<function name="_gtk_widget_synthesize_crossing">
<description>
-Sets an application-supplied widget to use to display a custom preview
-of the currently selected file. To implement a preview, after setting the
-preview widget, you connect to the ::update-preview
-signal, and call gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_filename() or
-gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri() on each change. If you can
-display a preview of the new file, update your widget and
-set the preview active using gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active().
-Otherwise, set the preview inactive.
+Generate crossing event(s) on widget state (sensitivity) or GTK+ grab change.
-When there is no application-supplied preview widget, or the
-application-supplied preview widget is not active, the file chooser
-may display an internally generated preview of the current file or
-it may display no preview at all.
+The real pointer window is the window that most recently received an enter notify
+event. Windows that don't select for crossing events can't become the real
+poiner window. The real pointer widget that owns the real pointer window. The
+effective pointer window is the same as the real pointer window unless the real
+pointer widget is either insensitive or there is a grab on a widget that is not
+an ancestor of the real pointer widget (in which case the effective pointer
+window should be the root window).
-Since: 2.4
+When the effective pointer window is the same as the real poiner window, we
+receive crossing events from the windowing system. When the effective pointer
+window changes to become different from the real pointer window we synthesize
+crossing events, attempting to follow X protocol rules:
+
+When the root window becomes the effective pointer window:
+- leave notify on real pointer window, detail Ancestor
+- leave notify on all of its ancestors, detail Virtual
+- enter notify on root window, detail Inferior
+
+When the root window ceases to be the effective pointer window:
+- leave notify on root window, detail Inferior
+- enter notify on all ancestors of real pointer window, detail Virtual
+- enter notify on real pointer window, detail Ancestor
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="from">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget the virtual pointer is leaving.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="preview_widget">
-<parameter_description> widget for displaying preview.
+<parameter name="to">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget the virtual pointer is moving to.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mode">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkCrossingMode to place on the synthesized events.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_new_from_stock">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_free">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkButton containing the image and text from a stock item.
-Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK and
-#GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-
-If @stock_id is unknown, then it will be treated as a mnemonic
-label (as for gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic()).
-
+Frees a dynamically-allocated icon source, along with its
+filename, size, and pixbuf fields if those are not %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkButton
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_icon_cache_validate">
@@ -26193,26 +27333,20 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_compare">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_wrap_width">
<description>
-A qsort()-style function that returns negative if @lhs is less than
- rhs, positive if @lhs is greater than @rhs, and 0 if they're equal.
-Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer
-is less than the second character in the buffer.
-
+Returns: the wrap width.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="lhs">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="rhs">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> -1 if @lhs is less than @rhs, 1 if @lhs is greater, 0 if they are equal
+<return> the wrap width.
+
+Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -26299,14 +27433,13 @@
to be called when the window has its "final" size, i.e. after calling
gtk_widget_show_all() on the contents and gtk_window_set_geometry_hints()
on the window.
-
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+|[
#include &lt;gtk/gtk.h&gt;
static void
fill_with_content (GtkWidget *vbox)
{
-/&lt;!-- --&gt;* fill with content... *&lt;!-- --&gt;/
+/&ast; fill with content... &ast;/
}
int
@@ -26317,7 +27450,7 @@
100, 50, 0, 0, 100, 50, 10, 10, 0.0, 0.0, GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST
};
-gtk_init (&amp;argc, &amp;argv);
+gtk_init (&argc, &argv);
window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
vbox = gtk_vbox_new (FALSE, 0);
@@ -26328,7 +27461,7 @@
gtk_window_set_geometry_hints (GTK_WINDOW (window),
window,
-&amp;size_hints,
+&size_hints,
GDK_HINT_MIN_SIZE |
GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE |
GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC);
@@ -26336,7 +27469,7 @@
if (argc &gt; 1)
{
if (!gtk_window_parse_geometry (GTK_WINDOW (window), argv[1]))
-fprintf (stderr, "Failed to parse '&percnt;s'\n", argv[1]);
+fprintf (stderr, "Failed to parse '%s'\n", argv[1]);
}
gtk_widget_show_all (window);
@@ -26344,7 +27477,7 @@
return 0;
}
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
</description>
@@ -26420,18 +27553,22 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_previous_color">
+<function name="GtkStatusbar">
<description>
-Fills @color in with the original color value.
+Is emitted whenever a new message is popped off a statusbar's stack.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+<parameter name="statusbar">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the original color value.
+<parameter name="context_id">
+<parameter_description> the context id of the relevant message/statusbar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> the message that was just popped.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -26459,25 +27596,39 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_move_mark_onscreen">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags_by_name">
<description>
-Moves a mark within the buffer so that it's
-located within the currently-visible text area.
-
+Same as gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags(), but allows you
+to pass in tag names instead of tag objects.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mark">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextMark
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> position in @buffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> UTF-8 text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="len">
+<parameter_description> length of @text, or -1
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="first_tag_name">
+<parameter_description> name of a tag to apply to @text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> more tag names
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the mark moved (wasn't already onscreen)
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify">
@@ -26496,22 +27647,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_icon_set">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active">
<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_icon_set() for details.
+Sets whether the preview widget set by
+gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget() should be shown for the
+current filename. When @active is set to false, the file chooser
+may display an internally generated preview of the current file
+or it may display no preview at all. See
+gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget() for more details.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a stock icon size
+<parameter name="active">
+<parameter_description> whether to display the user-specified preview widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -26537,31 +27691,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_model">
<description>
-Sets the area of the widget, where the contents of this tooltip apply,
-to be @rect (in widget coordinates). This is especially useful for
-properly setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView rows and cells, #GtkIconViews,
-etc.
-
-For setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView, please refer to the convenience
-functions for this: gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row() and
-gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_cell().
-
-Since: 2.12
+Return value: A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="rect">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_paper_size">
@@ -26586,31 +27730,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_system_set_bookmark_label">
-<description>
-Sets the label to display for a bookmark.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_system">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> path of the bookmark
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the label for the bookmark, or %NULL to display
-the path itself
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_snap_to_ticks">
<description>
Sets the policy as to whether values are corrected to the nearest step
@@ -26782,20 +27901,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_buffer">
+<function name="gtk_print_job_get_title">
<description>
-Gets the text buffer used by the layout. See
-gtk_text_layout_set_buffer().
+Gets the job title.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+<parameter name="job">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text buffer used by the layout.
+<return> the title of @job
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -26812,62 +27932,44 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_new_with_stock_from_widget">
+<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_embed_set_delegate">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRadioToolButton adding it to the same group as @group.
-The new #GtkRadioToolButton will contain an icon and label from the
-stock item indicated by @stock_id.
-
+Establishes that calls on @receiver for #GtkFileChooser methods should be
+delegated to @delegate, and that #GtkFileChooser signals emitted on @delegate
+should be forwarded to @receiver. Must be used in conjunction with
+_gtk_file_chooser_embed_delegate_iface_init().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> An existing #GtkRadioToolButton.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of a stock item
+<parameter name="receiver">
+<parameter_description> a GOobject implementing #GtkFileChooserEmbed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkRadioToolButton
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_get_current_event_state">
-<description>
-If there is a current event and it has a state field, place
-that state field in @state and return %TRUE, otherwise return
-%FALSE.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="state">
-<parameter_description> a location to store the state of the current event
+<parameter name="delegate">
+<parameter_description> another GObject implementing #GtkFileChooserEmbed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if there was a current event and it had a state field
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_fixed_get_has_window">
+<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_get_file_part">
<description>
-Gets whether the #GtkFixed has its own #GdkWindow.
-See gdk_fixed_set_has_window().
+Gets the non-folder portion of whatever the user has entered
+into the file selector. What is returned is a UTF-8 string,
+and if a filename path is needed, g_file_get_child_for_display_name()
+must be used
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fixed">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="chooser_entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @fixed has its own window.
+<return> the entered filename - this value is owned by the
+chooser entry and must not be modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -26889,41 +27991,22 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_compare">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_child_anchor">
<description>
-Compares two printers.
-
+Obtains the location of @anchor within @buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="a">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="b">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> 0 if the printer match, a negative value if @a &lt; @b,
-or a positive value if @a &gt; @b
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_set_orientation">
-<description>
-Sets whether a toolbar should appear horizontally or vertically.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator to be initialized
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> a new #GtkOrientation.
+<parameter name="anchor">
+<parameter_description> a child anchor that appears in @buffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -26942,19 +28025,22 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_socket_remove_grabbed_key">
+<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_popup">
<description>
- socket: a #GtkSocket
- keyval: a key
- modifiers: modifiers for the key
+Retrieves the popup of the #GtkScaleButton.
-Called from the GtkSocket backend when the corresponding plug has
-told the socket to remove a key grab.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the popup of the #GtkScaleButton
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_create_row_drag_icon">
@@ -27100,6 +28186,27 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name">
+<description>
+Sets the currently selected font.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fontname">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a string
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the font selected in @fsd is now the
+ fontname specified. %FALSE otherwise.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_paper_size_is_custom">
<description>
Return value: whether @size is a custom paper size.
@@ -27154,7 +28261,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>value: the default row spacing
+<return> the default row spacing
</return>
</function>
@@ -27177,23 +28284,21 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_active_iter">
<description>
-Calling this function signals to the toolbar that the
-overflow menu item for @tool_item has changed. If the
-overflow menu is visible when this function it called,
-the menu will be rebuilt.
-
-The function must be called when the tool item
-changes what it will do in response to the "create_menu_proxy"
-signal.
+Sets the current active item to be the one referenced by @iter.
+ iter must correspond to a path of depth one.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27245,19 +28350,30 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_equal_func">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_text">
<description>
-Return value: the currently used compare function for the search code.
+Inserts an action in @completion's action item list at position @index_
+with text @text. If you want the action item to have markup, use
+gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_markup().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="index_">
+<parameter_description> The index of the item to insert.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> Text of the item to insert.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the currently used compare function for the search code.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_move_visually">
@@ -27305,6 +28421,8 @@
#GtkBox:fill and #GtkBox:padding, are given their default
values, %TRUE, %TRUE, and 0, respectively.
+Deprecated: 2.14: Use gtk_box_pack_end()
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="box">
@@ -27319,23 +28437,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_statusbar_pop">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_foreach">
<description>
-Removes the first message in the #GtkStatusBar's stack
-with the given context id.
+Calls @func for each key-value pair of @settings.
-Note that this may not change the displayed message, if
-the message at the top of the stack has a different
-context id.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="statusbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusBar
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="context_id">
-<parameter_description> a context identifier
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> the function to call
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data for @func
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27394,23 +28513,29 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_set_show_folders">
+<function name="gtk_target_table_new_from_list">
<description>
-Sets whether folders should be included in the #GtkTreeModel for
-display.
+This function creates an #GtkTargetEntry array that contains the
+same targets as the passed %list. The returned table is newly
+allocated and should be freed using gtk_target_table_free() when no
+longer needed.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_folders">
-<parameter_description> whether folders should be displayed
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> return location for the number ot targets in the table
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new table.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_default_size">
@@ -27439,45 +28564,18 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_complete">
<description>
-Adds a child at fixed coordinates in one of the text widget's
-windows. The window must have nonzero size (see
-gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()). Note that the child
-coordinates are given relative to the #GdkWindow in question, and
-that these coordinates have no sane relationship to scrolling. When
-placing a child in #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET, scrolling is
-irrelevant, the child floats above all scrollable areas. But when
-placing a child in one of the scrollable windows (border windows or
-text window), you'll need to compute the child's correct position
-in buffer coordinates any time scrolling occurs or buffer changes
-occur, and then call gtk_text_view_move_child() to update the
-child's position. Unfortunately there's no good way to detect that
-scrolling has occurred, using the current API; a possible hack
-would be to update all child positions when the scroll adjustments
-change or the text buffer changes. See bug 64518 on
-bugzilla.gnome.org for status of fixing this issue.
+Requests a completion operation, or in other words a refiltering of the
+current list with completions, using the current key. The completion list
+view will be updated accordingly.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="which_window">
-<parameter_description> which window the child should appear in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xpos">
-<parameter_description> X position of child in window coordinates
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="ypos">
-<parameter_description> Y position of child in window coordinates
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27523,7 +28621,7 @@
<description>
Creates the menu items from the @entries.
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -27592,23 +28690,26 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new">
+<function name="gtk_widget_unparent">
<description>
-Creates a new ui manager object.
-
+This function is only for use in widget implementations.
+Should be called by implementations of the remove method
+on #GtkContainer, to dissociate a child from the container.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new ui manager object.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_dest">
<description>
-Turns @tree_view into a drop destination for automatic DND.
+Turns @tree_view into a drop destination for automatic DND. Calling
+this method sets reorderable to %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -27742,32 +28843,41 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_iter_to_iter">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_opacity_control">
<description>
-Sets @filter_iter to point to the row in @filter that corresponds to the
-row pointed at by @child_iter. If @filter_iter was not set, %FALSE is
-returned.
+Sets the @colorsel to use or not use opacity.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter_iter">
-<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="has_opacity">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if @colorsel can set the opacity, %FALSE otherwise.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row on the child model.
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_selection_iter_is_selected">
+<description>
+Return value: %TRUE, if @iter is selected
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @filter_iter was set, i.e. if @child_iter is a
-valid iterator pointing to a visible row in child model.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> %TRUE, if @iter is selected
</return>
</function>
@@ -27920,7 +29030,7 @@
gtk_item_factory_popup_with_data(). This data is available until the menu
is popped down again.
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28014,26 +29124,52 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_paper_size">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_stock">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT,
-%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_WIDTH and
-%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT.
+Inserts a stock item at the specified position of the toolbar. If
+ stock_id is not a known stock item ID, it's inserted verbatim,
+except that underscores used to mark mnemonics are removed.
+
+ callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
+arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="paper_size">
-<parameter_description> a paper size
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> The id of the stock item you want to insert
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_text">
+<parameter_description> The text in the tooltip of the toolbar button
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
+<parameter_description> The private text of the tooltip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> The callback called when the toolbar button is clicked.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data passed to callback
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> The position the button shall be inserted at.
+-1 means at the end.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the inserted widget
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default">
@@ -28050,15 +29186,23 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accelerator_get_default_mod_mask">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_use_underline">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_accelerator_set_default_mod_mask().
+If true, an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
+used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default accelerator modifier mask
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="GtkRecentManager">
@@ -28078,20 +29222,23 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ruler_get_metric">
+<function name="_gtk_recent_chooser_install_properties">
<description>
-Gets the units used for a #GtkRuler. See gtk_ruler_set_metric().
-
+Installs the necessary properties for a class implementing
+#GtkRecentChooser. A #GtkParamSpecOverride property is installed
+for each property, using the values from the #GtkRecentChooserProp
+enumeration. The caller must make sure itself that the enumeration
+values don't collide with some other property values they
+are using.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ruler">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRuler
+<parameter name="klass">
+<parameter_description> the class structure for a type deriving from #GObject
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the units currently used for @ruler
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_set_get_sizes">
@@ -28118,45 +29265,34 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_orientation">
+<function name="gtk_editable_cut_clipboard">
<description>
-Gets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
-
+Removes the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
+puts it on the clipboard.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page orientation
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_uri">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_font">
<description>
-Gets the URI for the currently selected file in
-the file selector. If multiple files are selected,
-one of the filenames will be returned at random.
-
-If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
-folder.
-
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The currently selected URI, or %NULL
-if no file is selected. Free with g_free()
+<return> A #GdkFont.
-Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_font_selection_get_font_name() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -28226,7 +29362,7 @@
Draws a radio button indicator in the given rectangle on @window with
the given parameters.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_option() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_option() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28266,27 +29402,56 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_detachable">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_current_uri">
<description>
-Return Value: TRUE if the tab is detachable.
+Gets the URI currently selected by @chooser.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a child #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> TRUE if the tab is detachable.
+<return> a newly allocated string holding a URI.
Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget">
+<description>
+Sets an application-supplied widget to use to display a custom preview
+of the currently selected file. To implement a preview, after setting the
+preview widget, you connect to the ::update-preview
+signal, and call gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_filename() or
+gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri() on each change. If you can
+display a preview of the new file, update your widget and
+set the preview active using gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active().
+Otherwise, set the preview inactive.
+
+When there is no application-supplied preview widget, or the
+application-supplied preview widget is not active, the file chooser
+may display an internally generated preview of the current file or
+it may display no preview at all.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="preview_widget">
+<parameter_description> widget for displaying preview.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_row_span_column">
<description>
Sets the column with row span information for @combo_box to be @row_span.
@@ -28309,10 +29474,22 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_source_set_icon_stock">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_redraw_on_allocate">
<description>
-Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
-to a stock icon.
+Sets whether the entire widget is queued for drawing when its size
+allocation changes. By default, this setting is %TRUE and
+the entire widget is redrawn on every size change. If your widget
+leaves the upper left unchanged when made bigger, turning this
+setting off will improve performance.
+
+Note that for %NO_WINDOW widgets setting this flag to %FALSE turns
+off all allocation on resizing: the widget will not even redraw if
+its position changes; this is to allow containers that don't draw
+anything to avoid excess invalidations. If you set this flag on a
+%NO_WINDOW widget that &lt;emphasis&gt;does&lt;/emphasis&gt; draw on @widget-&gt;window,
+you are responsible for invalidating both the old and new allocation
+of the widget when the widget is moved and responsible for invalidating
+regions newly when the widget increases size.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28320,8 +29497,10 @@
<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the ID of the stock icon to use
+<parameter name="redraw_on_allocate">
+<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the entire widget will be redrawn
+when it is allocated to a new size. Otherwise, only the
+new portion of the widget will be redrawn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -28399,47 +29578,80 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_path_to_path">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char">
<description>
-Converts @child_path to a path relative to @filter. That is, @child_path
-points to a path in the child model. The rerturned path will point to the
-same row in the filtered model. If @child_path isn't a valid path on the
-child model or points to a row which is not visible in @filter, then %NULL
-is returned.
+Advances @iter, calling @pred on each character. If
+ pred returns %TRUE, returns %TRUE and stops scanning.
+If @pred never returns %TRUE, @iter is set to @limit if
+ limit is non-%NULL, otherwise to the end iterator.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert.
+<parameter name="pred">
+<parameter_description> a function to be called on each character
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data for @pred
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="limit">
+<parameter_description> search limit, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> whether a match was found
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_new_with_model">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_item">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkIconView widget with the model @model.
+Inserts a new item into the toolbar. You must specify the position
+in the toolbar where it will be inserted.
+
+ callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
+arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> The model.
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> give your toolbar button a label.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_text">
+<parameter_description> a string that appears when the user holds the mouse over this item.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
+<parameter_description> use with #GtkTipsQuery.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to any data you wish to be passed to the callback.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkIconView widget.
+<return> the new toolbar item as a #GtkWidget.
-Since: 2.6
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -28460,29 +29672,27 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_parse_color">
+<function name="gtk_button_set_image">
<description>
-Parses a color in the &lt;link linkend="color=format"&gt;format&lt;/link&gt; expected
-in a RC file.
-
-Note that theme engines should use gtk_rc_parse_color_full() in
-order to support symbolic colors.
+Set the image of @button to the given widget. Note that
+it depends on the #GtkSettings:gtk-button-images setting whether the
+image will be displayed or not, you don't have to call
+gtk_widget_show() on @image yourself.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scanner">
-<parameter_description> a #GScanner
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkColor structure in which to store the result
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a widget to set as the image for the button
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %G_TOKEN_NONE if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token
-that was expected but not found
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_cursor_visible">
@@ -28501,22 +29711,18 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_copy_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_rc_reparse_all">
<description>
-Copies the currently-selected text to a clipboard.
+If the modification time on any previously read file for the
+default #GtkSettings has changed, discard all style information
+and then reread all previously read RC files.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkClipboard object to copy to
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the files were reread.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action">
@@ -28588,19 +29794,37 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_update_policy">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_face">
<description>
-Sets the update behavior of a spin button. This determines whether the
-spin button is always updated or only when a valid value is set.
+Gets the #PangoFontFace representing the selected font group
+details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="policy">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButtonUpdatePolicy value
+</parameters>
+<return> A #PangoFontFace representing the selected font group
+details
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_factory_remove_default">
+<description>
+Removes an icon factory from the list of default icon
+factories. Not normally used; you might use it for a library that
+can be unloaded or shut down.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="factory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory previously added with gtk_icon_factory_add_default()
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -28649,6 +29873,26 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_word_starts">
+<description>
+Calls gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start() up to @count times.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of times to move
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_pixbuf">
<description>
Gets the #GdkPixbuf being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
@@ -28717,42 +29961,44 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_stock_item_copy">
+<function name="gtk_toggle_action_get_draw_as_radio">
<description>
-Copies a stock item, mostly useful for language bindings and not in applications.
-
+Returns: whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStockItem
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStockItem
+<return> whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_margin">
+<function name="gtk_expander_get_label">
<description>
-Sets the ::margin property which specifies the space
-which is inserted at the top, bottom, left and right
-of the icon view.
+Fetches the text from a label widget including any embedded
+underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup, as set by
+gtk_expander_set_label(). If the label text has not been set the
+return value will be %NULL. This will be the case if you create an
+empty button with gtk_button_new() to use as a container.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="margin">
-<parameter_description> the margin
+<parameter name="expander">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The text of the label widget. This string is owned
+by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_set_default_files">
@@ -28809,40 +30055,42 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_next">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_buffer">
<description>
-Moves the @path to point to the next node at the current depth.
+Return value: the buffer
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the buffer
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_accel_path">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_page_ranges">
<description>
-Sets the accel path for this action. All proxy widgets associated
-with the action will have this accel path, so that their
-accelerators are consistent.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_RANGES.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator path
+<parameter name="num_ranges">
+<parameter_description> return location for the length of the returned array
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> an array of #GtkPageRange&lt;!-- --&gt;s. Use g_free()
+to free the array when it is no longer needed.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_accel_map_save">
@@ -28880,24 +30128,26 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_factory_add_default">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_bottom_margin">
<description>
-Adds an icon factory to the list of icon factories searched by
-gtk_style_lookup_icon_set(). This means that, for example,
-gtk_image_new_from_stock() will be able to find icons in @factory.
-There will normally be an icon factory added for each library or
-application that comes with icons. The default icon factories
-can be overridden by themes.
+Gets the default bottom margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="factory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the default bottom margin
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_label_get_label">
@@ -28980,25 +30230,34 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_get_hadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation">
<description>
-This function should only be called after the layout has been
-placed in a #GtkScrolledWindow or otherwise configured for
-scrolling. It returns the #GtkAdjustment used for communication
-between the horizontal scrollbar and @layout.
+Sets whether a file chooser in GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode will present
+a confirmation dialog if the user types a file name that already exists. This
+is %FALSE by default.
-See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
+Regardless of this setting, the @chooser will emit the "confirm-overwrite"
+signal when appropriate.
+
+If all you need is the stock confirmation dialog, set this property to %TRUE.
+You can override the way confirmation is done by actually handling the
+"confirm-overwrite" signal; please refer to its documentation for the
+details.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="do_overwrite_confirmation">
+<parameter_description> whether to confirm overwriting in save mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> horizontal scroll adjustment
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_print_pages">
@@ -29272,26 +30531,26 @@
Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
for the directory change.
-If you are implementing a &lt;guimenuitem&gt;File/Save As...&lt;/guimenuitem&gt; dialog, you
-should use this function if you already have a file name to which the user may save; for example,
-when the user opens an existing file and then does &lt;guimenuitem&gt;File/Save As...&lt;/guimenuitem&gt;
-on it. If you don't have a file name already &mdash; for example, if the user just created
-a new file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function. Instead, use
-something similar to this:
-
-&lt;programlisting&gt;
+If you are implementing a &lt;guimenuitem&gt;File/Save As...&lt;/guimenuitem&gt; dialog,
+you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
+user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
+does &lt;guimenuitem&gt;File/Save As...&lt;/guimenuitem&gt; on it. If you don't have
+a file name already &mdash; for example, if the user just created a new
+file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
+Instead, use something similar to this:
+|[
if (document_is_new)
{
-/&lt;!-- --&gt;* the user just created a new document *&lt;!-- --&gt;/
+/&ast; the user just created a new document &ast;/
gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder (chooser, default_folder_for_saving);
gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
}
else
{
-/&lt;!-- --&gt;* the user edited an existing document *&lt;!-- --&gt;/
+/&ast; the user edited an existing document &ast;/
gtk_file_chooser_set_filename (chooser, existing_filename);
}
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;
+]|
</description>
@@ -29375,15 +30634,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_socket_new">
+<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_plus_button">
<description>
-Create a new empty #GtkSocket.
+Retrieves the plus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkSocket.
+<return> the plus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -29433,27 +30698,23 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_justify">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_has_tag">
<description>
-Sets the alignment of the lines in the text of the label relative to
-each other. %GTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT is the default value when the
-widget is first created with gtk_label_new(). If you instead want
-to set the alignment of the label as a whole, use
-gtk_misc_set_alignment() instead. gtk_label_set_justify() has no
-effect on labels containing only a single line.
+Return value: whether @iter is tagged with @tag
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="jtype">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkJustification
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether @iter is tagged with @tag
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_double">
@@ -29480,42 +30741,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions_full">
+<function name="gtk_plug_construct_for_display">
<description>
-This variant of gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions() adds a
-#GDestroyNotify callback for @user_data.
+Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
+ socket_id which is currently displayed on @display.
+This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from #GtkPlug.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the number of entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
-no action should be activated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="on_change">
-<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
+<parameter name="plug">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay associated with @socket_id's
+#GtkSocket.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> destroy notification callback for @user_data
+<parameter name="socket_id">
+<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -29541,19 +30787,26 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_valid">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_fixed_size">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path.
+Sets the renderer size to be explicit, independent of the properties set.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="reference">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the cell renderer, or -1
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the cell renderer, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_cursor_positions">
@@ -29606,7 +30859,10 @@
that differ slightly from their nominal sizes, and in addition GTK+
will avoid scaling icons that it considers sufficiently close to the
requested size or for which the source image would have to be scaled
-up too far. (This maintains sharpness.)
+up too far. (This maintains sharpness.). This behaviour can be changed
+by passing the %GTK_ICON_LOOKUP_FORCE_SIZE flag when obtaining
+the #GtkIconInfo. If this flag has been specified, the pixbuf
+returned by this function will be scaled to the exact size.
</description>
@@ -29675,10 +30931,10 @@
To do this, you can use gtk_tree_row_reference_new().
To free the return value, use:
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+|[
g_list_foreach (list, gtk_tree_path_free, NULL);
g_list_free (list);
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
</description>
@@ -29767,6 +31023,25 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_filename">
+<description>
+Retrieves the source filename, or %NULL if none is set. The
+filename is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
+persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> image filename. This string must not be modified
+or freed.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_accel_group_disconnect">
<description>
Removes an accelerator previously installed through
@@ -29787,43 +31062,45 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paned_get_child1">
+<function name="gtk_socket_get_plug_window">
<description>
-Obtains the first child of the paned widget.
+Retrieves the window of the plug. Use this to check if the plug has
+been created inside of the socket.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="paned">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaned widget
+<parameter name="socket_">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> first child, or %NULL if it is not set.
+<return> the window of the plug if available, or %NULL
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_max_width">
+<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_display_name">
<description>
-Sets the maximum width of the @tree_column. If @max_width is -1, then the
-maximum width is unset. Note, the column can actually be wider than max
-width if it's the last column in a view. In this case, the column expands to
-fill any extra space.
+Gets the display name for an icon. A display name is a
+string to be used in place of the icon name in a user
+visible context like a list of icons.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_width">
-<parameter_description> The maximum width of the column in pixels, or -1.
+<parameter name="icon_info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the display name for the icon or %NULL, if
+the icon doesn't have a specified display name. This value
+is owned @icon_info and must not be modified or free.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_child_anchor_get_deleted">
@@ -29962,48 +31239,56 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_remove_item">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_default">
<description>
-Removes a resource pointed by @uri from the recently used resources
-list handled by a recent manager.
+Gets the icon theme for the default screen. See
+gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> the URI of the item you wish to remove
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for a #GError, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the item pointed by @uri has been successfully
-removed by the recently used resources list, and %FALSE otherwise.
+<return> A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
+the default screen. This icon theme is associated with
+the screen and can be used as long as the screen
+is open. Do not ref or unref it.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_load_scanner">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_set_preview_text">
<description>
-#GScanner variant of gtk_accel_map_load().
+The @text is used to show how the selected font looks.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scanner">
-<parameter_description> a #GScanner which has already been provided with an input file
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a string
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_separator_tool_item_new">
+<description>
+Create a new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_drag_dest_row">
<description>
Gets information about the row that is highlighted for feedback.
@@ -30048,23 +31333,21 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_context">
+<function name="gtk_im_context_focus_out">
<description>
-Creates a new #PangoContext that can be used with the
-#GtkPrintContext.
-
+Notify the input method that the widget to which this
+input context corresponds has lost focus. The input method
+may, for example, change the displayed feedback or reset the contexts
+state to reflect this change.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new Pango context for @context
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_local_only">
@@ -30132,6 +31415,42 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_activate">
+<description>
+Finds the first accelerator in @accel_group
+that matches @accel_key and @accel_mods, and
+activates it.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_quark">
+<parameter_description> the quark for the accelerator name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="acceleratable">
+<parameter_description> the #GObject, usually a #GtkWindow, on which
+to activate the accelerator.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> accelerator keyval from a key event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> keyboard state mask from a key event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the accelerator was handled, %FALSE otherwise
+ %TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_pixbuf_formats">
<description>
Adds a rule allowing image files in the formats supported
@@ -30172,42 +31491,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_append_page_menu">
-<description>
-Appends a page to @notebook, specifying the widget to use as the
-label in the popup menu.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="menu_label">
-<parameter_description> the widget to use as a label for the page-switch
-menu, if that is enabled. If %NULL, and @tab_label
-is a #GtkLabel or %NULL, then the menu label will be
-a newly created label with the same text as @tab_label;
-If @tab_label is not a #GtkLabel, @menu_label must be
-specified if the page-switch menu is to be used.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting from 0) of the appended
-page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_printer_get_name">
<description>
Return value: the name of @printer
@@ -30285,72 +31568,40 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_retrieve_proxy_menu_item">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_owner">
<description>
-Return value: The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
-overflow menu for @tool_item.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
+If the clipboard contents callbacks were set with
+gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner(), and the gtk_clipboard_set_with_data() or
+gtk_clipboard_clear() has not subsequently called, returns the owner set
+by gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner().
-<function name="gtk_ruler_get_range">
-<description>
-Retrieves values indicating the range and current position of a #GtkRuler.
-See gtk_ruler_set_range().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ruler">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRuler
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="lower">
-<parameter_description> location to store lower limit of the ruler, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="upper">
-<parameter_description> location to store upper limit of the ruler, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> location to store the current position of the mark on the ruler, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_size">
-<parameter_description> location to store the maximum size of the ruler used when calculating
-the space to leave for the text, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the owner of the clipboard, if any; otherwise %NULL.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_is_focus">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_display_name">
<description>
-Determines if the widget is the focus widget within its
-toplevel. (This does not mean that the %HAS_FOCUS flag is
-necessarily set; %HAS_FOCUS will only be set if the
-toplevel widget additionally has the global input focus.)
+Gets the human-readable name of the #GtkPaperSize.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the widget is the focus widget.
+<return> the human-readable name of @size
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -30418,36 +31669,31 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_set_forward_page_func">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_backward_display_line_start">
<description>
-Sets the page forwarding function to be @page_func, this function will
-be used to determine what will be the next page when the user presses
-the forward button. Setting @page_func to %NULL will make the assistant
-to use the default forward function, which just goes to the next visible
-page.
+Moves the given @iter backward to the next display line start.
+A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
+separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
+Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
+wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
+same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
+they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_func">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAssistantPageFunc, or %NULL to use the default one
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> user data for @page_func
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> destroy notifier for @data
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_group_get_name">
@@ -30502,7 +31748,7 @@
</parameters>
<return> the widget that was referenced
-Deprecated:2.12: Use g_object_ref() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use g_object_ref() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -30676,11 +31922,11 @@
Adds a new resource, pointed by @uri, into the recently used
resources list.
-This function automatically retrieving some of the needed
+This function automatically retrieves some of the needed
metadata and setting other metadata to common default values; it
then feeds the data to gtk_recent_manager_add_full().
-See gtk_recent_manager_add_full() if you want to explicitely
+See gtk_recent_manager_add_full() if you want to explicitly
define the metadata for the resource pointed by @uri.
@@ -30992,7 +32238,7 @@
be %NULL.
@callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use the GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC() to cast the function to #GtkSignalFunc.
+arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
</description>
@@ -31035,9 +32281,27 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the new toolbar element as a #GtkWidget.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all">
+<description>
+Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_valist">
<description>
See gtk_tree_model_get(), this version takes a &lt;type&gt;va_list&lt;/type&gt;
@@ -31105,26 +32369,31 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_line_yrange">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_lock_path">
<description>
-Find the range of y coordinates for the paragraph containing
-the given iter.
+Locks the given accelerator path. If the accelerator map doesn't yet contain
+an entry for @accel_path, a new one is created.
+
+Locking an accelerator path prevents its accelerator from being changed
+during runtime. A locked accelerator path can be unlocked by
+gtk_accel_map_unlock_path(). Refer to gtk_accel_map_change_entry()
+for information about runtime accelerator changes.
+
+If called more than once, @accel_path remains locked until
+gtk_accel_map_unlock_path() has been called an equivalent number
+of times.
+
+Note that locking of individual accelerator paths is independent from
+locking the #GtkAccelGroup containing them. For runtime accelerator
+changes to be possible both the accelerator path and its #GtkAccelGroup
+have to be unlocked.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> location to store the top of the paragraph in pixels,
-or %NULL.
- height location to store the height of the paragraph in pixels,
-or %NULL.
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -31158,30 +32427,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_get_object">
-<description>
-Gets the object named @name. Note that this function does not
-increment the reference count of the returned object.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> name of object to get
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the object named @name or %NULL if it could not be
-found in the object tree.
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_stock">
<description>
Gets the id of the stock icon being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
@@ -31205,45 +32450,76 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_scroll_to_path">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_paper_sizes">
<description>
-Moves the alignments of @icon_view to the position specified by @path.
- row_align determines where the row is placed, and @col_align determines
-where @column is placed. Both are expected to be between 0.0 and 1.0.
-0.0 means left/top alignment, 1.0 means right/bottom alignment, 0.5 means
-center.
+Creates a list of known paper sizes.
-If @use_align is %FALSE, then the alignment arguments are ignored, and the
-tree does the minimum amount of work to scroll the item onto the screen.
-This means that the item will be scrolled to the edge closest to its current
-position. If the item is currently visible on the screen, nothing is done.
-This function only works if the model is set, and @path is a valid row on
-the model. If the model changes before the @icon_view is realized, the
-centered path will be modified to reflect this change.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="include_custom">
+<parameter_description> whether to include custom paper sizes
+as defined in the page setup dialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly allocated list of newly
+allocated #GtkPaperSize objects
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_use_underline">
+<description>
+If set, an underline in the label property indicates that the next character
+should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key in the overflow menu. For
+example, if the label property is "_Open" and @use_underline is %TRUE,
+the label on the tool button will be "Open" and the item on the overflow
+menu will have an underlined 'O'.
+
+Labels shown on tool buttons never have mnemonics on them; this property
+only affects the menu item on the overflow menu.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The path of the item to move to.
+<parameter name="use_underline">
+<parameter_description> whether the button label has the form "_Open"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_align">
-<parameter_description> whether to use alignment arguments, or %FALSE.
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_items">
+<description>
+Creates the menu items from the @entries.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="row_align">
-<parameter_description> The vertical alignment of the item specified by @path.
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> the length of @entries
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="col_align">
-<parameter_description> The horizontal alignment of the item specified by @path.
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry&lt;!-- --&gt;s whose @callback members
+must by of type #GtkItemFactoryCallback1
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback_data">
+<parameter_description> data passed to the callback functions of all entries
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -31333,8 +32609,8 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated list of property names and #GValue*,
-starting with @first_prop_name
+<parameter_description> return location for the first property, followed
+optionally by more name/return location pairs, followed by %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -31518,7 +32794,7 @@
return value if you like. Marks are owned by the buffer and go
away when the buffer does.
-Emits the "mark_set" signal as notification of the mark's initial
+Emits the "mark-set" signal as notification of the mark's initial
placement.
@@ -31573,6 +32849,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_number_up_layout">
+<description>
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> layout of page in number-up mode
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_get_inconsistent">
<description>
Retrieves the value set by gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent().
@@ -31604,6 +32898,34 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_iconify">
+<description>
+Asks to iconify (i.e. minimize) the specified @window. Note that
+you shouldn't assume the window is definitely iconified afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or &lt;link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;) could deiconify it
+again, or there may not be a window manager in which case
+iconification isn't possible, etc. But normally the window will end
+up iconified. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
+
+It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
+in which case the window will be iconified before it ever appears
+onscreen.
+
+You can track iconification via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_reverse">
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_REVERSE.
@@ -31622,6 +32944,28 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_paper_size">
+<description>
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT,
+%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_WIDTH and
+%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="paper_size">
+<parameter_description> a paper size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_buffer">
<description>
Sets @buffer as the buffer being displayed by @text_view. The previous
@@ -31779,6 +33123,23 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_location">
+<description>
+Return value: the location of @printer
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the location of @printer
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_class_install_style_property">
<description>
Installs a style property on a widget class. The parser for the
@@ -31850,7 +33211,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_model_row_inserted">
<description>
-Emits the "row_inserted" signal on @tree_model
+Emits the "row-inserted" signal on @tree_model
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -31923,7 +33284,7 @@
be %NULL.
@callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use the GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC() to cast the function to #GtkSignalFunc.
+arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
</description>
@@ -31966,23 +33327,25 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the new toolbar element as a #GtkWidget.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_default_direction">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_new_with_model">
<description>
-Sets the default reading direction for widgets where the
-direction has not been explicitly set by gtk_widget_set_direction().
+Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with @child_model as the child model.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dir">
-<parameter_description> the new default direction. This cannot be
-%GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE.
+<parameter name="child_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new #GtkTreeModel.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_manual_capabilities">
@@ -32115,25 +33478,20 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_drag_source_row_draggable">
+<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_select_function">
<description>
-Asks the #GtkTreeDragSource whether a particular row can be used as
-the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn't implement
-this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
-
+Return value: The function.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="drag_source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeDragSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> row on which user is initiating a drag
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the row can be dragged
+<return> The function.
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -32218,8 +33576,8 @@
<function name="gtk_volume_button_new">
<description>
-Creates a #GtkVolumeButton, with a range between 0 and 100, with
-a stepping of 2. Volume values can be obtained and modified using
+Creates a #GtkVolumeButton, with a range between 0.0 and 1.0, with
+a stepping of 0.02. Volume values can be obtained and modified using
the functions from #GtkScaleButton.
@@ -32260,19 +33618,21 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the label displayed in menu items and on buttons
+<parameter_description> the label displayed in menu items and on buttons, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> a tooltip for the action
+<parameter_description> a tooltip for the action, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the stock icon to display in widgets representing the action
+<parameter_description> the stock icon to display in widgets representing the
+action, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager, or %NULL for using the default
+#GtkRecentManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -32322,6 +33682,29 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_has_group">
+<description>
+Checks whether @group_name appears inside the groups registered for the
+recently used item @info.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> name of a group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the group was found.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_to_file">
<description>
This function saves the print settings from @settings to @file_name.
@@ -32348,6 +33731,44 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_builder_add_objects_from_file">
+<description>
+Parses a file containing a &lt;link linkend="BUILDER-UI"&gt;GtkBuilder
+UI definition&lt;/link&gt; building only the requested objects and merges
+them with the current contents of @builder.
+
+&lt;note&gt;&lt;para&gt;
+If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
+its child (for instance a #GtkTreeView that depends on its
+#GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitely list all of them in @object_ids.
+&lt;/para&gt;&lt;/note&gt;
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> the name of the file to parse
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="object_ids">
+<parameter_description> nul-terminated array of objects to build
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_get_accessible">
<description>
Returns: the #AtkObject associated with @widget
@@ -32457,30 +33878,32 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_move_child">
+<function name="gtk_accel_groups_activate">
<description>
-Updates the position of a child, as for gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window().
+Finds the first accelerator in any #GtkAccelGroup attached
+to @object that matches @accel_key and @accel_mods, and
+activates that accelerator.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> child widget already added to the text view
+<parameter name="object">
+<parameter_description> the #GObject, usually a #GtkWindow, on which
+to activate the accelerator.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="xpos">
-<parameter_description> new X position in window coordinates
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> accelerator keyval from a key event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ypos">
-<parameter_description> new Y position in window coordinates
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> keyboard state mask from a key event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the accelerator was handled, %FALSE otherwise
+ %TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_orientation">
@@ -32538,40 +33961,58 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_show_about_dialog">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_key_file">
<description>
-This is a convenience function for showing an application's about box.
-The constructed dialog is associated with the parent window and
-reused for future invocations of this function.
+Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
+ key_file
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_property_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the first property
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties, %NULL-terminated
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
+to use the default name "Page Setup"
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_compare">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem with an empty label.
+A qsort()-style function that returns negative if @lhs is less than
+ rhs, positive if @lhs is greater than @rhs, and 0 if they're equal.
+Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer
+is less than the second character in the buffer.
+
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="lhs">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="rhs">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
+<return> -1 if @lhs is less than @rhs, 1 if @lhs is greater, 0 if they are equal
</return>
</function>
@@ -32619,6 +34060,35 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_line_offset">
+<description>
+Obtains an iterator pointing to @char_offset within the given
+line. The @char_offset must exist, offsets off the end of the line
+are not allowed. Note &lt;emphasis&gt;characters&lt;/emphasis&gt;, not bytes;
+UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="line_number">
+<parameter_description> line number counting from 0
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="char_offset">
+<parameter_description> char offset from start of line
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_radio">
<description>
Return value: %TRUE if we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes
@@ -32655,80 +34125,54 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_point">
+<function name="gtk_widget_remove_accelerator">
<description>
-Scrolls the tree view such that the top-left corner of the visible
-area is @tree_x, @tree_y, where @tree_x and @tree_y are specified
-in tree coordinates. The @tree_view must be realized before
-this function is called. If it isn't, you probably want to be
-using gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_cell().
-
-If either @tree_x or @tree_y are -1, then that direction isn't scrolled.
+Removes an accelerator from @widget, previously installed with
+gtk_widget_add_accelerator().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> widget to install an accelerator on
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_x">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> accel group for this widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_y">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> GDK keyval of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier key combination of the accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_init_with_args">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_menu_label">
<description>
-This function does the same work as gtk_init_check().
-Additionally, it allows you to add your own commandline options,
-and it automatically generates nicely formatted
-&lt;option&gt;--help&lt;/option&gt; output. Note that your program will
-be terminated after writing out the help output.
-
+Changes the menu label for the page containing @child.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to the number of command line arguments.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to the array of command line arguments.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parameter_string">
-<parameter_description> a string which is displayed in
-the first line of &lt;option&gt;--help&lt;/option&gt; output, after
-&lt;literal&gt;&lt;replaceable&gt;programname&lt;/replaceable&gt; [OPTION...]&lt;/literal&gt;
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of #GOptionEntry&lt;!-- --&gt;s
-describing the options of your program
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="translation_domain">
-<parameter_description> a translation domain to use for translating
-the &lt;option&gt;--help&lt;/option&gt; output for the options in @entries
-with gettext(), or %NULL
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the child widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> a return location for errors
+<parameter name="menu_label">
+<parameter_description> the menu label, or NULL for default
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
-%FALSE otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_insert_before">
@@ -32805,7 +34249,7 @@
<function name="_gtk_clipboard_handle_event">
<description>
-Emits the #GtkClipboard::owner-change signal on the appropriate @clipboard.
+Emits the ::owner-change signal on the appropriate @clipboard.
Since: 2.6
@@ -32821,7 +34265,7 @@
<function name="gtk_scale_button_set_adjustment">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkAdjustment to be used as a model
+Sets the #GtkAdjustment to be used as a model
for the #GtkScaleButton's scale.
See gtk_range_set_adjustment() for details.
@@ -32841,34 +34285,49 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_attach">
+<function name="gtk_binding_set_activate">
<description>
-Attaches a style to a window; this process allocates the
-colors and creates the GC's for the style - it specializes
-it to a particular visual and colormap. The process may
-involve the creation of a new style if the style has already
-been attached to a window with a different style and colormap.
-
-Since this function may return a new object, you have to use it
-in the following way:
-&lt;literal&gt;style = gtk_style_attach (style, window)&lt;/literal&gt;
+Find a key binding matching @keyval and @modifiers within
+ binding_set and activate the binding on @object.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
+<parameter name="binding_set">
+<parameter_description> @binding_set to activate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow.
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> key value of the binding
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> key modifier of the binding
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="object">
+<parameter_description> object to activate when binding found
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> Either @style, or a newly-created #GtkStyle.
-If the style is newly created, the style parameter
-will be unref'ed, and the new style will have
-a reference count belonging to the caller.
+<return> %TRUE if a binding was found and activated
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_column_span_column">
+<description>
+Returns: the column span column.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the column span column.
+
+Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -32889,44 +34348,26 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_default_page_setup">
<description>
-Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. This icon is used when
-the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
-managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
-frame, or display it in other contexts.
-
-The icon should be provided in whatever size it was naturally
-drawn; that is, don't scale the image before passing it to
-GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute, when the desired
-final size is known, to allow best quality.
-
-If you have your icon hand-drawn in multiple sizes, use
-gtk_window_set_icon_list(). Then the best size will be used.
-
-This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon_list()
-with a 1-element list.
-
-See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
-for all windows in your application in one go.
+Returns: the default page setup
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> icon image, or %NULL
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the default page setup
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_get_info">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkFileInfo structure for a particular row
+Gets the #GFileInfo structure for a particular row
of @model. The information included in this structure
is determined by the @types parameter to
_gtk_file_system_model_new().
@@ -32943,7 +34384,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkFileInfo structure. This structure
+<return> a #GFileInfo structure. This structure
is owned by @model and must not be modified or freed.
If you want to save the information for later use,
you must make a copy, since the structure may be
@@ -32981,10 +34422,11 @@
<function name="GtkImage">
<description>
-The name of the icon in the icon theme. If the icon theme is
-changed, the image will be updated automatically.
+The GIcon displayed in the GtkImage. For themed icons,
+If the icon theme is changed, the image will be updated
+automatically.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -33039,48 +34481,57 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_context_focus_out">
+<function name="gtk_editable_delete_text">
<description>
-Notify the input method that the widget to which this
-input context corresponds has lost focus. The input method
-may, for example, change the displayed feedback or reset the contexts
-state to reflect this change.
+Deletes the content of the editable between @start_pos and @end_pos.
+Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMContext
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
+<parameter name="start_pos">
+<parameter_description> start position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end_pos">
+<parameter_description> end position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_vadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_cursor">
<description>
-Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a
-child of the container is focused, the adjustment is scrolled to
-show that widget. This function sets the vertical alignment. See
-gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
-the adjustment and gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment() for setting
-the horizontal adjustment.
+Fills in @path and @cell with the current cursor path and cell.
+If the cursor isn't currently set, then * path will be %NULL.
+If no cell currently has focus, then * cell will be %NULL.
+
+The returned #GtkTreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
-The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate
-system as the allocation for immediate children of the container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the focus
-is moved among the descendents of @container
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the current cursor path, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> Return location the current focus cell, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the cursor is set.
+
+Since: 2.8
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_path_up">
@@ -33114,6 +34565,75 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_value">
+<description>
+Sets initializes and sets @value to that at @column. When done with @value,
+g_value_unset() needs to be called to free any allocated memory.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The column to lookup the value at.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> An empty #GValue to set.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_previous_color">
+<description>
+Fills @color in with the original color value.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the original color value.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_drag_dest_item">
+<description>
+Gets information about the item that is highlighted for feedback.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the highlighted item, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pos">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_assistant_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkAssistant.
@@ -33173,7 +34693,7 @@
Use this function after adding all the buttons to your dialog, as the
following example shows:
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+|[
cancel_button = gtk_dialog_add_button (GTK_DIALOG (dialog),
GTK_STOCK_CANCEL,
GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL);
@@ -33193,7 +34713,7 @@
GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL,
GTK_RESPONSE_HELP,
-1);
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
Since: 2.6
@@ -33215,15 +34735,20 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_path_bar_up">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_version">
<description>
-If the selected button in the pathbar is not the furthest button "up" (in the
-root direction), act as if the user clicked on the next button up.
+Sets the version string to display in the about dialog.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path_bar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPathBar
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="version">
+<parameter_description> the version string
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -33232,7 +34757,7 @@
<function name="gtk_get_option_group">
<description>
-Returns a #GOptionGroup for the commandline arguments recognized
+Returns: a #GOptionGroup for the commandline arguments recognized
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -33242,7 +34767,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>a #GOptionGroup for the commandline arguments recognized
+<return> a #GOptionGroup for the commandline arguments recognized
by GTK+
Since: 2.6
@@ -33267,7 +34792,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkColor structure in which to store the result
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GdkColor structure in which to store the result
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -33293,26 +34818,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_class_list_child_properties">
-<description>
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cclass">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainerClass
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_properties">
-<parameter_description> location to return the number of child properties found
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated %NULL-terminated array of #GParamSpec*.
-The array must be freed with g_free().
-all child properties of a container class.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_cursor_visible">
<description>
Toggles whether the insertion point is displayed. A buffer with no editable
@@ -33377,21 +34882,23 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_icons">
+<function name="gtk_image_get_animation">
<description>
-Retrieves whether @chooser should show an icon near the resource.
+Gets the #GdkPixbufAnimation being displayed by the #GtkImage.
+The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_ANIMATION (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
+The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
+returned animation.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the icons should be displayed, %FALSE otherwise.
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> the displayed animation, or %NULL if the image is empty
</return>
</function>
@@ -33415,6 +34922,51 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_editable_insert_text">
+<description>
+Appends @new_text_length characters of @new_text to the contents of the widget,
+at position @position. Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_text">
+<parameter_description> the text to append
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_text_length">
+<parameter_description> the text to append
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> position text will be inserted at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_action_group_list_actions">
+<description>
+Lists the actions in the action group.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> an allocated list of the action objects in the action group
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_inserted">
<description>
Lets a set of row reference created by gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()
@@ -33488,6 +35040,23 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_default_page_size">
+<description>
+Return value: a newly allocated #GtkPageSetup with default page size of the printer.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly allocated #GtkPageSetup with default page size of the printer.
+
+Since: 2.13
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel">
<description>
Adds an action object to the action group and sets up the accelerator.
@@ -33541,98 +35110,66 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_new">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_preview_entry">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkIconView widget
+This returns the #GtkEntry used to display the font as a preview.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkIconView widget
+<return> A #GtkWidget.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_socket_end_embedding">
-<description>
- socket: a #GtkSocket
-
-Called to end the embedding of a plug in the socket.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_for_text">
<description>
-Sets whether the preview widget set by
-gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget() should be shown for the
-current filename. When @active is set to false, the file chooser
-may display an internally generated preview of the current file
-or it may display no preview at all. See
-gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget() for more details.
+Requests the contents of the clipboard as text and converts
+the result to UTF-8 if necessary. This function waits for
+the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
+timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="active">
-<parameter_description> whether to display the user-specified preview widget
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a newly-allocated UTF-8 string which must
+be freed with g_free(), or %NULL if retrieving
+the selection data failed. (This could happen
+for various reasons, in particular if the
+clipboard was empty or if the contents of the
+clipboard could not be converted into text form.)
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_bottom_margin">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_newv">
<description>
-Sets the bottom margin of the #GtkPageSetup.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="margin">
-<parameter_description> the new bottom margin in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the units for @margin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Non-vararg creation function. Used primarily by language bindings.
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_extension_events">
-<description>
-Sets the extension events mask to @mode. See #GdkExtensionMode
-and gdk_input_set_extension_events().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="n_columns">
+<parameter_description> number of columns in the list store
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mode">
-<parameter_description> bitfield of extension events to receive
+<parameter name="types">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GType types for the columns, from first to last
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkListStore
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_bindings_activate">
@@ -33704,44 +35241,26 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_add_tearoffs">
+<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_action">
<description>
-Sets whether the popup menu should have a tearoff
-menu item.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Sets action which is performed by the file selector using this entry.
+The #GtkFileChooserEntry will use different completion strategies for
+different actions.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="chooser_entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="add_tearoffs">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to add tearoff menu items
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action which is performed by the file selector using this entry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_model">
-<description>
-Return value: A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="_gtk_socket_claim_focus">
<description>
@socket: a #GtkSocket
@@ -33755,27 +35274,29 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_side_image">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_preview_render_page">
<description>
-Gets the header image for @page.
+Renders a page to the preview, using the print context that
+was passed to the #GtkPrintOperation::preview handler together
+with @preview.
+Note that this function requires a suitable cairo context to
+be associated with the print context.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+<parameter name="preview">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperationPreview
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+<parameter name="page_nr">
+<parameter_description> the page to render
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the side image for @page, or %NULL
-if there's no side image for the page.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_drag_source_set_target_list">
@@ -33835,48 +35356,38 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_hline">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_connect">
<description>
-Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
-using the given style and state.
+Installs an accelerator in this group. When @accel_group is being activated
+in response to a call to gtk_accel_groups_activate(), @closure will be
+invoked if the @accel_key and @accel_mods from gtk_accel_groups_activate()
+match those of this connection.
+
+The signature used for the @closure is that of #GtkAccelGroupActivate.
+
+Note that, due to implementation details, a single closure can only be
+connected to one accelerator group.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x1">
-<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x2">
-<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
+<parameter name="accel_flags">
+<parameter_description> a flag mask to configure this accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y coordinate
+<parameter name="closure">
+<parameter_description> closure to be executed upon accelerator activation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -33957,12 +35468,9 @@
<function name="GtkRange">
<description>
-Whether to draw the trough across the full length of the range or
-to exclude the steppers and their spacing. Note that setting the
-#GtkRange:stepper-spacing style property to any value &gt; 0 will
-automatically enable trough-under-steppers too.
+The arrow size proportion relative to the scroll button size.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -33970,55 +35478,18 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_remove">
-<description>
-Removes @widget from @container. @widget must be inside @container.
-Note that @container will own a reference to @widget, and that this
-may be the last reference held; so removing a widget from its
-container can destroy that widget. If you want to use @widget
-again, you need to add a reference to it while it's not inside
-a container, using g_object_ref(). If you don't want to use @widget
-again it's usually more efficient to simply destroy it directly
-using gtk_widget_destroy() since this will remove it from the
-container and help break any circular reference count cycles.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a current child of @container
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_get_alpha">
<description>
-Adds a folder to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file chooser.
-Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder().
-
+Return value: an integer between 0 and 65535.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> path of the folder to add
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the folder could be added successfully, %FALSE
-otherwise.
+<return> an integer between 0 and 65535.
Since: 2.4
</return>
@@ -34043,50 +35514,44 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_query_tab_label_packing">
+<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_get_active">
<description>
-Query the packing attributes for the tab label of the page
-containing @child.
+Queries a #GtkToggleToolButton and returns its current state.
+Return value: %TRUE if the toggle tool button is pressed in, %FALSE if not
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the page
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> location to store the expand value (or NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> location to store the fill value (or NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pack_type">
-<parameter_description> location to store the pack_type (or NULL)
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToggleToolButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the toggle tool button is pressed in, %FALSE if not
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_cursor_visible">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_line_end">
<description>
-Find out whether the cursor is being displayed.
+Moves the iterator to point to the paragraph delimiter characters,
+which will be either a newline, a carriage return, a carriage
+return/newline in sequence, or the Unicode paragraph separator
+character. If the iterator is already at the paragraph delimiter
+characters, moves to the paragraph delimiter characters for the
+next line. If @iter is on the last line in the buffer, which does
+not end in paragraph delimiters, moves to the end iterator (end of
+the last line), and returns %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the insertion mark is visible
+<return> %TRUE if we moved and the new location is not the end iterator
</return>
</function>
@@ -34108,22 +35573,25 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_item_width">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_filter">
<description>
-Sets the ::item-width property which specifies the width
-to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will
-automatically determine a suitable item size.
+Sets the current filter; only the files that pass the
+filter will be displayed. If the user-selectable list of filters
+is non-empty, then the filter should be one of the filters
+in that list. Setting the current filter when the list of
+filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed
+set of files without letting the user change it.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="item_width">
-<parameter_description> the width for each item
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -34234,6 +35702,32 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_type_hint">
+<description>
+By setting the type hint for the window, you allow the window
+manager to decorate and handle the window in a way which is
+suitable to the function of the window in your application.
+
+This function should be called before the window becomes visible.
+
+gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience functions in GTK+
+will sometimes call gtk_window_set_type_hint() on your behalf.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="hint">
+<parameter_description> the window type
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_path_append_index">
<description>
Appends a new index to a path. As a result, the depth of the path is
@@ -34285,24 +35779,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_tool_item_toolbar_reconfigured">
-<description>
-Emits the signal #GtkToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured on @tool_item. This
-internal function is called by #GtkToolbar when some aspect of its
-configuration changes.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_text_targets">
<description>
Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
@@ -34323,75 +35799,46 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_child_anchor_get_widgets">
-<description>
-Gets a list of all widgets anchored at this child anchor.
-The returned list should be freed with g_list_free().
-
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="anchor">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextChildAnchor
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> list of widgets anchored at @anchor
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_set_startup_id">
-<description>
-Startup notification identifiers are used by desktop environment to
-track application startup, to provide user feedback and other
-features. This function changes the corresponding property on the
-underlying GdkWindow. Normally, startup identifier is managed
-automatically and you should only use this function in special cases
-like transferring focus from other processes. You should use this
-function before calling gtk_window_present() or any equivalent
-function generating a window map event.
+<function name="gtk_text_child_anchor_get_widgets">
+<description>
+Gets a list of all widgets anchored at this child anchor.
+The returned list should be freed with g_list_free().
-This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="startup_id">
-<parameter_description> a string with startup-notification identifier
+<parameter name="anchor">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextChildAnchor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> list of widgets anchored at @anchor
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_system_get_volume_for_path">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_angle">
<description>
-Queries the file system volume that corresponds to a specific path.
-There might not be a volume for all paths (consinder for instance remote
-shared), so this can return NULL.
+Sets the angle of rotation for the label. An angle of 90 reads from
+from bottom to top, an angle of 270, from top to bottom. The angle
+setting for the label is ignored if the label is selectable,
+wrapped, or ellipsized.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_system">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystem
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFilePath
+<parameter name="angle">
+<parameter_description> the angle that the baseline of the label makes with
+the horizontal, in degrees, measured counterclockwise
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkFileSystemVolume that corresponds to the specified
- path, or NULL if there is no such volume. You should free this value with
-gtk_file_system_volume_free().
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_ps">
@@ -34494,28 +35941,19 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_filter_get_needed">
+<function name="gtk_accessible_connect_widget_destroyed">
<description>
-Gets the fields that need to be filled in for the structure
-passed to gtk_recent_filter_filter()
-
-This function will not typically be used by applications; it
-is intended principally for use in the implementation of
-#GtkRecentChooser.
-
+This function specifies the callback function to be called when the widget
+corresponding to a GtkAccessible is destroyed.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
+<parameter name="accessible">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccessible
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
-calling gtk_recent_filter_filter()
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_target_list_unref">
@@ -34533,6 +35971,42 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_selection">
+<description>
+Retrieves the selection #GdkAtom of the selection data.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the selection #GdkAtom of the selection data.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_entry_unset_invisible_char">
+<description>
+Unsets the invisible char previously set with
+gtk_entry_set_invisible_char(). So that the
+default invisible char is used again.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_foreach">
<description>
Calls @func on each tag in @table, with user data @data.
@@ -34587,21 +36061,20 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_job_get_title">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_buffer">
<description>
-Gets the job title.
+Gets the text buffer used by the layout. See
+gtk_text_layout_set_buffer().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="job">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the title of @job
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> the text buffer used by the layout.
</return>
</function>
@@ -34687,7 +36160,7 @@
<parameter_description> an array of #GdkPoint&lt;!-- --&gt;s
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="npoints">
+<parameter name="n_points">
<parameter_description> length of @points
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -34891,21 +36364,20 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_embed_set_delegate">
+<function name="gtk_file_selection_set_select_multiple">
<description>
-Establishes that calls on @receiver for #GtkFileChooser methods should be
-delegated to @delegate, and that #GtkFileChooser signals emitted on @delegate
-should be forwarded to @receiver. Must be used in conjunction with
-_gtk_file_chooser_embed_delegate_iface_init().
+Sets whether the user is allowed to select multiple files in the file list.
+Use gtk_file_selection_get_selections () to get the list of selected files.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="receiver">
-<parameter_description> a GOobject implementing #GtkFileChooserEmbed
+<parameter name="filesel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSelection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="delegate">
-<parameter_description> another GObject implementing #GtkFileChooserEmbed
+<parameter name="select_multiple">
+<parameter_description> whether or not the user is allowed to select multiple
+files in the file list.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -34973,18 +36445,40 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_unlock">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_append_page_menu">
<description>
-Undoes the last call to gtk_accel_group_lock() on this @accel_group.
+Appends a page to @notebook, specifying the widget to use as the
+label in the popup menu.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tab_label">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="menu_label">
+<parameter_description> the widget to use as a label for the page-switch
+menu, if that is enabled. If %NULL, and @tab_label
+is a #GtkLabel or %NULL, then the menu label will be
+a newly created label with the same text as @tab_label;
+If @tab_label is not a #GtkLabel, @menu_label must be
+specified if the page-switch menu is to be used.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the index (starting from 0) of the appended
+page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
+</return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_text_util_create_drag_icon">
@@ -35009,23 +36503,20 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_get_file_part">
+<function name="gtk_fixed_get_has_window">
<description>
-Gets the non-folder portion of whatever the user has entered
-into the file selector. What is returned is a UTF-8 string,
-and if a filename path is needed, gtk_file_system_make_path()
-must be used
+Gets whether the #GtkFixed has its own #GdkWindow.
+See gtk_fixed_set_has_window().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser_entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
+<parameter name="fixed">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the entered filename - this value is owned by the
-chooser entry and must not be modified or freed.
+<return> %TRUE if @fixed has its own window.
</return>
</function>
@@ -35056,27 +36547,21 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_media_type">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_visible">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE.
-
-The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.
-&lt;!-- FIXME link here --&gt;
-
-Since: 2.10
+Return value: %TRUE if the status icon is visible
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="media_type">
-<parameter_description> the media type
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the status icon is visible
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_toolbar_set_style">
@@ -35120,26 +36605,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_visible_horizontal">
-<description>
-Sets whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked horizontally.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="visible_horizontal">
-<parameter_description> Whether @tool_item is visible when in horizontal mode
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_popup">
<description>
Displays a menu and makes it available for selection. Applications can use
@@ -35153,10 +36618,12 @@
a mouse button press, such as a mouse button release or a keypress,
@button should be 0.
-The @activate_time parameter should be the time stamp of the event that
-initiated the popup. If such an event is not available, use
-gtk_get_current_event_time() instead.
-
+The @activate_time parameter is used to conflict-resolve initiation of
+concurrent requests for mouse/keyboard grab requests. To function
+properly, this needs to be the time stamp of the user event (such as
+a mouse click or key press) that caused the initiation of the popup.
+Only if no such event is available, gtk_get_current_event_time() can
+be used instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -35192,6 +36659,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_editable_set_editable">
+<description>
+Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
+widget or not.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="is_editable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the user is allowed to edit the text
+in the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_group_remove_window">
<description>
Removes a window from a #GtkWindowGroup.
@@ -35282,7 +36770,7 @@
selected will be those characters from @start_pos to the end of
the text.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_editable_select_region() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_select_region() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -35302,19 +36790,20 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_value">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_inline_completion">
<description>
-Get the value in the @spin_button.
-
+Return value: %TRUE if inline completion is turned on
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the value of @spin_button
+<return> %TRUE if inline completion is turned on
+
+Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -35361,6 +36850,10 @@
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
<parameter name="wx">
<parameter_description> X coordinate relative to the widget
</parameter_description>
@@ -35437,20 +36930,51 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_is_active">
+<function name="gtk_widget_modify_text">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @printer is active
+Sets the text color for a widget in a particular state. All other
+style values are left untouched. The text color is the foreground
+color used along with the base color (see gtk_widget_modify_base())
+for widgets such as #GtkEntry and #GtkTextView. See also
+gtk_widget_modify_style().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state">
+<parameter_description> the state for which to set the text color
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),
+or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
+of gtk_widget_modify_text().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @printer is active
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.10
+<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_style">
+<description>
+Retrieves whether the tool shell has text, icons, or both. Tool items must
+not call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_style()
+instead.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="shell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the current style of @shell
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -35490,22 +37014,41 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_dither">
+<function name="gtk_calendar_set_detail_func">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
+Installs a function which provides Pango markup with detail information
+for each day. Examples for such details are holidays or appointments. That
+information is shown below each day when #GtkCalendar:show-details is set.
+A tooltip containing with full detail information is provided, if the entire
+text should not fit into the details area, or if #GtkCalendar:show-details
+is not set.
+
+The size of the details area can be restricted by setting the
+#GtkCalendar:detail-width-chars and #GtkCalendar:detail-height-rows
+properties.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> a function providing details for each day.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @func invokations.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> a function for releasing @data.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the dithering that is used
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords">
@@ -35548,8 +37091,8 @@
<function name="GtkScaleButton">
<description>
-The ::popdown signal is a
-&lt;link linkend="keybinding-signals"&gt;keybinding signal&lt;/link&gt;
+The ::popdown signal is a
+&lt;link linkend="keybinding-signals"&gt;keybinding signal&lt;/link&gt;
which gets emitted to popdown the scale widget.
The default binding for this signal is Escape.
@@ -35628,9 +37171,9 @@
<function name="gtk_scale_button_set_value">
<description>
-Sets the current value of the scale; if the value is outside
-the minimum or maximum range values, it will be clamped to fit
-inside them. The scale button emits the #GtkScaleButton::value-changed
+Sets the current value of the scale; if the value is outside
+the minimum or maximum range values, it will be clamped to fit
+inside them. The scale button emits the #GtkScaleButton::value-changed
signal if the value changes.
Since: 2.12
@@ -35649,6 +37192,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_family">
+<description>
+Gets the #PangoFontFamily representing the selected font family.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #PangoFontFamily representing the selected font
+family. Font families are a collection of font faces.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_resolution">
<description>
Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION.
@@ -35676,8 +37238,9 @@
as the invisible char, and will also appear that way when
the text in the entry widget is copied elsewhere.
-The default invisible char is the asterisk '*', but it can
-be changed with gtk_entry_set_invisible_char().
+By default, GTK+ picks the best invisible character available
+in the current font, but it can be changed with
+gtk_entry_set_invisible_char().
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -35694,6 +37257,62 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_paint_diamond">
+<description>
+Draws a diamond in the given rectangle on @window using the given
+parameters.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_label_from_widget">
<description>
Creates a new GtkRadioMenuItem whose child is a simple GtkLabel.
@@ -35778,7 +37397,7 @@
</parameters>
<return> the previous change palette hook (that was replaced).
-Deprecated: This function is deprecated in favor of
+Deprecated: 2.4: This function is deprecated in favor of
gtk_color_selection_set_change_palette_with_screen_hook(), and does
not work in multihead environments.
@@ -35812,95 +37431,69 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_for_targets">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if any targets are present on the clipboard,
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> location to store an array of targets. The result
-stored here must be freed with g_free().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> location to store number of items in @targets.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if any targets are present on the clipboard,
-otherwise %FALSE.
+Changes the appearance of the sort indicator.
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
+This &lt;emphasis&gt;does not&lt;/emphasis&gt; actually sort the model. Use
+gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_column_id() if you want automatic sorting
+support. This function is primarily for custom sorting behavior, and should
+be used in conjunction with gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column() to do
+that. For custom models, the mechanism will vary.
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_child_anchor">
-<description>
-Obtains the location of @anchor within @buffer.
+The sort indicator changes direction to indicate normal sort or reverse sort.
+Note that you must have the sort indicator enabled to see anything when
+calling this function; see gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator to be initialized
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="anchor">
-<parameter_description> a child anchor that appears in @buffer
+<parameter name="order">
+<parameter_description> sort order that the sort indicator should indicate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_text">
+<function name="gtk_printer_compare">
<description>
-Inserts an action in @completion's action item list at position @index_
-with text @text. If you want the action item to have markup, use
-gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_markup().
+Compares two printers.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="index_">
-<parameter_description> The index of the item to insert.
+<parameter name="a">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> Text of the item to insert.
+<parameter name="b">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> 0 if the printer match, a negative value if @a &lt; @b,
+or a positive value if @a &gt; @b
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_unparent">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new">
<description>
-This function is only for use in widget implementations.
-Should be called by implementations of the remove method
-on #GtkContainer, to dissociate a child from the container.
+Creates a new ui manager object.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new ui manager object.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_toggled_tags">
@@ -35940,23 +37533,22 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_use_underline">
+<function name="gtk_editable_get_position">
<description>
-If true, an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
-used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
+Retrieves the current position of the cursor relative to the start
+of the content of the editable. Note that this position is in characters,
+not in bytes.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the cursor position
+</return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_key_hash_new">
@@ -36002,34 +37594,43 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char">
+<function name="gtk_border_free">
<description>
-Advances @iter, calling @pred on each character. If
- pred returns %TRUE, returns %TRUE and stops scanning.
-If @pred never returns %TRUE, @iter is set to @limit if
- limit is non-%NULL, otherwise to the end iterator.
-
+Frees a #GtkBorder structure.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pred">
-<parameter_description> a function to be called on each character
+<parameter name="border_">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBorder.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data for @pred
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_path_to_path">
+<description>
+Converts @child_path to a path relative to @filter. That is, @child_path
+points to a path in the child model. The rerturned path will point to the
+same row in the filtered model. If @child_path isn't a valid path on the
+child model or points to a row which is not visible in @filter, then %NULL
+is returned.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="limit">
-<parameter_description> search limit, or %NULL for none
+<parameter name="child_path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether a match was found
+<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -36131,21 +37732,29 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_push_colormap">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_disconnect_key">
<description>
-Pushes @cmap onto a global stack of colormaps; the topmost
-colormap on the stack will be used to create all widgets.
-Remove @cmap with gtk_widget_pop_colormap(). There's little
-reason to use this function.
+Removes an accelerator previously installed through
+gtk_accel_group_connect().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cmap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if there was an accelerator which could be
+removed, %FALSE otherwise
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_stick">
@@ -36160,7 +37769,7 @@
It's permitted to call this function before showing a window.
-You can track stickiness via the "window_state_event" signal
+You can track stickiness via the "window-state-event" signal
on #GtkWidget.
@@ -36320,33 +37929,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_forall">
-<description>
-Invokes @callback on each child of @container, including children
-that are considered "internal" (implementation details of the
-container). "Internal" children generally weren't added by the user
-of the container, but were added by the container implementation
-itself. Most applications should use gtk_container_foreach(),
-rather than gtk_container_forall().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> a callback
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_data">
-<parameter_description> callback user data
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_overwrite">
<description>
Return value: whether @text_view is in overwrite mode or not.
@@ -36366,9 +37948,11 @@
<function name="GtkCalendar">
<description>
-Determines whether week numbers are displayed.
+Determines whether details are shown directly in the widget, or if they are
+available only as tooltip. When this property is set days with details are
+marked.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36450,31 +38034,20 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_use_underline">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_selection">
<description>
-If set, an underline in the label property indicates that the next character
-should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key in the overflow menu. For
-example, if the label property is "_Open" and @use_underline is %TRUE,
-the label on the tool button will be "Open" and the item on the overflow
-menu will have an underlined 'O'.
-
-Labels shown on tool buttons never have mnemonics on them; this property
-only affects the menu item on the overflow menu.
+Gets the #GtkTreeSelection associated with @tree_view.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_underline">
-<parameter_description> whether the button label has the form "_Open"
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GtkTreeSelection object.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_input_shape_combine_mask">
@@ -36597,32 +38170,32 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_remove_accelerator">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_point">
<description>
-Removes an accelerator from @widget, previously installed with
-gtk_widget_add_accelerator().
+Scrolls the tree view such that the top-left corner of the visible
+area is @tree_x, @tree_y, where @tree_x and @tree_y are specified
+in tree coordinates. The @tree_view must be realized before
+this function is called. If it isn't, you probably want to be
+using gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_cell().
+
+If either @tree_x or @tree_y are -1, then that direction isn't scrolled.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> widget to install an accelerator on
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> accel group for this widget
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> GDK keyval of the accelerator
+<parameter name="tree_x">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier key combination of the accelerator
+<parameter name="tree_y">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_widget_get_aux_info">
@@ -36788,29 +38361,18 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_window_creation_hook">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new">
<description>
-Installs a global function used to create a window
-when a detached tab is dropped in an empty area.
+Creates an empty status icon object.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkNotebookWindowCreationFunc, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> user data for @func
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> Destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_frame_get_label">
@@ -36868,7 +38430,7 @@
an undo stack. #GtkTextBuffer maintains a count of calls to
gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() that have not been closed with
a call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action(), and emits the
-"begin_user_action" and "end_user_action" signals only for the
+"begin-user-action" and "end-user-action" signals only for the
outermost pair of calls. This allows you to build user actions
from other user actions.
@@ -36888,6 +38450,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="_gtk_socket_add_window">
+<description>
+ socket: a #GtkSocket
+ xid: the native identifier for a window
+ need_reparent: whether the socket's plug's window needs to be
+reparented to the socket
+
+Adds a window to a GtkSocket.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget.
@@ -36935,25 +38512,26 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_unix_dialog_set_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_path_from_widget">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkPageSetup from which the page setup
-dialog takes its values.
+If @widget has been created by an item factory, returns the full path
+to it. (The full path of a widget is the concatenation of the factory
+path specified in gtk_item_factory_new() with the path specified in the
+#GtkItemFactoryEntry from which the widget was created.)
-Since: 2.10
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetupUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the full path to @widget if it has been created by an item
+factory, %NULL otherwise. This value is owned by GTK+ and must not be
+modified or freed.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_ensure_update">
@@ -36964,17 +38542,15 @@
UI in an idle function. A typical example where this function is
useful is to enforce that the menubar and toolbar have been added to
the main window before showing it:
-&lt;informalexample&gt;
-&lt;programlisting&gt;
+|[
gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), vbox);
-g_signal_connect (merge, "add_widget",
+g_signal_connect (merge, "add-widget",
G_CALLBACK (add_widget), vbox);
gtk_ui_manager_add_ui_from_file (merge, "my-menus");
gtk_ui_manager_add_ui_from_file (merge, "my-toolbars");
gtk_ui_manager_ensure_update (merge);
gtk_widget_show (window);
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;
-&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
Since: 2.4
@@ -37052,6 +38628,76 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_snapshot">
+<description>
+Create a #GdkPixmap of the contents of the widget and its children.
+
+Works even if the widget is obscured. The depth and visual of the
+resulting pixmap is dependent on the widget being snapshot and likely
+differs from those of a target widget displaying the pixmap.
+The function gdk_pixbuf_get_from_drawable() can be used to convert
+the pixmap to a visual independant representation.
+
+The snapshot area used by this function is the @widget's allocation plus
+any extra space occupied by additional windows belonging to this widget
+(such as the arrows of a spin button).
+Thus, the resulting snapshot pixmap is possibly larger than the allocation.
+
+If @clip_rect is non-%NULL, the resulting pixmap is shrunken to
+match the specified clip_rect. The (x,y) coordinates of @clip_rect are
+interpreted widget relative. If width or height of @clip_rect are 0 or
+negative, the width or height of the resulting pixmap will be shrunken
+by the respective amount.
+For instance a @clip_rect &lt;literal&gt;{ +5, +5, -10, -10 }&lt;/literal&gt; will
+chop off 5 pixels at each side of the snapshot pixmap.
+If non-%NULL, @clip_rect will contain the exact widget-relative snapshot
+coordinates upon return. A @clip_rect of &lt;literal&gt;{ -1, -1, 0, 0 }&lt;/literal&gt;
+can be used to preserve the auto-grown snapshot area and use @clip_rect
+as a pure output parameter.
+
+The returned pixmap can be %NULL, if the resulting @clip_area was empty.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="clip_rect">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> #GdkPixmap snapshot of the widget
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_set_image">
+<description>
+Sets the contents of the clipboard to the given #GdkPixbuf.
+GTK+ will take responsibility for responding for requests
+for the image, and for converting the image into the
+requested format.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_columns">
<description>
Return value: the number of columns, or -1
@@ -37069,70 +38715,88 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_unselect_path">
+<function name="gtk_widget_push_colormap">
<description>
-Unselects the file referred to by @path. An internal
-function. See _gtk_file_chooser_unselect_uri().
-
-Since: 2.4
+Pushes @cmap onto a global stack of colormaps; the topmost
+colormap on the stack will be used to create all widgets.
+Remove @cmap with gtk_widget_pop_colormap(). There's little
+reason to use this function.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the filename to path
+<parameter name="cmap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_disconnect_key">
+<function name="gtk_init_with_args">
<description>
-Removes an accelerator previously installed through
-gtk_accel_group_connect().
+This function does the same work as gtk_init_check().
+Additionally, it allows you to add your own commandline options,
+and it automatically generates nicely formatted
+&lt;option&gt;--help&lt;/option&gt; output. Note that your program will
+be terminated after writing out the help output.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to the number of command line arguments.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to the array of command line arguments.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+<parameter name="parameter_string">
+<parameter_description> a string which is displayed in
+the first line of &lt;option&gt;--help&lt;/option&gt; output, after
+&lt;literal&gt;&lt;replaceable&gt;programname&lt;/replaceable&gt; [OPTION...]&lt;/literal&gt;
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of #GOptionEntry&lt;!-- --&gt;s
+describing the options of your program
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="translation_domain">
+<parameter_description> a translation domain to use for translating
+the &lt;option&gt;--help&lt;/option&gt; output for the options in @entries
+with gettext(), or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> a return location for errors
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if there was an accelerator which could be
-removed, %FALSE otherwise
+<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
+%FALSE otherwise.
+
+Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_foreach">
+<function name="gtk_statusbar_pop">
<description>
-Calls @func for each key-value pair of @settings.
+Removes the first message in the #GtkStatusBar's stack
+with the given context id.
-Since: 2.10
+Note that this may not change the displayed message, if
+the message at the top of the stack has a different
+context id.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> the function to call
+<parameter name="statusbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data for @func
+<parameter name="context_id">
+<parameter_description> a context identifier
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -37166,27 +38830,21 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_new_from_animation">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_duplex">
<description>
-Creates a #GtkImage displaying the given animation.
-The #GtkImage does not assume a reference to the
-animation; you still need to unref it if you own references.
-#GtkImage will add its own reference rather than adopting yours.
-
-Note that the animation frames are shown using a timeout with
-#G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT. When using animations to indicate busyness,
-keep in mind that the animation will only be shown if the main loop
-is not busy with something that has a higher priority.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> an animation
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImage widget
+<return> whether to print the output in duplex.
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -37275,9 +38933,10 @@
<function name="GtkLinkButton">
<description>
-The URI bound to this button.
+The 'visited' state of this button. A visited link is drawn in a
+different color.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37285,6 +38944,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_border_new">
+<description>
+Allocates a new #GtkBorder structure and initializes its elements to zero.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new empty #GtkBorder. The newly allocated #GtkBorder should be
+freed with gtk_border_free()
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_set_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkIconSet. A #GtkIconSet represents a single icon
@@ -37332,6 +39006,72 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_get_size">
+<description>
+Obtains the current size of @window. If @window is not onscreen,
+it returns the size GTK+ will suggest to the &lt;link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt; for the initial window
+size (but this is not reliably the same as the size the window
+manager will actually select). The size obtained by
+gtk_window_get_size() is the last size received in a
+#GdkEventConfigure, that is, GTK+ uses its locally-stored size,
+rather than querying the X server for the size. As a result, if you
+call gtk_window_resize() then immediately call
+gtk_window_get_size(), the size won't have taken effect yet. After
+the window manager processes the resize request, GTK+ receives
+notification that the size has changed via a configure event, and
+the size of the window gets updated.
+
+Note 1: Nearly any use of this function creates a race condition,
+because the size of the window may change between the time that you
+get the size and the time that you perform some action assuming
+that size is the current size. To avoid race conditions, connect to
+"configure-event" on the window and adjust your size-dependent
+state to match the size delivered in the #GdkEventConfigure.
+
+Note 2: The returned size does &lt;emphasis&gt;not&lt;/emphasis&gt; include the
+size of the window manager decorations (aka the window frame or
+border). Those are not drawn by GTK+ and GTK+ has no reliable
+method of determining their size.
+
+Note 3: If you are getting a window size in order to position
+the window onscreen, there may be a better way. The preferred
+way is to simply set the window's semantic type with
+gtk_window_set_type_hint(), which allows the window manager to
+e.g. center dialogs. Also, if you set the transient parent of
+dialogs with gtk_window_set_transient_for() window managers
+will often center the dialog over its parent window. It's
+much preferred to let the window manager handle these
+things rather than doing it yourself, because all apps will
+behave consistently and according to user prefs if the window
+manager handles it. Also, the window manager can take the size
+of the window decorations/border into account, while your
+application cannot.
+
+In any case, if you insist on application-specified window
+positioning, there's &lt;emphasis&gt;still&lt;/emphasis&gt; a better way than
+doing it yourself - gtk_window_set_position() will frequently
+handle the details for you.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> return location for width, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> return location for height, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_viewport_get_vadjustment">
<description>
Return value: the vertical adjustment of @viewport.
@@ -37513,8 +39253,8 @@
<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> path of the folder to remove
+<parameter name="file">
+<parameter_description> file for the folder to remove
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="error">
@@ -37529,38 +39269,40 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_value">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_from_key_file">
<description>
-Sets initializes and sets @value to that at @column. When done with @value,
-g_value_unset() needs to be called to free any allocated memory.
+Reads a paper size from the group @group_name in the key file
+ key_file
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the papersize from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The column to lookup the value at.
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name ofthe group in the key file to read,
+or %NULL to read the first group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> An empty #GValue to set.
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object with the restored
+paper size, or %NULL if an error occurred.
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_delete">
<description>
Deletes text between @start and @end. The order of @start and @end
is not actually relevant; gtk_text_buffer_delete() will reorder
-them. This function actually emits the "delete_range" signal, and
+them. This function actually emits the "delete-range" signal, and
the default handler of that signal deletes the text. Because the
buffer is modified, all outstanding iterators become invalid after
calling this function; however, the @start and @end will be
@@ -37584,18 +39326,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_depth">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_retrieve_proxy_menu_item">
<description>
-Return value: The depth of @path
+Return value: The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The depth of @path
+<return> The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
+overflow menu for @tool_item.
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -37660,29 +39405,23 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_target_table_new_from_list">
+<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_set_show_folders">
<description>
-This function creates an #GtkTargetEntry array that contains the
-same targets as the passed %list. The returned table is newly
-allocated and should be freed using gtk_target_table_free() when no
-longer needed.
-
+Sets whether folders should be included in the #GtkTreeModel for
+display.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> return location for the number ot targets in the table
+<parameter name="show_folders">
+<parameter_description> whether folders should be displayed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new table.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_popup_disable">
@@ -37719,42 +39458,29 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_text_btree_validate">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_get_item">
<description>
-Validate a single contiguous invalid region of a #GtkTextBTree for
-a given view.
+Obtains the menu item which corresponds to @path.
+
+If the widget corresponding to @path is a menu item which opens a
+submenu, then the item is returned. If you are interested in the submenu,
+use gtk_item_factory_get_widget() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBTree
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="view_id">
-<parameter_description> view id
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_pixels">
-<parameter_description> the maximum number of pixels to validate. (No more
-than one paragraph beyond this limit will be validated)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> location to store starting y coordinate of validated region
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="old_height">
-<parameter_description> location to store old height of validated region
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_height">
-<parameter_description> location to store new height of validated region
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> the path to the menu item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if a region has been validated, %FALSE if the
-entire tree was already valid.
+<return> the menu item for the given path, or %NULL if @path doesn't
+lead to a menu item
</return>
</function>
@@ -37865,20 +39591,45 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_list">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window">
<description>
-Sets an icon list to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
-had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them to set up a
-window-specific icon list. This function allows you to set up the
-icon for all windows in your app at once.
-
-See gtk_window_set_icon_list() for more details.
-
+Adds a child at fixed coordinates in one of the text widget's
+windows. The window must have nonzero size (see
+gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()). Note that the child
+coordinates are given relative to the #GdkWindow in question, and
+that these coordinates have no sane relationship to scrolling. When
+placing a child in #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET, scrolling is
+irrelevant, the child floats above all scrollable areas. But when
+placing a child in one of the scrollable windows (border windows or
+text window), you'll need to compute the child's correct position
+in buffer coordinates any time scrolling occurs or buffer changes
+occur, and then call gtk_text_view_move_child() to update the
+child's position. Unfortunately there's no good way to detect that
+scrolling has occurred, using the current API; a possible hack
+would be to update all child positions when the scroll adjustments
+change or the text buffer changes. See bug 64518 on
+bugzilla.gnome.org for status of fixing this issue.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> a list of #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="which_window">
+<parameter_description> which window the child should appear in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xpos">
+<parameter_description> X position of child in window coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypos">
+<parameter_description> Y position of child in window coordinates
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -37904,23 +39655,43 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_set_image">
+<function name="GtkToolButton">
<description>
-Sets the contents of the clipboard to the given #GdkPixbuf.
-GTK+ will take responsibility for responding for requests
-for the image, and for converting the image into the
-requested format.
+This signal is emitted when the tool button is clicked with the mouse
+or activated with the keyboard.
-Since: 2.6
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toolbutton">
+<parameter_description> the object that emitted the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_widget">
+<description>
+Adds a widget to the end of the given toolbar.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard object
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget to add to the toolbar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_text">
+<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
+<parameter_description> used for context-sensitive help about this toolbar element.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -37977,7 +39748,7 @@
<description>
Obtains the item factory from which a widget was created.
-Deprecated: 2.4
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -38151,6 +39922,37 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_ruler_set_range">
+<description>
+This sets the range of the ruler.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="ruler">
+<parameter_description> the gtkruler
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="lower">
+<parameter_description> the lower limit of the ruler
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="upper">
+<parameter_description> the upper limit of the ruler
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the mark on the ruler
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max_size">
+<parameter_description> the maximum size of the ruler used when calculating the space to
+leave for the text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_set_from_image">
<description>
See gtk_image_new_from_image() for details.
@@ -38195,18 +39997,20 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkToggleToolButton">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_copy">
<description>
-Emitted whenever the toggle tool button changes state.
+Makes a copy of a #GtkSelectionData structure and its data.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle_tool_button">
-<parameter_description> the object that emitted the signal
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a pointer to a copy of @data.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_selection_data_targets_include_image">
@@ -38235,6 +40039,24 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_page_increment">
+<description>
+Retrieves the page increment of the adjustment.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The current page increment of the adjustment.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_color_selection_palette_from_string">
<description>
Parses a color palette string; the string is a colon-separated
@@ -38276,7 +40098,7 @@
Since: 2.6
- Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_about_dialog_get_program_name() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_about_dialog_get_program_name() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -38350,34 +40172,20 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_add_from_string">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_style">
<description>
-Parses a string containing a &lt;link linkend="BUILDER-UI"&gt;GtkBuilder
-UI definition&lt;/link&gt; and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
-
+Retrieves whether the toolbar has text, icons, or both . See
+gtk_toolbar_set_style().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> the string to parse
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description> the length of @buffer (may be -1 if @buffer is nul-terminated)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
-
-Since: 2.12
+<return> the current style of @toolbar
</return>
</function>
@@ -38402,6 +40210,28 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_foreach_unfiltered">
+<description>
+Loops over all entries in the accelerator map, and execute
+ foreach_func on each. The signature of @foreach_func is that of
+#GtkAccelMapForeach, the @changed parameter indicates whether
+this accelerator was changed during runtime (thus, would need
+saving during an accelerator map dump).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to be passed into @foreach_func
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="foreach_func">
+<parameter_description> function to be executed for each accel map entry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_fixed_width">
<description>
Gets the fixed width of the column. This value is only meaning may not be
@@ -38433,33 +40263,13 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a UTF-8 string containing the resource's URI or %NULL
+<return> a newly allocated UTF-8 string containing the
+resource's URI or %NULL. Use g_free() when done using it.
Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_border">
-<description>
-Sets the width the border around the tab labels
-in a notebook. This is equivalent to calling
-gtk_notebook_set_tab_hborder (@notebook, @border_width) followed
-by gtk_notebook_set_tab_vborder (@notebook, @border_width).
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="border_width">
-<parameter_description> width of the border around the tab labels.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_dither">
<description>
Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
@@ -38627,42 +40437,41 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_hsv_get_metrics">
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_delete_entry">
<description>
-Queries the size and ring width of an HSV color selector.
+Deletes the menu item which was created from @entry by the given
+item factory.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="hsv">
-<parameter_description> An HSV color selector.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> Return value for the diameter of the hue ring.
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ring_width">
-<parameter_description> Return value for the width of the hue ring.
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactoryEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_pixels_above_lines">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_unset_rows_drag_dest">
<description>
-Gets the default number of pixels to put above paragraphs.
-
+Undoes the effect of
+gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this method sets
+reorderable to %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> default number of pixels above paragraphs
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_font_button_get_use_font">
@@ -38767,7 +40576,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="notify">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDestroyNotify function to be called when @action_group is
+<parameter_description> a #GDestroyNotify function to be called when @action_group is
destroyed and when the translation function is changed again
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -38818,6 +40627,7 @@
The list is terminated by a -1. For example, to set column 0 with type
%G_TYPE_STRING to "Foo", you would write
&lt;literal&gt;gtk_tree_store_set (store, iter, 0, "Foo", -1)&lt;/literal&gt;.
+The value will be copied or referenced by the store if appropriate.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -39002,6 +40812,30 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_step_increment">
+<description>
+Sets the step increment of the adjustment.
+
+See gtk_adjustment_set_lower() about how to compress multiple
+emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
+properties.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step_increment">
+<parameter_description> the new step increment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_artists">
<description>
Return value: A %NULL-terminated string array containing
@@ -39072,46 +40906,53 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_right_justified">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_has_frame">
<description>
-Gets whether the menu item appears justified at the right
-side of the menu bar.
+(Note: this is a special-purpose function for the framebuffer port,
+that causes GTK+ to draw its own window border. For most applications,
+you want gtk_window_set_decorated() instead, which tells the window
+manager whether to draw the window border.)
+
+If this function is called on a window with setting of %TRUE, before
+it is realized or showed, it will have a "frame" window around
+ window-&gt;window, accessible in @window-&gt;frame. Using the signal
+frame_event you can receive all events targeted at the frame.
+
+This function is used by the linux-fb port to implement managed
+windows, but it could conceivably be used by X-programs that
+want to do their own window decorations.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuItem
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> a boolean
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the menu item will appear at the
-far right if added to a menu bar.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_stock">
<description>
-Emits the "remove_tag" signal. The default handler for the signal
-removes all occurrences of @tag from the given range. @start and
- end don't have to be in order.
+See gtk_image_new_from_stock() for details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> one bound of range to be untagged
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> other bound of range to be untagged
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -39129,6 +40970,48 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_dither">
+<description>
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the dithering that is used
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_foreach">
+<description>
+Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
+If @func returns %TRUE, then the tree ceases to be walked, and
+gtk_tree_model_foreach() returns.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> A function to be called on each row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> User data to passed to func.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_path_is_descendant">
<description>
Return value: %TRUE if @ancestor contains @path somewhere below it
@@ -39243,33 +41126,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_get_current_event_state">
<description>
-Sets the icon for @window.
-Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
-
-This function is equivalent to calling gtk_window_set_icon()
-with a pixbuf created by loading the image from @filename.
+If there is a current event and it has a state field, place
+that state field in @state and return %TRUE, otherwise return
+%FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> location of icon file
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="err">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="state">
+<parameter_description> a location to store the state of the current event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
-
-Since: 2.2
+<return> %TRUE if there was a current event and it had a state field
</return>
</function>
@@ -39300,6 +41171,18 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="GtkOrientable">
+<description>
+The orientation of the orientable.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_bool">
<description>
Sets @key to a boolean value.
@@ -39324,25 +41207,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_completion_prefix">
-<description>
-Get the original text entered by the user that triggered
-the completion or %NULL if there's no completion ongoing.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the prefix for the current completion
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_layout_move_iter_to_x">
<description>
Keeping the iterator on the same line of the layout, move it to the
@@ -39461,22 +41325,22 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_remove_space">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_data_type">
<description>
-Removes a space from the specified position.
+Retrieves the data type of the selection.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the index of the space to remove.
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the data type of the selection.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_socket_add_grabbed_key">
@@ -39541,13 +41405,41 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated of all toplevel widgets of the requested
-types.
+<return> a newly-allocated #GSList of all toplevel widgets of the
+requested types. Free the returned list with g_slist_free().
Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag">
+<description>
+Emits the "remove-tag" signal. The default handler for the signal
+removes all occurrences of @tag from the given range. @start and
+ end don't have to be in order.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> one bound of range to be untagged
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> other bound of range to be untagged
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_drag_dest_item">
<description>
Sets the item that is highlighted for feedback.
@@ -39600,6 +41492,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_row_spacing">
+<description>
+Sets the ::row-spacing property which specifies the space
+which is inserted between the rows of the icon view.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="row_spacing">
+<parameter_description> the row spacing
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_printer_get_description">
<description>
Gets the description of the printer.
@@ -39730,89 +41643,123 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_color">
+<function name="_gtk_text_btree_validate">
<description>
-Sets the current color to be @color. The first time this is called, it will
-also set the original color to be @color too.
+Validate a single contiguous invalid region of a #GtkTextBTree for
+a given view.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_color_selection_set_current_color() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+<parameter name="tree">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBTree
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> an array of 4 doubles specifying the red, green, blue and opacity
-to set the current color to.
+<parameter name="view_id">
+<parameter_description> view id
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max_pixels">
+<parameter_description> the maximum number of pixels to validate. (No more
+than one paragraph beyond this limit will be validated)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> location to store starting y coordinate of validated region
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="old_height">
+<parameter_description> location to store old height of validated region
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_height">
+<parameter_description> location to store new height of validated region
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if a region has been validated, %FALSE if the
+entire tree was already valid.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_selection_iter_is_selected">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_iter_to_iter">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE, if @iter is selected
+Sets @filter_iter to point to the row in @filter that corresponds to the
+row pointed at by @child_iter. If @filter_iter was not set, %FALSE is
+returned.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter
+<parameter name="filter_iter">
+<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child_iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row on the child model.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @iter is selected
+<return> %TRUE, if @filter_iter was set, i.e. if @child_iter is a
+valid iterator pointing to a visible row in child model.
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkStatusbar">
+<function name="gtk_hsv_set_metrics">
<description>
-Is emitted whenever a new message is popped off a statusbar's stack.
+Sets the size and ring width of an HSV color selector.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="statusbar">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal.
+<parameter name="hsv">
+<parameter_description> An HSV color selector.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="context_id">
-<parameter_description> the context id of the relevant message/statusbar.
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> Diameter for the hue ring.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the message that was just popped.
+<parameter name="ring_width">
+<parameter_description> Width of the hue ring.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_hsv_set_metrics">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_for_targets">
<description>
-Sets the size and ring width of an HSV color selector.
+Return value: %TRUE if any targets are present on the clipboard,
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="hsv">
-<parameter_description> An HSV color selector.
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> Diameter for the hue ring.
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> location to store an array of targets. The result
+stored here must be freed with g_free().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ring_width">
-<parameter_description> Width of the hue ring.
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> location to store number of items in @targets.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if any targets are present on the clipboard,
+otherwise %FALSE.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_expand">
@@ -39945,6 +41892,31 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_window">
+<description>
+Retrieves the #GdkWindow corresponding to an area of the text view;
+possible windows include the overall widget window, child windows
+on the left, right, top, bottom, and the window that displays the
+text buffer. Windows are %NULL and nonexistent if their width or
+height is 0, and are nonexistent before the widget has been
+realized.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="win">
+<parameter_description> window to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GdkWindow, or %NULL
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rubber_banding">
<description>
Enables or disables rubber banding in @tree_view. If the selection mode
@@ -39967,23 +41939,20 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_link_button_get_uri">
+<function name="gtk_menu_shell_cancel">
<description>
-Retrieves the URI set using gtk_link_button_set_uri().
+Cancels the selection within the menu shell.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="link_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLinkButton
+<parameter name="menu_shell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuShell
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a valid URI. The returned string is owned by the link button
-and should not be modified or freed.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_no_show_all">
@@ -40026,7 +41995,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
-and a suitable target for text is included, otherwise %FALSE.
+and a suitable target for URI lists is included, otherwise %FALSE.
Since: 2.10
</return>
@@ -40123,20 +42092,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_current_page">
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_valid">
<description>
-Return value: the index (starting from 0) of the current
+Determines whether a given keyval and modifier mask constitute
+a valid keyboard accelerator. For example, the #GDK_a keyval
+plus #GDK_CONTROL_MASK is valid - this is a "Ctrl+a" accelerator.
+But, you can't, for instance, use the #GDK_Control_L keyval
+as an accelerator.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> a GDK keyval
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> modifier mask
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting from 0) of the current
-page in the notebook. If the notebook has no pages, then
--1 will be returned.
+<return> %TRUE if the accelerator is valid
</return>
</function>
@@ -40188,6 +42163,10 @@
The signature used for the @closure is that of #GtkAccelGroupActivate.
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="accel_group">
@@ -40260,6 +42239,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_list">
+<description>
+Sets an icon list to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
+had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them to set up a
+window-specific icon list. This function allows you to set up the
+icon for all windows in your app at once.
+
+See gtk_window_set_icon_list() for more details.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> a list of #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_frame_get_shadow_type">
<description>
Retrieves the shadow type of the frame. See
@@ -40354,6 +42353,28 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_link_button_get_visited">
+<description>
+Retrieves the 'visited' state of the URI where the #GtkLinkButton
+points. The button becomes visited when it is clicked. If the URI
+is changed on the button, the 'visited' state is unset again.
+
+The state may also be changed using gtk_link_button_set_visited().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="link_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLinkButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the link has been visited, %FALSE otherwise
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_file">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkImage displaying the file @filename. If the file
@@ -40479,23 +42500,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_blinking">
+<function name="gtk_layout_get_size">
<description>
-Makes the status icon start or stop blinking.
-Note that blinking user interface elements may be problematic
-for some users, and thus may be turned off, in which case
-this setting has no effect.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Gets the size that has been set on the layout, and that determines
+the total extents of the layout's scrollbar area. See
+gtk_layout_set_size ().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="blinking">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to turn blinking on, %FALSE to turn it off
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> location to store the width set on @layout, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> location to store the height set on @layout, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40520,7 +42542,7 @@
isn't very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be
called after the widget is realized automatically, such as
-GtkWidget::expose-event. Or simply g_signal_connect_after() to the
+GtkWidget::expose-event. Or simply g_signal_connect () to the
GtkWidget::realize signal.
</description>
@@ -40604,19 +42626,74 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag_by_name">
<description>
-Return value: a line number
+Calls gtk_text_tag_table_lookup() on the buffer's tag table to
+get a #GtkTextTag, then calls gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> name of a named #GtkTextTag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> one bound of range to be tagged
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> other bound of range to be tagged
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a line number
-</return>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup">
+<description>
+Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format (with
+printf()-style), which is marked up with the
+&lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango text markup language&lt;/link&gt;.
+
+Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
+bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
+
+Due to an oversight, this function does not escape special XML characters
+like gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup() does. Thus, if the arguments
+may contain special XML characters, you should use g_markup_printf_escaped()
+to escape it.
+
+&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+gchar *msg;
+
+msg = g_markup_printf_escaped (message_format, ...);
+gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup (message_dialog, "&percnt;s", msg);
+g_free (msg);
+&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="message_format">
+<parameter_description> printf()-style markup string (see
+ &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango markup format&lt;/link&gt;), or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_get_for_attach_widget">
@@ -40670,53 +42747,39 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_new">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkWindow, which is a toplevel window that can
-contain other widgets. Nearly always, the type of the window should
-be #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL. If you're implementing something like a
-popup menu from scratch (which is a bad idea, just use #GtkMenu),
-you might use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP. #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP is not for
-dialogs, though in some other toolkits dialogs are called "popups".
-In GTK+, #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP means a pop-up menu or pop-up tooltip.
-On X11, popup windows are not controlled by the &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;.
+Sets whether the file chooser should display a stock label with the name of
+the file that is being previewed; the default is %TRUE. Applications that
+want to draw the whole preview area themselves should set this to %FALSE and
+display the name themselves in their preview widget.
-If you simply want an undecorated window (no window borders), use
-gtk_window_set_decorated(), don't use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP.
+See also: gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> type of window
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_label">
+<parameter_description> whether to display a stock label with the name of the previewed file
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkWindow.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_connect_proxy">
+<function name="gtk_layout_thaw">
<description>
-Connects a widget to an action object as a proxy. Synchronises
-various properties of the action with the widget (such as label
-text, icon, tooltip, etc), and attaches a callback so that the
-action gets activated when the proxy widget does.
-
-If the widget is already connected to an action, it is disconnected
-first.
-
-Since: 2.4
+This is a deprecated function, it doesn't do anything useful.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> the proxy widget
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40771,18 +42834,16 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_homogeneous_tabs">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_prefix">
<description>
-Sets whether the tabs must have all the same size or not.
+Requests a prefix insertion.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="homogeneous">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if all tabs should be the same size.
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40858,50 +42919,19 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_stock">
+<function name="GtkPlug">
<description>
-Inserts a stock item at the specified position of the toolbar. If
- stock_id is not a known stock item ID, it's inserted verbatim,
-except that underscores used to mark mnemonics are removed.
-
- callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use the GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC() to cast the function to #GtkSignalFunc.
-
+Gets emitted when the plug becomes embedded in a socket
+and when the embedding ends.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> The id of the stock item you want to insert
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> The text in the tooltip of the toolbar button
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> The private text of the tooltip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> The callback called when the toolbar button is clicked.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data passed to callback
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> The position the button shall be inserted at.
--1 means at the end.
+<parameter name="plug">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal was emitted
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the inserted widget
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_right_margin">
@@ -40998,60 +43028,15 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_diamond">
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_get_default_mod_mask">
<description>
-Draws a diamond in the given rectangle on @window using the given
-parameters.
+Gets the value set by gtk_accelerator_set_default_mod_mask().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the default accelerator modifier mask
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_cursor">
@@ -41098,28 +43083,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter_from_string">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_header_image">
<description>
-Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path_string, if it
-exists. Otherwise, @iter is left invalid and %FALSE is returned.
+Gets the header image for @page.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path_string">
-<parameter_description> A string representation of a #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
+<return> the header image for @page, or %NULL
+if there's no header image for the page.
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -41140,6 +43123,26 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_number_up_layout">
+<description>
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="number_up_layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNumberUpLayout value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step">
<description>
Sets the fraction of total progress bar length to move the
@@ -41205,55 +43208,55 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_hide">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_title">
<description>
-Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
-hidden (invisible to the user).
+Sets the title of the @tree_column. If a custom widget has been set, then
+this value is ignored.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> The title of the @tree_column.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_sensitive">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_tag_table">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the action itself is sensitive.
+Get the #GtkTextTagTable associated with this buffer.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the action itself is sensitive.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> the buffer's tag table
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_recent_chooser_install_properties">
+<function name="gtk_ruler_get_metric">
<description>
-Installs the necessary properties for a class implementing
-#GtkRecentChooser. A #GtkParamSpecOverride property is installed
-for each property, using the values from the #GtkRecentChooserProp
-enumeration. The caller must make sure itself that the enumeration
-values don't collide with some other property values they
-are using.
+Gets the units used for a #GtkRuler. See gtk_ruler_set_metric().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="klass">
-<parameter_description> the class structure for a type deriving from #GObject
+<parameter name="ruler">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRuler
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the units currently used for @ruler
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_frame_set_label_widget">
@@ -41311,7 +43314,7 @@
Draws an arrow in the given rectangle on @window using the given
parameters. @arrow_type determines the direction of the arrow.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_arrow() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_arrow() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41359,6 +43362,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_face_list">
+<description>
+This returns the #GtkTreeView which lists all styles available for
+the selected font. For example, 'Regular', 'Bold', etc.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #GtkWidget.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_font_button_set_use_size">
<description>
If @use_size is %TRUE, the font name will be written using the selected size.
@@ -41384,7 +43406,7 @@
Obtains the menu item which was constructed from the first
#GtkItemFactoryEntry with the given @action.
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41420,21 +43442,30 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_label">
+<function name="gtk_container_remove">
<description>
-Return value: The label, or %NULL
+Removes @widget from @container. @widget must be inside @container.
+Note that @container will own a reference to @widget, and that this
+may be the last reference held; so removing a widget from its
+container can destroy that widget. If you want to use @widget
+again, you need to add a reference to it while it's not inside
+a container, using g_object_ref(). If you don't want to use @widget
+again it's usually more efficient to simply destroy it directly
+using gtk_widget_destroy() since this will remove it from the
+container and help break any circular reference count cycles.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a current child of @container
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The label, or %NULL
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_context_get_pango_fontmap">
@@ -41454,22 +43485,30 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_width">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_before">
<description>
-Obtains the width of the #GtkPrintContext, in pixels.
+Inserts a new row before @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will
+be appended to the end of the list. @iter will be changed to point to this
+new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
+values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sibling">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the width of @context
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_set_editable">
@@ -41477,7 +43516,7 @@
Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
widget or not.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_editable_set_editable() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_set_editable() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41550,8 +43589,7 @@
<description>
Whether to show recently used resources prepended by a unique number.
-Do not use this function: use gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers()
-instead.
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers() instead.
Since: 2.10
@@ -41569,20 +43607,20 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_state">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_number_up">
<description>
-This function is for use in widget implementations. Sets the state
-of a widget (insensitive, prelighted, etc.) Usually you should set
-the state using wrapper functions such as gtk_widget_set_sensitive().
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="state">
-<parameter_description> new state for @widget
+<parameter name="number_up">
+<parameter_description> the number of pages per sheet
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -41634,6 +43672,27 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_deiconify">
+<description>
+Asks to deiconify (i.e. unminimize) the specified @window. Note
+that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely deiconified
+afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or &lt;link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;) could iconify it
+again before your code which assumes deiconification gets to run.
+
+You can track iconification via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_accel_map_unlock_path">
<description>
Undoes the last call to gtk_accel_map_lock_path() on this @accel_path.
@@ -41651,6 +43710,35 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_column">
+<description>
+If you only plan to have simple (text-only) tooltips on full rows, you
+can use this function to have #GtkTreeView handle these automatically
+for you. @column should be set to the column in @tree_view's model
+containing the tooltip texts, or -1 to disable this feature.
+
+When enabled, #GtkWidget::has-tooltip will be set to %TRUE and
+ tree_view will connect a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip signal handler.
+
+Note that the signal handler sets the text with gtk_tooltip_set_markup(),
+so &amp;, &lt;, etc have to be escaped in the text.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> an integer, which is a valid column number for @tree_view's model
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_im_context_set_client_window">
<description>
Set the client window for the input context; this is the
@@ -41697,6 +43785,23 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_get_model">
+<description>
+Return value: the model
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="reference">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the model
+
+Since: 2.8
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_parent">
<description>
This function is useful only when implementing subclasses of
@@ -41742,10 +43847,25 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_slider">
+<function name="gtk_get_event_widget">
<description>
-Draws a slider in the given rectangle on @window using the
-given style and orientation.
+If @event is %NULL or the event was not associated with any widget,
+Return value: the widget that originally received @event, or %NULL
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the widget that originally received @event, or %NULL
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_paint_box">
+<description>
+Draws a box on @window with the given parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41762,7 +43882,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> a shadow
+<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="area">
@@ -41779,23 +43899,19 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+<parameter_description> x origin of the box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+<parameter_description> y origin of the box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+<parameter_description> the width of the box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the orientation to be used
+<parameter_description> the height of the box
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -41819,7 +43935,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_model_row_deleted">
<description>
-Emits the "row_deleted" signal on @tree_model. This should be called by
+Emits the "row-deleted" signal on @tree_model. This should be called by
models after a row has been removed. The location pointed to by @path
should be the location that the row previously was at. It may not be a
valid location anymore.
@@ -41919,54 +44035,45 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_logo_icon_name">
+<function name="_gtk_recent_chooser_get_recent_manager">
<description>
-Sets the pixbuf to be displayed as logo in
-the about dialog. If it is %NULL, the default
-window icon set with gtk_window_set_default_icon()
-will be used.
+Gets the #GtkRecentManager used by @chooser.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name, or %NULL
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the recent manager for @chooser.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_system_remove_bookmark">
+<function name="gtk_image_new_from_animation">
<description>
-Removes a bookmark folder from the user's bookmarks list. If the operation
-succeeds, the "bookmarks_changed" signal will be emitted. If you try to remove
-a @path which does not exist in the bookmarks list, the operation will fail
-and the @error will be set to GTK_FILE_SYSTEM_ERROR_NONEXISTENT.
+Creates a #GtkImage displaying the given animation.
+The #GtkImage does not assume a reference to the
+animation; you still need to unref it if you own references.
+#GtkImage will add its own reference rather than adopting yours.
+
+Note that the animation frames are shown using a timeout with
+#G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT. When using animations to indicate busyness,
+keep in mind that the animation will only be shown if the main loop
+is not busy with something that has a higher priority.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_system">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> path of the bookmark to remove
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> an animation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> TRUE if the operation succeeds, FALSE otherwise. In the latter
-case, the @error value will be set.
+<return> a new #GtkImage widget
</return>
</function>
@@ -41978,10 +44085,10 @@
To do this, you can use gtk_tree_row_reference_new().
To free the return value, use:
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+|[
g_list_foreach (list, gtk_tree_path_free, NULL);
g_list_free (list);
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
</description>
@@ -41997,30 +44104,21 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_widget">
+<function name="gtk_printer_is_paused">
<description>
-Adds a widget to the end of the given toolbar.
+Return value: %TRUE if @printer is paused
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget to add to the toolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> used for context-sensitive help about this toolbar element.
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @printer is paused
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_factory_lookup_default">
@@ -42063,6 +44161,30 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="_gtk_key_hash_lookup_keyval">
+<description>
+Looks up the best matching entry or entries in the hash table for a
+given keyval/modifiers pair. It's better to use
+_gtk_key_hash_lookup() if you have the original #GdkEventKey
+available. The results are sorted so that entries with less
+modifiers come before entries with more modifiers.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="key_hash">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkKeyHash
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEvent
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #GSList of all matching entries.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tooltips_get_info_from_tip_window">
<description>
Determines the tooltips and the widget they belong to from the window in
@@ -42097,28 +44219,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_reorderable">
-<description>
-Gets whether the tab can be reordered via drag and drop or not.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a child #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the tab is reorderable.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_set_select_function">
<description>
Sets the selection function. If set, this function is called before any node
@@ -42197,42 +44297,28 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_custom">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter">
<description>
-Adds rule to a filter that allows files based on a custom callback
-function. The bitfield @needed which is passed in provides information
-about what sorts of information that the filter function needs;
-this allows GTK+ to avoid retrieving expensive information when
-it isn't needed by the filter.
+Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="needed">
-<parameter_description> bitfield of flags indicating the information that the custom
-filter function needs.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> callback function; if the function returns %TRUE, then
-the file will be displayed.
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @func
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="notify">
-<parameter_description> function to call to free @data when it is no longer needed.
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_layout_get_cells">
@@ -42354,6 +44440,38 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_request_uris">
+<description>
+Requests the contents of the clipboard as URIs. When the URIs are
+later received @callback will be called.
+
+The @uris parameter to @callback will contain the resulting array of
+URIs if the request succeeded, or %NULL if it failed. This could happen
+for various reasons, in particular if the clipboard was empty or if the
+contents of the clipboard could not be converted into URI form.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> a function to call when the URIs are received,
+or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called
+one way or the other.)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data to pass to @callback.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_create_pango_layout">
<description>
Creates a new #PangoLayout with the appropriate font map,
@@ -42425,20 +44543,18 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_copy">
+<function name="GtkToggleToolButton">
<description>
-Makes a copy of a #GtkSelectionData structure and its data.
-
+Emitted whenever the toggle tool button changes state.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+<parameter name="toggle_tool_button">
+<parameter_description> the object that emitted the signal
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a pointer to a copy of @data.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_remove_accel_group">
@@ -42475,20 +44591,36 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_save_fd">
+<function name="gtk_selection_convert">
<description>
-Filedescriptor variant of gtk_accel_map_save().
+Requests the contents of a selection. When received,
+a "selection-received" signal will be generated.
-Note that the file descriptor will not be closed by this function.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fd">
-<parameter_description> a valid writable file descriptor
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> The widget which acts as requestor
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> Which selection to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> Form of information desired (e.g., STRING)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="time_">
+<parameter_description> Time of request (usually of triggering event)
+ In emergency, you could use #GDK_CURRENT_TIME
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if requested succeeded. %FALSE if we could not process
+request. (e.g., there was already a request in process for
+this widget).
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_image_set_from_animation">
@@ -42534,35 +44666,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_markup">
-<description>
-Parses @str which is marked up with the &lt;link
-linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango text markup language&lt;/link&gt;, setting the
-label's text and attribute list based on the parse results. If the @str is
-external data, you may need to escape it with g_markup_escape_text() or
-g_markup_printf_escaped()&lt;!-- --&gt;:
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
-char *markup;
-&lt;!-- --&gt;
-markup = g_markup_printf_escaped ("&lt;span style=\"italic\"&gt;&percnt;s&lt;/span&gt;", str);
-gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (label), markup);
-g_free (markup);
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="str">
-<parameter_description> a markup string (see &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango markup format&lt;/link&gt;)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_set_skip_pager_hint">
<description>
Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to display
@@ -42587,6 +44690,20 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_test_register_all_types">
+<description>
+Force registration of all core Gtk+ and Gdk object types.
+This allowes to refer to any of those object types via
+g_type_from_name() after calling this function.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_clear">
<description>
Resets the image to be empty.
@@ -42752,7 +44869,7 @@
gtk_item_factory_popup_with_data(). This data is available until the menu
is popped down again.
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42797,20 +44914,19 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_unselect_path">
+<function name="gtk_drag_source_set_icon_stock">
<description>
-Unselects the row at @path.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
+to a stock icon.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath to be unselected.
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the ID of the stock icon to use
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -42837,7 +44953,7 @@
not be able to exchange tabs with any other notebook.
Since: 2.10
-Deprecated:2.12: use gtk_notebook_set_group() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.12: use gtk_notebook_set_group() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42875,10 +44991,16 @@
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_new_with_dialog">
<description>
-Creates a #GtkFileChooserButton widget which uses @dialog as it's
-file-picking window. Note that @dialog must be a #GtkDialog (or
-subclass) which implements the #GtkFileChooser interface and must
-not have %GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT set.
+Creates a #GtkFileChooserButton widget which uses @dialog as its
+file-picking window.
+
+Note that @dialog must be a #GtkDialog (or subclass) which
+implements the #GtkFileChooser interface and must not have
+%GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT set.
+
+Also note that the dialog needs to have its confirmative button
+added with response %GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT or %GTK_RESPONSE_OK in
+order for the button to take over the file selected in the dialog.
</description>
@@ -42943,29 +45065,40 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_model">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format">
<description>
-Sets the model used by @combo_box to be @model. Will unset a previously set
-model (if applicable). If model is %NULL, then it will unset the model.
-
-Note that this function does not clear the cell renderers, you have to
-call gtk_cell_layout_clear() yourself if you need to set up different
-cell renderers for the new model.
+This function registers a rich text serialization @function along with
+its @mime_type with the passed @buffer.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
+<parameter name="mime_type">
+<parameter_description> the format's mime-type
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="function">
+<parameter_description> the serialize function to register
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> %function's user_data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data_destroy">
+<parameter_description> a function to call when @user_data is no longer needed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
+format's mime-type.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_action">
@@ -42992,43 +45125,53 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_copyright">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_width_chars">
<description>
-Sets the copyright string to display in the about dialog.
-This should be a short string of one or two lines.
+Retrieves the desired width of @label, in characters. See
+gtk_label_set_width_chars().
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="copyright">
-<parameter_description> the copyright string
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the width of the label in characters.
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_name">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable">
<description>
-Gets the name of the #GtkPaperSize.
+This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder
+models that support the #GtkDragSourceIface and the
+#GtkDragDestIface. Both #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support
+these. If @reorderable is %TRUE, then the user can reorder the
+model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to
+these changes by connecting to the model's row_inserted and
+row_deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up
+the tree view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and
+drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.
+This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any
+reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably
+handle drag and drop manually.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="reorderable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the tree can be reordered.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the name of @size
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_previous_alpha">
@@ -43050,6 +45193,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_button_sensitivity">
+<description>
+Return Value: %GTK_SENSITIVITY_ON if the dropdown button
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %GTK_SENSITIVITY_ON if the dropdown button
+is sensitive when the model is empty, %GTK_SENSITIVITY_OFF
+if the button is always insensitive or
+%GTK_SENSITIVITY_AUTO if it is only sensitive as long as
+the model has one item to be selected.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_page_setup_new_from_file">
<description>
Reads the page setup from the file @file_name. Returns a
@@ -43090,7 +45254,7 @@
The operation of the @mouse_button and the @time_ parameter is the same
as the @button and @activation_time parameters for gtk_menu_popup().
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -43287,37 +45451,54 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_action">
+<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_has_default_sort_func">
<description>
-Returns: the action that a widget is a proxy for, or
+Return value: %TRUE, if the model has a default sort function
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="sortable">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSortable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the action that a widget is a proxy for, or
-%NULL, if it is not attached to an action.
+<return> %TRUE, if the model has a default sort function
+</return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.10
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_add_tearoffs">
+<description>
+Return value: whether tearoff menu items are added
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether tearoff menu items are added
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_digits">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_preview_text">
<description>
-Fetches the precision of @spin_button. See gtk_spin_button_set_digits().
+The text returned is the preview text used to show how the selected
+font looks.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current precision
+<return> pointer to the preview text string. This string
+points to internally allocated storage in the widget and must not
+be freed, modified or stored.
</return>
</function>
@@ -43355,6 +45536,20 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_clear">
+<description>
+Removes all rows from @tree_store
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_visible_range">
<description>
Sets @start_path and @end_path to be the first and last visible path.
@@ -43399,47 +45594,21 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_append_item">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_new_with_model">
<description>
-Inserts a new item into the toolbar. You must specify the position
-in the toolbar where it will be inserted.
-
- callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use the GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC() to cast the function to #GtkSignalFunc.
+Creates a new #GtkIconView widget with the model @model.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> give your toolbar button a label.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> a string that appears when the user holds the mouse over this item.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
-<parameter_description> use with #GtkTipsQuery.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> the function to be executed when the button is pressed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to any data you wish to be passed to the callback.
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> The model.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new toolbar item as a #GtkWidget.
+<return> A newly created #GtkIconView widget.
+
+Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -43520,18 +45689,62 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_separator_tool_item_new">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_mnemonic_modifier">
<description>
-Create a new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
-
+Return value: the modifier mask used to activate
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
+<return> the modifier mask used to activate
+mnemonics on this window.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions_full">
+<description>
+This variant of gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions() adds a
+#GDestroyNotify callback for @user_data.
Since: 2.4
-</return>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> the number of entries
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
+no action should be activated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="on_change">
+<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> destroy notification callback for @user_data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_key_hash_lookup">
@@ -43572,19 +45785,20 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_value">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new_merge_id">
<description>
-Gets the current value of the range.
-
+Return value: an unused merge id.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> current value of the range.
+<return> an unused merge id.
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
@@ -43818,30 +46032,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_targets_include_uri">
-<description>
-Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
-provide an uri list.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom&lt;!-- --&gt;s
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> the length of @targets
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for uri lists,
-otherwise %FALSE.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_group_set_visible">
<description>
Changes the visible of @action_group.
@@ -43973,21 +46163,34 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_margin">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_n_pages">
<description>
-Return value: the space at the borders
+Sets the number of pages in the document.
+
+This &lt;emphasis&gt;must&lt;/emphasis&gt; be set to a positive number
+before the rendering starts. It may be set in a
+#GtkPrintOperation::begin-print signal hander.
+
+Note that the page numbers passed to the
+#GtkPrintOperation::request-page-setup
+and #GtkPrintOperation::draw-page signals are 0-based, i.e. if
+the user chooses to print all pages, the last ::draw-page signal
+will be for page @n_pages - 1.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_pages">
+<parameter_description> the number of pages
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the space at the borders
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_binding_reset_parsed">
@@ -44001,20 +46204,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_reparse_all">
-<description>
-If the modification time on any previously read file for the
-default #GtkSettings has changed, discard all style information
-and then reread all previously read RC files.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the files were reread.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_container_class_install_child_property">
<description>
Installs a child property on a container class.
@@ -44118,6 +46307,48 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_gicon">
+<description>
+Retrieves the #GIcon being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
+The storage type of the status icon must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_GICON (see gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()).
+The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
+returned #GIcon.
+
+If this function fails, @icon is left unchanged;
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the displayed icon, or %NULL if the image is empty
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_new">
+<description>
+The @title is used to set the title of the #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+returned. This #GtkDialog is specifically catered with widgets for
+selecting a font from those installed.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a string
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkFontSelectionDialog.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_unset">
<description>
Removes any value associated with @key.
@@ -44174,6 +46405,34 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_layout_pack_start">
+<description>
+Packs the @cell into the beginning of @cell_layout. If @expand is %FALSE,
+then the @cell is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
+is divided evenly between cells for which @expand is %TRUE.
+
+Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell_layout">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @cell_layout.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="GtkBuilderConnectFunc">
<description>
This is the signature of a function used to connect signals. It is used
@@ -44237,18 +46496,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_active">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_has_key">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
+Return value: %TRUE, if @key has a value
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
+<return> %TRUE, if @key has a value
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -44307,29 +46572,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_get_label">
-<description>
-Fetches the text from the label of the expander, as set by
-gtk_expander_set_label(). If the label text has not
-been set the return value will be %NULL. This will be the
-case if you create an empty button with gtk_button_new() to
-use as a container.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="expander">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The text of the label widget. This string is owned
-by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_name">
<description>
Sets the name to display in the about dialog.
@@ -44337,7 +46579,7 @@
Since: 2.6
- Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_about_dialog_set_program_name() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_about_dialog_set_program_name() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44410,50 +46652,39 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_width">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_reset_default_sort_func">
<description>
-Gets the paper width of the #GtkPaperSize, in
-units of @unit.
-
+This resets the default sort function to be in the 'unsorted' state. That
+is, it is in the same order as the child model. It will re-sort the model
+to be in the same order as the child model only if the #GtkTreeModelSort
+is in 'unsorted' state.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the paper width
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag_by_name">
+<function name="gtk_size_group_set_ignore_hidden">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_tag_table_lookup() on the buffer's tag table to
-get a #GtkTextTag, then calls gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag().
+Sets whether unmapped widgets should be ignored when
+calculating the size.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> name of a named #GtkTextTag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> one bound of range to be tagged
+<parameter name="size_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> other bound of range to be tagged
+<parameter name="ignore_hidden">
+<parameter_description> whether unmapped widgets should be ignored
+when calculating the size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -44484,7 +46715,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_model_row_changed">
<description>
-Emits the "row_changed" signal on @tree_model.
+Emits the "row-changed" signal on @tree_model.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44522,21 +46753,24 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_row_spacing">
+<function name="GtkUIManager">
<description>
-Sets the ::row-spacing property which specifies the space
-which is inserted between the rows of the icon view.
+The post_activate signal is emitted just after the @action
+is activated.
-Since: 2.6
+This is intended for applications to get notification
+just after any action is activated.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="uimanager">
+<parameter_description> the ui manager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="row_spacing">
-<parameter_description> the row spacing
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -44639,58 +46873,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_layout">
-<description>
-Draws a layout on @window using the given parameters.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_text">
-<parameter_description> whether to use the text or foreground
-graphics context of @style
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> the layout to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_pixbuf">
<description>
Retrieves the source pixbuf, or %NULL if none is set.
@@ -44733,8 +46915,8 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_iter_free">
<description>
-Frees an iterator that has been allocated on the heap. This function is
-mainly used for language bindings.
+Frees an iterator that has been allocated by gtk_tree_iter_copy().
+This function is mainly used for language bindings.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44746,6 +46928,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_editable_paste_clipboard">
+<description>
+Pastes the content of the clipboard to the current position of the
+cursor in the editable.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_set_add_tearoffs">
<description>
Sets the "add_tearoffs" property, which controls whether menus
@@ -44803,8 +47000,9 @@
#GtkWindow; because toplevel windows can't leave space outside,
they leave the space inside. The border is added on all sides of
the container. To add space to only one side, one approach is to
-create a #GtkAlignment widget, call gtk_widget_set_usize() to give
-it a size, and place it on the side of the container as a spacer.
+create a #GtkAlignment widget, call gtk_widget_set_size_request()
+to give it a size, and place it on the side of the container as
+a spacer.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -44920,21 +47118,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_copy">
<description>
-Returns: the icon name or %NULL if the window has
+Copies an existing #GtkPaperSize.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="other">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the icon name or %NULL if the window has
-no themed icon
+<return> a copy of @other
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -44958,6 +47156,30 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_hsv_get_metrics">
+<description>
+Queries the size and ring width of an HSV color selector.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="hsv">
+<parameter_description> An HSV color selector.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> Return value for the diameter of the hue ring.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ring_width">
+<parameter_description> Return value for the width of the hue ring.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_unset_model_drag_source">
<description>
Undoes the effect of gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_source().
@@ -44974,18 +47196,20 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_unset_rows_drag_dest">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_pixels_above_lines">
<description>
-Undoes the effect of gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_dest().
+Gets the default number of pixels to put above paragraphs.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> default number of pixels above paragraphs
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_expander_column">
@@ -45107,6 +47331,32 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tooltip_set_icon_from_icon_name">
+<description>
+Sets the icon of the tooltip (which is in front of the text) to be
+the icon indicated by @icon_name with the size indicated
+by @size. If @icon_name is %NULL, the image will be hidden.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_toggle_button_get_mode">
<description>
Retrieves whether the button is displayed as a separate indicator
@@ -45145,24 +47395,18 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_example_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_container_child_type">
<description>
-Gets the name of an icon that is representative of the
-current theme (for instance, to use when presenting
-a list of themes to the user.)
-
+Return value: a #GType.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the name of an example icon or %NULL.
-Free with g_free().
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> a #GType.
</return>
</function>
@@ -45184,21 +47428,37 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_set_by_class">
+<function name="gtk_widget_grab_focus">
<description>
-This function returns the binding set named after the type name of
-the passed in class structure. New binding sets are created on
-demand by this function.
+Causes @widget to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
+inside. @widget must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
+something like #GtkFrame won't work. (More precisely, it must have the
+%GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set.)
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_get_default_widget">
+<description>
+Returns: the default widget, or %NULL if there is none.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="object_class">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GtkObject class
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the binding set corresponding to @object_class
+<return> the default widget, or %NULL if there is none.
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -45384,6 +47644,9 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if tooltips are enabled
+
+Deprecated: 2.14: The toolkit-wide #GtkSettings:gtk-enable-tooltips property
+is now used instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -45402,24 +47665,41 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_ruler_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkRuler with the given orientation.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the ruler's orientation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkRuler.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_wrap_width">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_save_fd">
<description>
-Returns: the wrap width.
+Filedescriptor variant of gtk_accel_map_save().
+
+Note that the file descriptor will not be closed by this function.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="fd">
+<parameter_description> a valid writable file descriptor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the wrap width.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_get_text">
@@ -45481,6 +47761,54 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_drag_dest_set">
+<description>
+Sets a widget as a potential drop destination, and adds default behaviors.
+
+The default behaviors listed in @flags have an effect similar
+to installing default handlers for the widget's drag-and-drop signals
+(#GtkWidget:drag-motion, #GtkWidget:drag-drop, ...). They all exist
+for convenience. When passing #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL for instance it is
+sufficient to connect to the widget's #GtkWidget::drag-data-received
+signal to get primitive, but consistent drag-and-drop support.
+
+Things become more complicated when you try to preview the dragged data,
+as described in the documentation for #GtkWidget:drag-motion. The default
+behaviors described by @flags make some assumptions, that can conflict
+with your own signal handlers. For instance #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_DROP causes
+invokations of gdk_drag_status() in the context of #GtkWidget:drag-motion,
+and invokations of gtk_drag_finish() in #GtkWidget:drag-data-received.
+Especially the later is dramatic, when your own #GtkWidget:drag-motion
+handler calls gtk_drag_get_data() to inspect the dragged data.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> which types of default drag behavior to use
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to an array of #GtkTargetEntry&lt;!-- --&gt;s indicating
+the drop types that this @widget will accept. Later you can access the list
+with gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list() and gtk_drag_dest_find_target().
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> the number of entries in @targets.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="actions">
+<parameter_description> a bitmask of possible actions for a drop onto this @widget.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_create_tag">
<description>
@@ -45625,7 +47953,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_move_mark">
<description>
-Moves @mark to the new location @where. Emits the "mark_set" signal
+Moves @mark to the new location @where. Emits the "mark-set" signal
as notification of the move.
</description>
@@ -45727,6 +48055,24 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs">
+<description>
+Sets whether to show the tabs for the notebook or not.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="show_tabs">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the tabs should be shown.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement">
<description>
Unsets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
@@ -45766,32 +48112,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_line_wrap">
-<description>
-Toggles line wrapping within the #GtkLabel widget. %TRUE makes it break
-lines if text exceeds the widget's size. %FALSE lets the text get cut off
-by the edge of the widget if it exceeds the widget size.
-
-Note that setting line wrapping to %TRUE does not make the label
-wrap at its parent container's width, because GTK+ widgets
-conceptually can't make their requisition depend on the parent
-container's size. For a label that wraps at a specific position,
-set the label's width using gtk_widget_set_size_request().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wrap">
-<parameter_description> the setting
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_column_spacing">
<description>
Return value: the space between columns
@@ -45829,42 +48149,41 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_has_tag">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_justify">
<description>
-Return value: whether @iter is tagged with @tag
+Sets the alignment of the lines in the text of the label relative to
+each other. %GTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT is the default value when the
+widget is first created with gtk_label_new(). If you instead want
+to set the alignment of the label as a whole, use
+gtk_misc_set_alignment() instead. gtk_label_set_justify() has no
+effect on labels containing only a single line.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
+<parameter name="jtype">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkJustification
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter is tagged with @tag
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new_text">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_next">
<description>
-Convenience function which constructs a new editable text combo box, which
-is a #GtkComboBoxEntry just displaying strings. If you use this function to
-create a text combo box, you should only manipulate its data source with
-the following convenience functions: gtk_combo_box_append_text(),
-gtk_combo_box_insert_text(), gtk_combo_box_prepend_text() and
-gtk_combo_box_remove_text().
-
+Moves the @path to point to the next node at the current depth.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new text #GtkComboBoxEntry.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_pixbuf">
@@ -45998,7 +48317,7 @@
<description>
Deletes all widgets constructed from the specified path.
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -46097,29 +48416,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_page_ranges">
-<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_RANGES.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="num_ranges">
-<parameter_description> return location for the length of the returned array
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an array of #GtkPageRange&lt;!-- --&gt;s. Use g_free()
-to free the array when it is no longer needed.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_item_factory_add_foreign">
<description>
Installs an accelerator for @accel_widget in @accel_group, that causes
@@ -46302,18 +48598,46 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_editable_remove_widget">
+<function name="gtk_builder_add_objects_from_string">
<description>
-Emits the #GtkCellEditable::remove-widget signal.
+Parses a string containing a &lt;link linkend="BUILDER-UI"&gt;GtkBuilder
+UI definition&lt;/link&gt; building only the requested objects and merges
+them with the current contents of @builder.
+
+&lt;note&gt;&lt;para&gt;
+If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
+its child (for instance a #GtkTreeView that depends on its
+#GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitely list all of them in @object_ids.
+&lt;/para&gt;&lt;/note&gt;
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_editable">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> the string to parse
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="length">
+<parameter_description> the length of @buffer (may be -1 if @buffer is nul-terminated)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="object_ids">
+<parameter_description> nul-terminated array of objects to build
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list">
@@ -46404,22 +48728,24 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_group_list_actions">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_visible_horizontal">
<description>
-Lists the actions in the action group.
+Sets whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked horizontally.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="visible_horizontal">
+<parameter_description> Whether @tool_item is visible when in horizontal mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an allocated list of the action objects in the action group
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_info_match">
@@ -46529,6 +48855,26 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_set_screen">
+<description>
+Sets the screen to show windows of the #GtkMountOperation on.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_paper_size_and_default_margins">
<description>
Sets the paper size of the #GtkPageSetup and modifies
@@ -46550,18 +48896,29 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_get_alpha">
+<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder">
<description>
-Return value: an integer between 0 and 65535.
+Adds a folder to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file chooser.
+Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="file">
+<parameter_description> file for the folder to add
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an integer between 0 and 65535.
+<return> %TRUE if the folder could be added successfully, %FALSE
+otherwise.
Since: 2.4
</return>
@@ -46592,6 +48949,23 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_type_class">
+<description>
+Returns: pointer to the class.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkType.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> pointer to the class.
+
+Deprecated: 2.14: Use g_type_class_peek() or g_type_class_ref() instead.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_left_margin">
<description>
Gets the left margin in units of @unit.
@@ -46614,26 +48988,24 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_bottom_margin">
+<function name="gtk_icon_factory_add_default">
<description>
-Gets the default bottom margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
+Adds an icon factory to the list of icon factories searched by
+gtk_style_lookup_icon_set(). This means that, for example,
+gtk_image_new_from_stock() will be able to find icons in @factory.
+There will normally be an icon factory added for each library or
+application that comes with icons. The default icon factories
+can be overridden by themes.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="factory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default bottom margin
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_targets_include_text">
@@ -46684,6 +49056,38 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_lower">
+<description>
+Sets the minimum value of the adjustment.
+
+When setting multiple adjustment properties via their individual
+setters, multiple "changed" signals will be emitted. However, since
+the emission of the "changed" signal is tied to the emission of the
+"GObject::notify" signals of the changed properties, it's possible
+to compress the "changed" signals into one by calling
+g_object_freeze_notify() and g_object_thaw_notify() around the
+calls to the individual setters.
+
+Alternatively, using a single g_object_set() for all the properties
+to change, or using gtk_adjustment_configure() has the same effect
+of compressing "changed" emissions.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="lower">
+<parameter_description> the new minimum value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_group_add_toggle_actions">
<description>
This is a convenience function to create a number of toggle actions and add them
@@ -46717,21 +49121,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_visible">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_media_type">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the status icon is visible
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE.
+
+The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.
+&lt;!-- FIXME link here --&gt;
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="media_type">
+<parameter_description> the media type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the status icon is visible
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_label_text">
@@ -46751,7 +49161,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>value: the text of the tab label, or %NULL if the
+<return> the text of the tab label, or %NULL if the
tab label widget is not a #GtkLabel. The
string is owned by the widget and must not
be freed.
@@ -46833,6 +49243,34 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_editable_get_selection_bounds">
+<description>
+Retrieves the selection bound of the editable. @start_pos will be filled
+with the start of the selection and @end_pos with end. If no text was selected
+both will be identical and %FALSE will be returned. Note that positions are
+specified in characters, not bytes.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start_pos">
+<parameter_description> beginning of selection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end_pos">
+<parameter_description> end of selection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if an area is selected, %FALSE otherwise
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_cell_render">
<description>
Renders the cell contained by #tree_column. This is used primarily by the
@@ -46935,19 +49373,42 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_selection">
+<function name="gtk_plug_get_embedded">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkTreeSelection associated with @tree_view.
+Determines whether the plug is embedded in a socket.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+<parameter name="plug">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkTreeSelection object.
+<return> %TRUE if the plug is embedded in a socket
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_uris">
+<description>
+Gets the contents of the selection data as array of URIs.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> if the selection data contains a list of
+URIs, a newly allocated %NULL-terminated string array
+containing the URIs, otherwise %NULL. If the result is
+non-%NULL it must be freed with g_strfreev().
+
+Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
@@ -46987,23 +49448,18 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_path">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_destroy_with_parent">
<description>
-Gets the current folder of @chooser as #GtkFilePath.
-See gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri().
-
+Return value: %TRUE if the window will be destroyed with its transient parent.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkFilePath for the current folder.
-Free with gtk_file_path_free().
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> %TRUE if the window will be destroyed with its transient parent.
</return>
</function>
@@ -47012,7 +49468,7 @@
Draws a check button indicator in the given rectangle on @window with
the given parameters.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_check() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_check() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -47189,7 +49645,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> a stock icon name, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a stock id, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
@@ -47253,24 +49709,76 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_remove_page">
<description>
-Initializes @iter with the first iterator in the tree (the one at the path
-"0") and returns %TRUE. Returns %FALSE if the tree is empty.
+Removes a page from the notebook given its index
+in the notebook.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_num">
+<parameter_description> the index of a notebook page, starting
+from 0. If -1, the last page will
+be removed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_tooltip_context">
+<description>
+This function is supposed to be used in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip
+signal handler for #GtkIconView. The @x, @y and @keyboard_tip values
+which are received in the signal handler, should be passed to this
+function without modification.
+
+The return value indicates whether there is an icon view item at the given
+coordinates (%TRUE) or not (%FALSE) for mouse tooltips. For keyboard
+tooltips the item returned will be the cursor item. When %TRUE, then any of
+ model, @path and @iter which have been provided will be set to point to
+that row and the corresponding model. @x and @y will always be converted
+to be relative to @icon_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> an #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyboard_tip">
+<parameter_description> whether this is a keyboard tooltip or not
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeModel or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreePath or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeIter or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
+<return> whether or not the given tooltip context points to a item
+
+Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -47297,12 +49805,31 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_calendar_get_detail_width_chars">
+<description>
+Queries the width of detail cells, in characters.
+See #GtkCalendar:detail-width-chars.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The width of detail cells, in characters.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_draw_shadow">
<description>
Draws a shadow around the given rectangle in @window
using the given style and state and shadow type.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_shadow() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_shadow() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -47342,6 +49869,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_gicon">
+<description>
+Creates a status icon displaying a #GIcon. If the icon is a
+themed icon, it will be updated when the theme changes.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_filter_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkFileFilter with no rules added to it.
@@ -47350,11 +49896,10 @@
gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type(), gtk_file_filter_add_pattern(),
or gtk_file_filter_add_custom(). To create a filter
that accepts any file, use:
-
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
-GtkFileFilter *filter = gtk_file_filter_new (&lt;!-- --&gt;);
+|[
+GtkFileFilter *filter = gtk_file_filter_new ();
gtk_file_filter_add_pattern (filter, "*");
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
</description>
@@ -47443,58 +49988,65 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_size_group_add_widget">
+<function name="gtk_test_init">
<description>
-Adds a widget to a #GtkSizeGroup. In the future, the requisition
-of the widget will be determined as the maximum of its requisition
-and the requisition of the other widgets in the size group.
-Whether this applies horizontally, vertically, or in both directions
-depends on the mode of the size group. See gtk_size_group_set_mode().
+This function is used to initialize a GTK+ test program.
-When the widget is destroyed or no longer referenced elsewhere, it will
-be removed from the size group.
+It will in turn call g_test_init() and gtk_init() to properly
+initialize the testing framework and graphical toolkit. It'll
+also set the program's locale to "C" and prevent loading of rc
+files and Gtk+ modules. This is done to make tets program
+environments as deterministic as possible.
+
+Like gtk_init() and g_test_init(), any known arguments will be
+processed and stripped from @argc and @argv.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
+<parameter name="argcp">
+<parameter_description> Address of the &lt;parameter&gt;argc&lt;/parameter&gt; parameter of the
+main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to add
+<parameter name="argvp">
+<parameter_description> Address of the &lt;parameter&gt;argv&lt;/parameter&gt; parameter of main().
+Any parameters understood by g_test_init() or gtk_init() are
+stripped before return.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> currently unused
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_from_key_file">
+<function name="gtk_size_group_add_widget">
<description>
-Reads a paper size from the group @group_name in the key file
- key_file
+Adds a widget to a #GtkSizeGroup. In the future, the requisition
+of the widget will be determined as the maximum of its requisition
+and the requisition of the other widgets in the size group.
+Whether this applies horizontally, vertically, or in both directions
+depends on the mode of the size group. See gtk_size_group_set_mode().
+When the widget is destroyed or no longer referenced elsewhere, it will
+be removed from the size group.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the papersize from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name ofthe group in the key file to read,
-or %NULL to read the first group
+<parameter name="size_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to add
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPaperSize object with the restored
-paper size, or %NULL if an error occurred.
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_text_column">
@@ -47579,14 +50131,41 @@
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the accel path for this action, or %NULL
+if none is set. The returned string is owned by GTK+
+and must not be freed or modified.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_view_forward_display_line">
+<description>
+Moves the given @iter forward by one display (wrapped) line.
+A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
+separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
+Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
+wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
+same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
+they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the accel path for this action, or %NULL
-if none is set. The returned string is owned by GTK+
-and must not be freed or modified.
+<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
</return>
</function>
@@ -47610,42 +50189,53 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_shell_cancel">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_group">
<description>
-Cancels the selection within the menu shell.
+Gets the current group identificator pointer for @notebook.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu_shell">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuShell
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the group identificator, or %NULL if none is set.
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accelerator_valid">
+<function name="_gtk_widget_get_pointer_window">
<description>
-Determines whether a given keyval and modifier mask constitute
-a valid keyboard accelerator. For example, the #GDK_a keyval
-plus #GDK_CONTROL_MASK is valid - this is a "Ctrl+a" accelerator.
-But, you can't, for instance, use the #GDK_Control_L keyval
-as an accelerator.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> a GDK keyval
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> modifier mask
+</parameters>
+<return> the pointer window set on the #GdkScreen @widget is attached
+to, or %NULL.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_current_page">
+<description>
+Return value: the index (starting from 0) of the current
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the accelerator is valid
+<return> the index (starting from 0) of the current
+page in the notebook. If the notebook has no pages, then
+-1 will be returned.
</return>
</function>
@@ -47710,6 +50300,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_display_name">
+<description>
+Gets the name of the resource. If none has been defined, the basename
+of the resource is obtained.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the display name of the resource. The returned string
+is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_get_position">
<description>
This function returns the position you need to pass to
@@ -47757,11 +50367,11 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="root_x">
-<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate of gravity-determined reference p\oint
+<parameter_description> return location for X coordinate of gravity-determined reference point
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="root_y">
-<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate of gravity-determined reference p\oint
+<parameter_description> return location for Y coordinate of gravity-determined reference point
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -47875,8 +50485,7 @@
destination and accept the target "GTK_NOTEBOOK_TAB". The notebook
will fill the selection with a GtkWidget** pointing to the child
widget that corresponds to the dropped tab.
-
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+|[
static void
on_drop_zone_drag_data_received (GtkWidget *widget,
GdkDragContext *context,
@@ -47896,7 +50505,7 @@
process_widget (*child);
gtk_container_remove (GTK_CONTAINER (notebook), *child);
}
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
If you want a notebook to accept drags from other widgets,
you will have to set your own DnD code to do it.
@@ -47921,25 +50530,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_mnemonic_modifier">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_label">
<description>
-Return value: the modifier mask used to activate
+Return value: The label, or %NULL
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the modifier mask used to activate
-mnemonics on this window.
+<return> The label, or %NULL
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
<function name="GtkActionGroup">
<description>
-The post_activate signal is emitted just after the @action in the
+The ::post-activate signal is emitted just after the @action in the
@action_group is activated
This is intended for #GtkUIManager to proxy the signal and provide global
@@ -47992,7 +50602,7 @@
manager&lt;/link&gt;) could stick it again. But normally the window will
end up stuck. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
-You can track stickiness via the "window_state_event" signal
+You can track stickiness via the "window-state-event" signal
on #GtkWidget.
@@ -48006,55 +50616,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_box">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_gicon">
<description>
-Draws a box on @window with the given parameters.
+Makes @status_icon display the #GIcon.
+See gtk_status_icon_new_from_gicon() for details.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the box
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the box
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> a GIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -48140,6 +50716,34 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_remove_item">
+<description>
+Removes a resource pointed by @uri from the recently used resources
+list handled by a recent manager.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> the URI of the item you wish to remove
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for a #GError, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the item pointed by @uri has been successfully
+removed by the recently used resources list, and %FALSE otherwise.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_use_preview_label">
<description>
Gets whether a stock label should be drawn with the name of the previewed
@@ -48235,29 +50839,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_reorder">
-<description>
-Reorders @store to follow the order indicated by @new_order. Note that
-this function only works with unsorted stores.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_order">
-<parameter_description> an array of integers mapping the new position of each child
-to its old position before the re-ordering,
-i.e. @new_order&lt;literal&gt;[newpos] = oldpos&lt;/literal&gt;.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_serialize_formats">
<description>
This function returns the rich text serialize formats registered
@@ -48344,23 +50925,19 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query">
+<function name="_gtk_widget_is_pointer_widget">
<description>
-Triggers a new tooltip query on @display, in order to update the current
-visible tooltip, or to show/hide the current tooltip. This function is
-useful to call when, for example, the state of the widget changed by a
-key press.
-
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return>%TRUE if the pointer window belongs to @widget.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_set_width_chars">
@@ -48383,27 +50960,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_system_model_get_path">
+<function name="gtk_orientable_set_orientation">
<description>
-Gets the path for a particular row in @model.
+Sets the orientation of the @orientable.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemModel
+<parameter name="orientable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkOrientable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row of @model
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the orientable's new orientation.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the path. This string is owned by @model and
-or freed. If you want to save the path for later use,
-you must make a copy, since the string may be freed
-on later changes to the file system.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_positions">
@@ -48480,6 +51054,33 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_editable_get_chars">
+<description>
+Retreives the content of the editable between @start and @end.
+Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> start of text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> end of text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a pointer to the contents of the widget as a
+string. This string is allocated by the #GtkEditable
+implementation and should be freed by the caller.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_mark_get_left_gravity">
<description>
Determines whether the mark has left gravity.
@@ -48515,21 +51116,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_not_found">
+<function name="gtk_range_set_increments">
<description>
-Sets whether @chooser should display the recently used resources that
-it didn't find. This only applies to local resources.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Sets the step and page sizes for the range.
+The step size is used when the user clicks the #GtkScrollbar
+arrows or moves #GtkScale via arrow keys. The page size
+is used for example when moving via Page Up or Page Down keys.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_not_found">
-<parameter_description> whether to show the local items we didn't find
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> step size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> page size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -48617,25 +51222,40 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_pixbuf">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_frame_dimensions">
<description>
-Creates a status icon displaying @pixbuf.
-
-The image will be scaled down to fit in the available
-space in the notification area, if necessary.
+(Note: this is a special-purpose function intended for the framebuffer
+port; see gtk_window_set_has_frame(). It will have no effect on the
+window border drawn by the window manager, which is the normal
+case when using the X Window system.)
+For windows with frames (see gtk_window_set_has_frame()) this function
+can be used to change the size of the frame border.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow that has a frame
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="left">
+<parameter_description> The width of the left border
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="top">
+<parameter_description> The height of the top border
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="right">
+<parameter_description> The width of the right border
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bottom">
+<parameter_description> The height of the bottom border
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_drag_set_icon_pixmap">
@@ -48661,7 +51281,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> the transparency mask for the icon
+<parameter_description> the transparency mask for the icon or %NULL for none.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="hot_x">
@@ -48676,6 +51296,28 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_button_sensitivity">
+<description>
+Sets whether the dropdown button of the combo box should be
+always sensitive (%GTK_SENSITIVITY_ON), never sensitive (%GTK_SENSITIVITY_OFF)
+or only if there is at least one item to display (%GTK_SENSITIVITY_AUTO).
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sensitivity">
+<parameter_description> specify the sensitivity of the dropdown button
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_list_store_move_after">
<description>
Moves @iter in @store to the position after @position. Note that this
@@ -48747,58 +51389,34 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_orientation">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_min_width">
<description>
-Retrieves the current orientation of the toolbar. See
-gtk_toolbar_set_orientation().
-
+Return value: The minimum width of the @tree_column.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the orientation
+<return> The minimum width of the @tree_column.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_layout_offsets">
+<function name="gtk_accel_label_set_accel_closure">
<description>
-
-Obtains the position of the #PangoLayout used to render text
-in the entry, in widget coordinates. Useful if you want to line
-up the text in an entry with some other text, e.g. when using the
-entry to implement editable cells in a sheet widget.
-
-Also useful to convert mouse events into coordinates inside the
-#PangoLayout, e.g. to take some action if some part of the entry text
-is clicked.
-
-Note that as the user scrolls around in the entry the offsets will
-change; you'll need to connect to the "notify::scroll-offset"
-signal to track this. Remember when using the #PangoLayout
-functions you need to convert to and from pixels using
-PANGO_PIXELS() or #PANGO_SCALE.
-
-Keep in mind that the layout text may contain a preedit string, so
-gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index() and
-gtk_entry_text_index_to_layout_index() are needed to convert byte
-indices in the layout to byte indices in the entry contents.
+Sets the closure to be monitored by this accelerator label. The closure
+must be connected to an accelerator group; see gtk_accel_group_connect().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> location to store X offset of layout, or %NULL
+<parameter name="accel_label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> location to store Y offset of layout, or %NULL
+<parameter name="accel_closure">
+<parameter_description> the closure to monitor for accelerator changes.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -48828,28 +51446,15 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset">
+<function name="gtk_socket_new">
<description>
-This function registers GTK+'s internal rich text serialization
-format with the passed @buffer. See
-gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset() for details.
+Create a new empty #GtkSocket.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tagset_name">
-<parameter_description> an optional tagset name, on %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
-format's mime-type.
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> the new #GtkSocket.
</return>
</function>
@@ -48905,23 +51510,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_filename">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_reorder">
<description>
-Retrieves the source filename, or %NULL if none is set. The
-filename is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
-persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
+Reorders @store to follow the order indicated by @new_order. Note that
+this function only works with unsorted stores.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_order">
+<parameter_description> an array of integers mapping the new position of each child
+to its old position before the re-ordering,
+i.e. @new_order&lt;literal&gt;[newpos] = oldpos&lt;/literal&gt;.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> image filename. This string must not be modified
-or freed.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_get_tearoff_state">
@@ -48939,6 +51548,24 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_preview_text">
+<description>
+The @text is used to show how the selected font looks.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a string
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_find_char">
<description>
Same as gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char(), but goes backward from @iter.
@@ -48998,29 +51625,22 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_set_increments">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_orientation">
<description>
-Sets the step and page sizes for the range.
-The step size is used when the user clicks the #GtkScrollbar
-arrows or moves #GtkScale via arrow keys. The page size
-is used for example when moving via Page Up or Page Down keys.
+Gets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="step">
-<parameter_description> step size
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> page size
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the page orientation
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_viewport_set_vadjustment">
@@ -49041,40 +51661,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_frame_dimensions">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_pixbuf">
<description>
-(Note: this is a special-purpose function intended for the framebuffer
-port; see gtk_window_set_has_frame(). It will have no effect on the
-window border drawn by the window manager, which is the normal
-case when using the X Window system.)
+Creates a status icon displaying @pixbuf.
+
+The image will be scaled down to fit in the available
+space in the notification area, if necessary.
-For windows with frames (see gtk_window_set_has_frame()) this function
-can be used to change the size of the frame border.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow that has a frame
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="left">
-<parameter_description> The width of the left border
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="top">
-<parameter_description> The height of the top border
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="right">
-<parameter_description> The width of the right border
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bottom">
-<parameter_description> The height of the bottom border
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_pattern">
@@ -49161,27 +51766,29 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_has_group">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_header_image">
<description>
-Checks whether @group_name appears inside the groups registered for the
-recently used item @info.
+Sets a header image for @page. This image is displayed in the header
+area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> name of a group
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> the new header image @page
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the group was found.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_queue_resize">
@@ -49201,27 +51808,28 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_builder_get_type_from_name">
<description>
-Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
-had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them from a file
-on disk. Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
+Looks up a type by name, using the virtual function that
+#GtkBuilder has for that purpose. This is mainly used when
+implementing the #GtkBuildable interface on a type.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> location of icon file
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="err">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="type_name">
+<parameter_description> type name to lookup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
+<return> the #GType found for @type_name or #G_TYPE_INVALID
+if no type was found
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -49335,35 +51943,14 @@
<function name="GtkCellRendererPixbuf">
<description>
-Specifies whether the rendered pixbuf should be colorized
-according to the #GtkCellRendererState.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+The GIcon representing the icon to display.
+If the icon theme is changed, the image will be updated
+automatically.
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_fixed_size">
-<description>
-Sets the renderer size to be explicit, independent of the properties set.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the cell renderer, or -1
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the cell renderer, or -1
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -49395,15 +51982,15 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter_description> @binding_set to clear an entry of
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter_description> key value of binding to clear
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to clear
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -49431,31 +52018,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_header_image">
-<description>
-Sets a header image for @page. This image is displayed in the header
-area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> the new header image @page
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_manager_purge_items">
<description>
Purges every item from the recently used resources list.
@@ -49479,28 +52041,24 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_word_ends">
<description>
-Moves @iter within a line, to a new &lt;emphasis&gt;character&lt;/emphasis&gt;
-(not byte) offset. The given character offset must be less than or
-equal to the number of characters in the line; if equal, @iter
-moves to the start of the next line. See
-gtk_text_iter_set_line_index() if you have a byte index rather than
-a character offset.
+Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end() up to @count times.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="char_on_line">
-<parameter_description> a character offset relative to the start of @iter's current line
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of times to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_printer_has_details">
@@ -49568,69 +52126,89 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_builder_get_type_from_name">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_from_file">
<description>
-Looks up a type by name, using the virtual function that
-#GtkBuilder has for that purpose.
+Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
+had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them from a file
+on disk. Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> location of icon file
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="type_name">
-<parameter_description> type name to lookup
+<parameter name="err">
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GType found for @type_name or #G_TYPE_INVALID
-if no type was found
+<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_scroll_to_mark">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy">
<description>
-Scrolls @text_view so that @mark is on the screen in the position
-indicated by @xalign and @yalign. An alignment of 0.0 indicates
-left or top, 1.0 indicates right or bottom, 0.5 means center.
-If @use_align is %FALSE, the text scrolls the minimal distance to
-get the mark onscreen, possibly not scrolling at all. The effective
-screen for purposes of this function is reduced by a margin of size
- within_margin
+You do not need to use this function. Creates a row reference based on
+ path This reference will keep pointing to the node pointed to by @path,
+so long as it exists. If @path isn't a valid path in @model, then %NULL is
+returned. However, unlike references created with
+gtk_tree_row_reference_new(), it does not listen to the model for changes.
+The creator of the row reference must do this explicitly using
+gtk_tree_row_reference_inserted(), gtk_tree_row_reference_deleted(),
+gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered().
+
+These functions must be called exactly once per proxy when the
+corresponding signal on the model is emitted. This single call
+updates all row references for that proxy. Since built-in GTK+
+objects like #GtkTreeView already use this mechanism internally,
+using them as the proxy object will produce unpredictable results.
+Further more, passing the same object as @model and @proxy
+doesn't work for reasons of internal implementation.
+
+This type of row reference is primarily meant by structures that need to
+carefully monitor exactly when a row reference updates itself, and is not
+generally needed by most applications.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mark">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextMark
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="within_margin">
-<parameter_description> margin as a [0.0,0.5) fraction of screen size
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> A proxy #GObject
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_align">
-<parameter_description> whether to use alignment arguments (if %FALSE, just
-get the mark onscreen)
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> horizontal alignment of mark within visible area
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreePath to monitor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> vertical alignment of mark within visible area
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_job_get_status">
+<description>
+Gets the status of the print job.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="job">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the status of @job
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_paper_width">
@@ -49657,63 +52235,64 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_move_column_after">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_choose_icon">
<description>
-Moves @column to be after to @base_column. If @base_column is %NULL, then
- column is placed in the first position.
+Looks up a named icon and returns a structure containing
+information such as the filename of the icon. The icon
+can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
+gtk_icon_info_load_icon(). (gtk_icon_theme_load_icon()
+combines these two steps if all you need is the pixbuf.)
+
+If @icon_names contains more than one name, this function
+tries them all in the given order before falling back to
+inherited icon themes.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved.
+<parameter name="icon_names">
+<parameter_description> %NULL-terminated array of icon names to lookup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="base_column">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved relative to, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> desired icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_fullscreen">
-<description>
-Asks to place @window in the fullscreen state. Note that you
-shouldn't assume the window is definitely full screen afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;) could unfullscreen it
-again, and not all window managers honor requests to fullscreen
-windows. But normally the window will end up fullscreen. Just
-don't write code that crashes if not.
-
-You can track the fullscreen state via the "window_state_event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GtkIconInfo structure containing information
+about the icon, or %NULL if the icon wasn't found. Free with
+gtk_icon_info_free()
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_clear">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_icon_name">
<description>
-Removes all rows from the list store.
+See gtk_image_new_from_icon_name() for details.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkListStore.
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> an icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -49739,21 +52318,18 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkStyle">
+<function name="gtk_widget_trigger_tooltip_query">
<description>
-Emitted when the group of radio menu items that a radio menu item belongs
-to changes. This is emitted when a radio menu item switches from
-being alone to being part of a group of 2 or more menu items, or
-vice-versa, and when a button is moved from one group of 2 or
-more menu items ton a different one, but not when the composition
-of the group that a menu item belongs to changes.
+Triggers a tooltip query on the display where the toplevel of @widget
+is located. See gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query() for more
+information.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -49797,7 +52373,7 @@
<description>
This function should be called whenever keyboard navigation within
a single widget hits a boundary. The function emits the
-#GtkWidget::keynav-changed signal on the widget and its return
+#GtkWidget::keynav-failed signal on the widget and its return
value should be interpreted in a way similar to the return value of
gtk_widget_child_focus():
@@ -49812,7 +52388,7 @@
The default ::keynav-failed handler returns %TRUE for
%GTK_DIR_TAB_FORWARD and %GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD. For the other
values of #GtkDirectionType, it looks at the
-#GtkSettings:gtk-keynav-cursor-only" setting and returns %FALSE
+#GtkSettings:gtk-keynav-cursor-only setting and returns %FALSE
if the setting is %TRUE. This way the entire user interface
becomes cursor-navigatable on input devices such as mobile phones
which only have cursor keys but no tab key.
@@ -49888,28 +52464,28 @@
to a sequence of gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all() followed by
gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
-Note that the URI must exist, or nothing will be done except
-for the directory change.
-If you are implementing a &lt;guimenuitem&gt;File/Save As...&lt;/guimenuitem&gt; dialog, you
-should use this function if you already have a file name to which the user may save; for example,
-when the user opens an existing file and then does &lt;guimenuitem&gt;File/Save As...&lt;/guimenuitem&gt;
-on it. If you don't have a file name already &mdash; for example, if the user just created
-a new file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function. Instead, use
-something similar to this:
-
-&lt;programlisting&gt;
+Note that the URI must exist, or nothing will be done except for the
+directory change.
+If you are implementing a &lt;guimenuitem&gt;File/Save As...&lt;/guimenuitem&gt; dialog,
+you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
+user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
+does &lt;guimenuitem&gt;File/Save As...&lt;/guimenuitem&gt; on it. If you don't have
+a file name already &mdash; for example, if the user just created a new
+file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
+Instead, use something similar to this:
+|[
if (document_is_new)
{
-/&lt;!-- --&gt;* the user just created a new document *&lt;!-- --&gt;/
+/&ast; the user just created a new document &ast;/
gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri (chooser, default_folder_for_saving);
gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
}
else
{
-/&lt;!-- --&gt;* the user edited an existing document *&lt;!-- --&gt;/
+/&ast; the user edited an existing document &ast;/
gtk_file_chooser_set_uri (chooser, existing_uri);
}
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;
+]|
</description>
@@ -49930,47 +52506,21 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_info_get_display_key">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_expand">
<description>
-Return value: The collate key for the display name, or %NULL
+Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileInfo
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The collate key for the display name, or %NULL
-if the display name hasn't been set.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded">
-<description>
-If the text direction is wildcarded, this source can be used
-as the base image for an icon in any #GtkTextDirection.
-If the text direction is not wildcarded, then the
-text direction the icon source applies to should be set
-with gtk_icon_source_set_direction(), and the icon source
-will only be used with that text direction.
-
-#GtkIconSet prefers non-wildcarded sources (exact matches) over
-wildcarded sources, and will use an exact match when possible.
-
+<return> %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to wildcard the text direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_orientation">
@@ -50005,6 +52555,30 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_test_slider_set_perc">
+<description>
+This function will adjust theslider position of all GtkRange
+based widgets, such as scrollbars or scales, it'll also adjust
+spin buttons. The adjustment value of tehse widgets is set to
+a value between the lower and upper limits, according to the
+ percentage argument.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> valid widget pointer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="percentage">
+<parameter_description> value between 0 and 100.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="GtkFontButton">
<description>
The ::font-set signal is emitted when the user selects a font.
@@ -50066,8 +52640,8 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="var_args">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated list of property names and #GValue*,
-starting with @first_prop_name.
+<parameter_description> return location for the first property, followed
+optionally by more name/return location pairs, followed by %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -50272,32 +52846,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_after">
-<description>
-Inserts a new row after @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will be
-prepended to the beginning of the list. @iter will be changed to point to
-this new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill
-in values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="sibling">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_value">
<description>
Gets the current value of the scale button.
@@ -50424,48 +52972,57 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_direction">
+<function name="gtk_draw_expander">
<description>
-Gets the reading direction for a particular widget. See
-gtk_widget_set_direction().
+Draws an expander as used in #GtkTreeView.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_expander() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x position to draw the expander at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y position to draw the expander at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expander_style">
+<parameter_description> the style to draw the expander in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the reading direction for the widget.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_select_path">
+<function name="gtk_separator_new">
<description>
-Selects the file referred to by @path. An internal function. See
-_gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
+Creates a new #GtkSeparator with the given orientation.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> the path to select
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the separator's orientation.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the path was
-selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
+<return> a new #GtkSeparator.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -50487,62 +53044,45 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_init">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_use_drag_window">
<description>
-Call this function before using any other GTK+ functions in your GUI
-applications. It will initialize everything needed to operate the
-toolkit and parses some standard command line options. @argc and
- argv are adjusted accordingly so your own code will
-never see those standard arguments.
-
-Note that there are some alternative ways to initialize GTK+:
-if you are calling gtk_parse_args(), gtk_init_check(),
-gtk_init_with_args() or g_option_context_parse() with
-the option group returned by gtk_get_option_group(), you
-&lt;emphasis&gt;don't&lt;/emphasis&gt; have to call gtk_init().
-
-&lt;note&gt;&lt;para&gt;
-This function will terminate your program if it was unable to initialize
-the GUI for some reason. If you want your program to fall back to a
-textual interface you want to call gtk_init_check() instead.
-&lt;/para&gt;&lt;/note&gt;
+Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item uses a drag window.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description> Address of the &lt;parameter&gt;argc&lt;/parameter&gt; parameter of your
-main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description> Address of the &lt;parameter&gt;argv&lt;/parameter&gt; parameter of main().
-Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @tool_item uses a drag window.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_index">
+<function name="gtk_targets_include_uri">
<description>
-Same as gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset(), but works with a
-&lt;emphasis&gt;byte&lt;/emphasis&gt; index. The given byte index must be at
-the start of a character, it can't be in the middle of a UTF-8
-encoded character.
+Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
+provide an uri list.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom&lt;!-- --&gt;s
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="byte_on_line">
-<parameter_description> a byte index relative to the start of @iter's current line
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> the length of @targets
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for uri lists,
+otherwise %FALSE.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_property_parse_color">
@@ -50575,6 +53115,25 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_file">
+<description>
+Gets the current folder of @chooser as #GFile.
+See gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GFile for the current folder.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_manager_get_default">
<description>
Gets a unique instance of #GtkRecentManager, that you can share
@@ -50621,7 +53180,7 @@
invalid, until it gets added to a buffer again with
gtk_text_buffer_add_mark(). Use gtk_text_mark_get_deleted() to
find out if a mark has been removed from its buffer.
-The "mark_deleted" signal will be emitted as notification after
+The "mark-deleted" signal will be emitted as notification after
the mark is deleted.
</description>
@@ -50638,20 +53197,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_tag_table">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_duplex">
<description>
-Get the #GtkTextTagTable associated with this buffer.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="duplex">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintDuplex value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the buffer's tag table
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="_gtk_key_hash_add_entry">
@@ -50730,23 +53293,19 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_display_name">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_entry">
<description>
-Gets the display name for an icon. A display name is a
-string to be used in place of the icon name in a user
-visible context like a list of icons.
+Gets the entry @completion has been attached to.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the display name for the icon or %NULL, if
-the icon doesn't have a specified display name. This value
-is owned @icon_info and must not be modified or free.
+<return> The entry @completion has been attached to.
Since: 2.4
</return>
@@ -50768,6 +53327,25 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_calendar_get_detail_height_rows">
+<description>
+Queries the height of detail cells, in rows.
+See #GtkCalendar:detail-width-chars.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The height of detail cells, in rows.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_private">
<description>
Whether to show recently used resources marked registered as private.
@@ -50825,15 +53403,16 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> The label displayed in menu items and on buttons
+<parameter_description> The label displayed in menu items and on buttons, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> A tooltip for the action
+<parameter_description> A tooltip for the action, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> The stock icon to display in widgets representing the action
+<parameter_description> The stock icon to display in widgets representing the
+action, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -50919,21 +53498,18 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_restrict_to_fill_level">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_widget">
<description>
-Gets whether the range is restricted to the fill level.
-
+Return value: The #GtkWidget in the column header, or %NULL
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkRange
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @range is restricted to the fill level.
-
-Since: 2.12
+<return> The #GtkWidget in the column header, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
@@ -50974,14 +53550,21 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_clear">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_max_width">
<description>
-Removes all rows from @tree_store
+Sets the maximum width of the @tree_column. If @max_width is -1, then the
+maximum width is unset. Note, the column can actually be wider than max
+width if it's the last column in a view. In this case, the column expands to
+fill any extra space.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeStore
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max_width">
+<parameter_description> The maximum width of the column in pixels, or -1.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -51005,42 +53588,43 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_ref">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_lookup_entry">
<description>
-Increases the reference count of @recent_info by one.
-
+Looks up the accelerator entry for @accel_path and fills in @key.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator key to be filled in (optional)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the recent info object with its reference count increased
-by one.
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> %TRUE if @accel_path is known, %FALSE otherwise
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_finishings">
<description>
-Obtains the #GtkPageSetup that determines the page
-dimensions of the #GtkPrintContext.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="finishings">
+<parameter_description> the finishings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page setup of @context
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_map_expanded_rows">
@@ -51086,30 +53670,19 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_set_translate_func">
+<function name="gtk_plug_construct">
<description>
-Sets a function to be used for translating the path elements before they
-are displayed.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
+ socket_id This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from #GtkPlug.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkTranslateFunc function to be used to translate path elements
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @func and @notify
+<parameter name="plug">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="notify">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDestroyNotify function to be called when @ifactory is
-destroyed and when the translation function is changed again
+<parameter name="socket_id">
+<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -51141,57 +53714,48 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive_at_cursor">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_n_copies">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive() at the cursor
-position.
-
- default_editable indicates the editability of text that doesn't
-have a tag affecting editability applied to it. Typically the
-result of gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> text in UTF-8 format
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="len">
-<parameter_description> length of text in bytes, or -1
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="default_editable">
-<parameter_description> default editability of buffer
+<parameter name="num_copies">
+<parameter_description> the number of copies
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether text was actually inserted
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_word_ends">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end() up to @count times.
+Moves @iter within a line, to a new &lt;emphasis&gt;character&lt;/emphasis&gt;
+(not byte) offset. The given character offset must be less than or
+equal to the number of characters in the line; if equal, @iter
+moves to the start of the next line. See
+gtk_text_iter_set_line_index() if you have a byte index rather than
+a character offset.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of times to move
+<parameter name="char_on_line">
+<parameter_description> a character offset relative to the start of @iter's current line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new_with_model">
@@ -51267,13 +53831,31 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_minus_button">
+<description>
+Retrieves the minus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the minus button of the #GtkScaleButton.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_item_factory_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkItemFactory.
Beware that the returned object does not have a floating reference.
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51299,13 +53881,22 @@
<function name="GtkPaned">
<description>
-The "shrink" child property determines whether the child can be made
-smaller than its requisition.
+The ::cancel-position signal is a
+&lt;link linkend="keybinding-signals"&gt;keybinding signal&lt;/link&gt;
+which gets emitted to cancel moving the position of the handle using key
+bindings. The position of the handle will be reset to the value prior to
+moving it.
-Since: 2.4
+The default binding for this signal is Escape.
+
+Since: 2.0
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the object that received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -51345,49 +53936,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_string">
+<function name="gtk_link_button_set_uri">
<description>
-Draws a text string on @window with the given parameters.
+Sets @uri as the URI where the #GtkLinkButton points. As a side-effect
+this unsets the 'visited' state of the button.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_layout() instead.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin
+<parameter name="link_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLinkButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="string">
-<parameter_description> the string to draw
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> a valid URI
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -51492,6 +54055,8 @@
<description>
Adds a widget to the beginning of the given toolbar.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="toolbar">
@@ -51535,6 +54100,38 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_validate_yrange">
+<description>
+Ensure that a region of a #GtkTextLayout is valid. The ::changed
+signal will be emitted if any lines are validated.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="anchor">
+<parameter_description> iter pointing into a line that will be used as the
+coordinate origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y0_">
+<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
+which to begin validation. (The offset here is in pixels
+after validation.)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y1_">
+<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
+which to end validation. (The offset here is in pixels
+after validation.)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_im_context_get_surrounding">
<description>
Retrieves context around the insertion point. Input methods
@@ -51625,7 +54222,7 @@
If there are multiple items with the same action, the result is
undefined.
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51662,27 +54259,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_system_volume_get_display_name">
-<description>
-Queries the human-readable name for a @volume. This string can be displayed
-in a list of volumes that can be accessed, for example.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_system">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="volume">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemVolume
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A string with the human-readable name for a #GtkFileSystemVolume.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_visible_line_index">
<description>
Return value: byte index of @iter with respect to the start of the line
@@ -51723,22 +54299,45 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_job_get_status">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_scroll_to_mark">
<description>
-Gets the status of the print job.
-
+Scrolls @text_view so that @mark is on the screen in the position
+indicated by @xalign and @yalign. An alignment of 0.0 indicates
+left or top, 1.0 indicates right or bottom, 0.5 means center.
+If @use_align is %FALSE, the text scrolls the minimal distance to
+get the mark onscreen, possibly not scrolling at all. The effective
+screen for purposes of this function is reduced by a margin of size
+ within_margin
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="job">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mark">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextMark
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="within_margin">
+<parameter_description> margin as a [0.0,0.5) fraction of screen size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_align">
+<parameter_description> whether to use alignment arguments (if %FALSE, just
+get the mark onscreen)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> horizontal alignment of mark within visible area
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> vertical alignment of mark within visible area
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the status of @job
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_cell_area">
@@ -51775,6 +54374,20 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_load_scanner">
+<description>
+#GScanner variant of gtk_accel_map_load().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scanner">
+<parameter_description> a #GScanner which has already been provided with an input file
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_create_child_anchor">
<description>
This is a convenience function which simply creates a child anchor
@@ -51861,6 +54474,44 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_reshow_with_initial_size">
+<description>
+Hides @window, then reshows it, resetting the
+default size and position of the window. Used
+by GUI builders only.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_child">
+<description>
+Sets, or unsets if @child is %NULL, the focused child of @container.
+
+This function emits the GtkContainer::set_focus_child signal of
+ container Implementations of #GtkContainer can override the
+default behaviour by overriding the class closure of this signal.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_block_activate_from">
<description>
Disables calls to the gtk_action_activate()
@@ -51954,7 +54605,7 @@
Draws a diamond in the given rectangle on @window using the given
parameters.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_diamond() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_diamond() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51994,44 +54645,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_choose_icon">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_move_column_after">
<description>
-Looks up a named icon and returns a structure containing
-information such as the filename of the icon. The icon
-can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
-gtk_icon_info_load_icon(). (gtk_icon_theme_load_icon()
-combines these two steps if all you need is the pixbuf.)
-
-If @icon_names contains more than one name, this function
-tries them all in the given order before falling back to
-inherited icon themes.
-
+Moves @column to be after to @base_column. If @base_column is %NULL, then
+ column is placed in the first position.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_names">
-<parameter_description> %NULL-terminated array of icon names to lookup
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> desired icon size
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
+<parameter name="base_column">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved relative to, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkIconInfo structure containing information
-about the icon, or %NULL if the icon wasn't found. Free with
-gtk_icon_info_free()
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_action">
@@ -52247,53 +54881,57 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_menu_label_text">
+<function name="gtk_window_fullscreen">
<description>
-Retrieves the text of the menu label for the page containing
- child
+Asks to place @window in the fullscreen state. Note that you
+shouldn't assume the window is definitely full screen afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or &lt;link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;) could unfullscreen it
+again, and not all window managers honor requests to fullscreen
+windows. But normally the window will end up fullscreen. Just
+don't write code that crashes if not.
+
+You can track the fullscreen state via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the child widget of a page of the notebook.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>value: the text of the tab label, or %NULL if the
-widget does not have a menu label other than
-the default menu label, or the menu label widget
-is not a #GtkLabel. The string is owned by
-the widget and must not be freed.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_select_file">
<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_icon_name() for details.
+Selects the file referred to by @file. An internal function. See
+_gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
+<parameter name="file">
+<parameter_description> the file to select
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> an icon size
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the path was
+selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_order">
@@ -52344,23 +54982,30 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_word_starts">
+<function name="gtk_selection_clear">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start() up to @count times.
+The default handler for the GtkWidget::selection_clear_event
+signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of times to move
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> the event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+<return> %TRUE if the event was handled, otherwise false
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Instead of calling this function, chain up from
+your selection_clear_event handler. Calling this function
+from any other context is illegal.
</return>
</function>
@@ -52437,18 +55082,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_trigger_tooltip_query">
+<function name="GtkStyle">
<description>
-Triggers a tooltip query on the display where the toplevel of @widget
-is located. See gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query() for more
-information.
+Emitted when the group of radio menu items that a radio menu item belongs
+to changes. This is emitted when a radio menu item switches from
+being alone to being part of a group of 2 or more menu items, or
+vice-versa, and when a button is moved from one group of 2 or
+more menu items ton a different one, but not when the composition
+of the group that a menu item belongs to changes.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -52511,43 +55159,56 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_system_volume_get_is_mounted">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_color">
<description>
-Queries whether a #GtkFileSystemVolume is mounted or not. If it is not, it
-can be mounted with gtk_file_system_volume_mount().
+Sets the current color to be @color. The first time this is called, it will
+also set the original color to be @color too.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_color_selection_set_current_color() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_system">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystem
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="volume">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystemVolume
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> an array of 4 doubles specifying the red, green, blue and opacity
+to set the current color to.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> TRUE if the @volume is mounted, FALSE otherwise.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_button_get_font_name">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_paste_clipboard">
<description>
-Retrieves the name of the currently selected font.
-
+Pastes the contents of a clipboard at the insertion point, or at
+ override_location (Note: pasting is asynchronous, that is, we'll
+ask for the paste data and return, and at some point later after
+the main loop runs, the paste data will be inserted.)
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="font_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontButton
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkClipboard to paste from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="override_location">
+<parameter_description> location to insert pasted text, or %NULL for
+at the cursor
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="default_editable">
+<parameter_description> whether the buffer is editable by default
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an internal copy of the font name which must not be freed.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_search_entry">
@@ -52601,19 +55262,22 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_get_action">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_context">
<description>
-Gets the action for this entry.
+Creates a new #PangoContext that can be used with the
+#GtkPrintContext.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser_entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the action
+<return> a new Pango context for @context
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -52688,35 +55352,74 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_mark_get_visible">
-<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if visible
+<function name="gtk_text_mark_get_visible">
+<description>
+Return value: %TRUE if visible
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="mark">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextMark
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if visible
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child">
+<description>
+Sets @iter to be the child of @parent, using the given index. The first
+index is 0. If @n is too big, or @parent has no children, @iter is set
+to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned. @parent will remain a valid
+node after this function has been called. As a special case, if @parent is
+%NULL, then the @n&lt;!-- --&gt;th root node is set.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="mark">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextMark
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to set to the nth child.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to get the child from, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n">
+<parameter_description> Then index of the desired child.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if visible
+<return> %TRUE, if @parent has an @n&lt;!-- --&gt;th child.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_unset_model_drag_dest">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_height">
<description>
-Undoes the effect of gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_dest().
+Gets the paper height of the #GtkPaperSize, in
+units of @unit.
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the paper height
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_frame_dimensions">
@@ -52780,6 +55483,75 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_show_uri">
+<description>
+This is a convenience function for launching the default application
+to show the uri. The uri must be of a form understood by GIO. Typical
+examples are
+&lt;simplelist&gt;
+&lt;member&gt;&lt;filename&gt;file:///home/gnome/pict.jpg&lt;/filename&gt;&lt;/member&gt;
+&lt;member&gt;&lt;filename&gt;http://www.gnome.org&lt;/filename&gt;&lt;/member&gt;
+&lt;member&gt;&lt;filename&gt;mailto:me&commat;gnome.org&lt;/filename&gt;&lt;/member&gt;
+&lt;/simplelist&gt;
+Ideally the timestamp is taken from the event triggering
+the gtk_show_uri() call. If timestamp is not known you can take
+%GDK_CURRENT_TIME.
+
+This function can be used as a replacement for gnome_vfs_url_show()
+and gnome_url_show().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> screen to show the uri on or %NULL for the default screen
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> the uri to show
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="timestamp">
+<parameter_description> a timestamp to prevent focus stealing.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> a #GError that is returned in case of errors
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE on success, %FALSE on error.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_action_set_accel_path">
+<description>
+Sets the accel path for this action. All proxy widgets associated
+with the action will have this accel path, so that their
+accelerators are consistent.
+
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator path
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="GtkRadioButton">
<description>
Emitted when the group of radio buttons that a radio button belongs
@@ -52838,19 +55610,31 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_use_markup">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_move_before">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
+Moves @iter in @tree_store to the position before @position. @iter and
+ position should be in the same level. Note that this function only
+works with unsorted stores. If @position is %NULL, @iter will be
+moved to the end of the level.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_image_get_storage_type">
@@ -52886,6 +55670,97 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_run">
+<description>
+Runs the print operation, by first letting the user modify
+print settings in the print dialog, and then print the document.
+
+Normally that this function does not return until the rendering of all
+pages is complete. You can connect to the
+#GtkPrintOperation::status-changed signal on @op to obtain some
+information about the progress of the print operation.
+Furthermore, it may use a recursive mainloop to show the print dialog.
+
+If you call gtk_print_operation_set_allow_async() or set the
+#GtkPrintOperation:allow-async property the operation will run
+asynchronously if this is supported on the platform. The
+#GtkPrintOperation::done signal will be emitted with the result of the
+operation when the it is done (i.e. when the dialog is canceled, or when
+the print succeeds or fails).
+|[
+if (settings != NULL)
+gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings (print, settings);
+
+if (page_setup != NULL)
+gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup (print, page_setup);
+
+g_signal_connect (print, "begin-print",
+G_CALLBACK (begin_print), &data);
+g_signal_connect (print, "draw-page",
+G_CALLBACK (draw_page), &data);
+
+res = gtk_print_operation_run (print,
+GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG,
+parent,
+&error);
+
+if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR)
+{
+error_dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (GTK_WINDOW (parent),
+GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
+GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
+GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
+"Error printing file:\n%s",
+error-&gt;message);
+g_signal_connect (error_dialog, "response",
+G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_destroy), NULL);
+gtk_widget_show (error_dialog);
+g_error_free (error);
+}
+else if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY)
+{
+if (settings != NULL)
+g_object_unref (settings);
+settings = g_object_ref (gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings (print));
+}
+]|
+
+Note that gtk_print_operation_run() can only be called once on a
+given #GtkPrintOperation.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action to start
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> Return location for errors, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the result of the print operation. A return value of
+%GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY indicates that the printing was
+completed successfully. In this case, it is a good idea to obtain
+the used print settings with gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings()
+and store them for reuse with the next print operation. A value of
+%GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_IN_PROGRESS means the operation is running
+asynchronously, and will emit the #GtkPrintOperation::done signal when
+done.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_notebook_popup_enable">
<description>
Enables the popup menu: if the user clicks with the right mouse button on
@@ -52955,6 +55830,8 @@
<description>
Inserts a new space in the toolbar at the specified position.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="toolbar">
@@ -53035,24 +55912,43 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_get_job_count">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_preview_text">
<description>
-Gets the number of jobs currently queued on the printer.
+The text returned is the preview text used to show how the selected
+font looks.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of jobs on @printer
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> pointer to the preview text string. This string
+points to internally allocated storage in the widget and must not
+be freed, modified or stored.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_toolbar_reconfigured">
+<description>
+Emits the signal #GtkToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured on @tool_item.
+#GtkToolbar and other #GtkToolShell implementations use this function
+to notify children, when some aspect of their configuration changes.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_create_drag_icon">
<description>
Creates a #GdkPixmap representation of the item at @path.
@@ -53149,61 +56045,87 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_action_groups">
<description>
-Adds @clipboard to the list of clipboards in which the selection
-contents of @buffer are available. In most cases, @clipboard will be
-the #GtkClipboard of type %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY for a view of @buffer.
+Return value: a #GList of action groups. The list is owned by GTK+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GList of action groups. The list is owned by GTK+
+and should not be modified.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_focus_on_map">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_set">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_focus_on_map().
-
+Stores new data into a #GtkSelectionData object. Should
+&lt;emphasis&gt;only&lt;/emphasis&gt; be called from a selection handler callback.
+Zero-terminates the stored data.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> the type of selection data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> format (number of bits in a unit)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> pointer to the data (will be copied)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="length">
+<parameter_description> length of the data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if window should receive the input focus when
-mapped.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_attr_appearance_new">
+<function name="gtk_builder_connect_signals">
<description>
-Create a new font description attribute. (This attribute
-allows setting family, style, weight, variant, stretch,
-and size simultaneously.)
+This method is a simpler variation of gtk_builder_connect_signals_full().
+It uses #GModule's introspective features (by opening the module %NULL)
+to look at the application's symbol table. From here it tries to match
+the signal handler names given in the interface description with
+symbols in the application and connects the signals.
+Note that this function will not work correctly if #GModule is not
+supported on the platform.
+
+When compiling applications for Windows, you must declare signal callbacks
+with #G_MODULE_EXPORT, or they will not be put in the symbol table.
+On Linux and Unices, this is not necessary; applications should instead
+be compiled with the -Wl,--export-dynamic CFLAGS, and linked against
+gmodule-export-2.0.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="desc">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a structure sent in as user data to all signals
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_button_set_use_stock">
@@ -53225,33 +56147,45 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkRadioToolButton">
+<function name="gtk_style_unref">
<description>
-Sets a new group for a radio tool button.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: 2.0: use g_object_unref() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_expand">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
+If the text direction is wildcarded, this source can be used
+as the base image for an icon in any #GtkTextDirection.
+If the text direction is not wildcarded, then the
+text direction the icon source applies to should be set
+with gtk_icon_source_set_direction(), and the icon source
+will only be used with that text direction.
+
+#GtkIconSet prefers non-wildcarded sources (exact matches) over
+wildcarded sources, and will use an exact match when possible.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to wildcard the text direction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_get_group">
@@ -53343,23 +56277,26 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_max_width_chars">
+<function name="gtk_container_set_resize_mode">
<description>
-Retrieves the desired maximum width of @label, in characters. See
-gtk_label_set_width_chars().
+Sets the resize mode for the container.
+The resize mode of a container determines whether a resize request
+will be passed to the container's parent, queued for later execution
+or executed immediately.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="resize_mode">
+<parameter_description> the new resize mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the maximum width of the label in characters.
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paint_shadow">
@@ -53480,68 +56417,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_prev_page">
-<description>
-Switches to the previous page. Nothing happens if the current page
-is the first page.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_load_icon">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_screen">
<description>
-Looks up an icon in an icon theme, scales it to the given size
-and renders it into a pixbuf. This is a convenience function;
-if more details about the icon are needed, use
-gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon() followed by gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
-
-Note that you probably want to listen for icon theme changes and
-update the icon. This is usually done by connecting to the
-GtkWidget::style-set signal. If for some reason you do not want to
-update the icon when the icon theme changes, you should consider
-using gdk_pixbuf_copy() to make a private copy of the pixbuf
-returned by this function. Otherwise GTK+ may need to keep the old
-icon theme loaded, which would be a waste of memory.
+Sets the #GdkScreen where @status_icon is displayed; if
+the icon is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and
+then remapped on the new screen.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the icon to lookup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> the desired icon size. The resulting icon may not be
-exactly this size; see gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> Location to store error information on failure, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the rendered icon; this may be a newly created icon
-or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must not modify
-the icon. Use g_object_unref() to release your reference to the
-icon. %NULL if the icon isn't found.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_text">
@@ -53571,6 +56466,26 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_get_is_locked">
+<description>
+Locks are added and removed using gtk_accel_group_lock() and
+gtk_accel_group_unlock().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if there are 1 or more locks on the @accel_group,
+%FALSE otherwise.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_has_opacity_control">
<description>
Determines whether the colorsel has an opacity control.
@@ -53605,60 +56520,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_system_parse">
-<description>
-Given a string entered by a user, parse it (possibly using
-heuristics) into a folder path and a UTF-8 encoded
-filename part. (Suitable for passing to gtk_file_system_make_path())
-
-Note that the returned filename point may point to a subfolder
-of the returned folder. Adding a trailing path separator is needed
-to enforce the interpretation as a folder name.
-
-If parsing fails because the syntax of @str is not understood,
-and error of type GTK_FILE_SYSTEM_ERROR_BAD_FILENAME will
-be set in @error and %FALSE returned.
-
-If parsing fails because a path was encountered that doesn't
-exist on the filesystem, then an error of type
-%GTK_FILE_SYSTEM_ERROR_NONEXISTENT will be set in @error
-and %FALSE returned. (This only applies to parsing relative paths,
-not to interpretation of @file_part. No check is made as
-to whether @file_part exists.)
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_system">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="base_path">
-<parameter_description> reference folder with respect to which relative
-paths should be interpreted.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="str">
-<parameter_description> the string to parse
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="folder">
-<parameter_description> location to store folder portion of result, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="file_part">
-<parameter_description> location to store file portion of result, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the parsing succeeds, otherwise, %FALSE.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_drag_begin">
<description>
Initiates a drag on the source side. The function
@@ -53695,21 +56556,22 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_display_name">
+<function name="gtk_widget_is_focus">
<description>
-Gets the human-readable name of the #GtkPaperSize.
+Determines if the widget is the focus widget within its
+toplevel. (This does not mean that the %HAS_FOCUS flag is
+necessarily set; %HAS_FOCUS will only be set if the
+toplevel widget additionally has the global input focus.)
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the human-readable name of @size
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> %TRUE if the widget is the focus widget.
</return>
</function>
@@ -53734,42 +56596,74 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_widget_new">
+<function name="gtk_draw_insertion_cursor">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget object. This is an embeddable widget
-used to access the recently used resources list.
+Draws a text caret on @drawable at @location. This is not a style function
+but merely a convenience function for drawing the standard cursor shape.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="location">
+<parameter_description> location where to draw the cursor (@location-&gt;width is ignored)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="is_primary">
+<parameter_description> if the cursor should be the primary cursor color.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="direction">
+<parameter_description> whether the cursor is left-to-right or
+right-to-left. Should never be #GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="draw_arrow">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to draw a directional arrow on the
+cursor. Should be %FALSE unless the cursor is split.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with @child_model as the child_model
-and @root as the virtual root.
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item">
+<description>
+Sets the #GtkMenuItem used in the toolbar overflow menu. The
+ menu_item_id is used to identify the caller of this function and
+should also be used with gtk_tool_item_get_proxy_menu_item().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="child_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="root">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath or %NULL.
+<parameter name="menu_item_id">
+<parameter_description> a string used to identify @menu_item
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuItem to be used in the overflow menu
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkTreeModel.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_nth_page">
@@ -53931,27 +56825,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_common_ancestor">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_artists">
<description>
-Find the common ancestor of @widget_a and @widget_b that
-is closest to the two widgets.
+Sets the strings which are displayed in the artists tab
+of the secondary credits dialog.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget_a">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget_b">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="artists">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the closest common ancestor of @widget_a and
- widget_b or %NULL if @widget_a and @widget_b do not
-share a common ancestor.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_iter_to_child_iter">
@@ -53976,33 +56868,46 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_cursor">
+<function name="gtk_calendar_select_month">
<description>
-Fills in @path and @cell with the current cursor path and cell.
-If the cursor isn't currently set, then * path will be %NULL.
-If no cell currently has focus, then * cell will be %NULL.
-
-The returned #GtkTreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
+Shifts the calendar to a different month.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the current cursor path, or %NULL
+<parameter name="month">
+<parameter_description> a month number between 0 and 11.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> Return location the current focus cell, or %NULL
+<parameter name="year">
+<parameter_description> the year the month is in.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the cursor is set.
+<return> %TRUE, always
+</return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.8
+<function name="gtk_link_button_get_uri">
+<description>
+Retrieves the URI set using gtk_link_button_set_uri().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="link_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLinkButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a valid URI. The returned string is owned by the link button
+and should not be modified or freed.
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -54099,22 +57004,19 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_prepend_text">
+<function name="_gtk_key_hash_remove_entry">
<description>
-Prepends @string to the list of strings stored in @combo_box. Note that
-you can only use this function with combo boxes constructed with
-gtk_combo_box_new_text().
-
-Since: 2.4
+Removes a value previously added to the key hash with
+_gtk_key_hash_add_entry().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox constructed with gtk_combo_box_new_text()
+<parameter name="key_hash">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkKeyHash
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> A string
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> value previously added with _gtk_key_hash_add_entry()
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -54345,6 +57247,23 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GdkFont from the #GtkFontSelection for the
+currently selected font in the dialog.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name() instead.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="_gtk_xembed_get_focus_wrapped">
<description>
Gets whether the current focus sequence has wrapped around
@@ -54606,7 +57525,8 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_source">
<description>
-Turns @tree_view into a drag source for automatic DND.
+Turns @tree_view into a drag source for automatic DND. Calling this
+method sets reorderable to %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -54674,6 +57594,35 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_set_value">
+<description>
+Sets the data in the cell specified by @iter and @column.
+The type of @value must be convertible to the type of the
+column.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter for the row being modified
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> column number to modify
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> new value for the cell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_get_activates_default">
<description>
Retrieves the value set by gtk_entry_set_activates_default().
@@ -54845,6 +57794,24 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_apply_button">
+<description>
+Gets the 'Apply' button.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GtkWidget used in the dialog for the 'Apply' button.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_layout_set_vadjustment">
<description>
Sets the vertical scroll adjustment for the layout.
@@ -55018,31 +57985,19 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_lines">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_is_valid">
<description>
-Moves @count visible lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
-past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
-the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
-onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
-moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
-the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
-moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
+Check if there are any invalid regions in a #GtkTextLayout's buffer
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of lines to move forward
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
-
-Since: 2.8
+<return> %TRUE if any invalid regions were found
</return>
</function>
@@ -55061,26 +58016,23 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_default_attributes">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_icon_name">
<description>
-Obtains a copy of the default text attributes. These are the
-attributes used for text unless a tag overrides them.
-You'd typically pass the default attributes in to
-gtk_text_iter_get_attributes() in order to get the
-attributes in effect at a given text position.
-
-The return value is a copy owned by the caller of this function,
-and should be freed.
+Creates a status icon displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
+If the current icon theme is changed, the icon will be updated
+appropriately.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkTextAttributes
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -55088,6 +58040,8 @@
<description>
Adds a new space to the end of the toolbar.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="toolbar">
@@ -55098,6 +58052,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new_text">
+<description>
+Convenience function which constructs a new editable text combo box, which
+is a #GtkComboBoxEntry just displaying strings. If you use this function to
+create a text combo box, you should only manipulate its data source with
+the following convenience functions: gtk_combo_box_append_text(),
+gtk_combo_box_insert_text(), gtk_combo_box_prepend_text() and
+gtk_combo_box_remove_text().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> A new text #GtkComboBoxEntry.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_font_button_new">
<description>
Creates a new font picker widget.
@@ -55298,6 +58271,62 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_get_parent">
+<description>
+Gets the transient parent used by the #GtkMountOperation
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the transient parent for windows shown by @op
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_printer_is_accepting_jobs">
+<description>
+Return value: %TRUE if @printer is accepting jobs
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @printer is accepting jobs
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tool_shell_rebuild_menu">
+<description>
+Calling this function signals the tool shell that the overflow menu item for
+tool items have changed. If there is an overflow menu and if it is visible
+when this function it called, the menu will be rebuilt.
+
+Tool items must not call this function directly, but rely on
+gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu() instead.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="shell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_quality">
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY.
@@ -55316,24 +58345,29 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_number_up">
+<function name="gtk_image_new_from_gicon">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP.
+Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
+If the icon name isn't known, a "broken image" icon will be
+displayed instead. If the current icon theme is changed, the icon
+will be updated appropriately.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> an icon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="number_up">
-<parameter_description> the number of pages per sheet
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkImage displaying the themed icon
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_get_ancestor">
@@ -55364,59 +58398,61 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_child_notify">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_path_to_child_path">
<description>
-Emits a #GtkWidget::child-notify signal for the
-&lt;link linkend="child-properties"&gt;child property&lt;/link&gt; @child_property
-on @widget.
+Converts @filter_path to a path on the child model of @filter. That is,
+ filter_path points to a location in @filter. The returned path will
+point to the same location in the model not being filtered. If @filter_path
+does not point to a location in the child model, %NULL is returned.
-This is the analogue of g_object_notify() for child properties.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_property">
-<parameter_description> the name of a child property installed on the
-class of @widget&lt;!-- --&gt;'s parent
+<parameter name="filter_path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_active_iter">
+<function name="GtkToolShell">
<description>
-Sets the current active item to be the one referenced by @iter.
- iter must correspond to a path of depth one.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Dummy structure for accessing instances of #GtkToolShellIface.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_free">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_line_wrap">
<description>
-Frees a dynamically-allocated icon source, along with its
-filename, size, and pixbuf fields if those are not %NULL.
+Toggles line wrapping within the #GtkLabel widget. %TRUE makes it break
+lines if text exceeds the widget's size. %FALSE lets the text get cut off
+by the edge of the widget if it exceeds the widget size.
+
+Note that setting line wrapping to %TRUE does not make the label
+wrap at its parent container's width, because GTK+ widgets
+conceptually can't make their requisition depend on the parent
+container's size. For a label that wraps at a specific position,
+set the label's width using gtk_widget_set_size_request().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wrap">
+<parameter_description> the setting
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -55504,92 +58540,92 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_use_drag_window">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item uses a drag window.
+Calling this function signals to the toolbar that the
+overflow menu item for @tool_item has changed. If the
+overflow menu is visible when this function it called,
+the menu will be rebuilt.
+
+The function must be called when the tool item
+changes what it will do in response to the "create_menu_proxy"
+signal.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @tool_item uses a drag window.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_right_margin">
+<function name="gtk_widget_error_bell">
<description>
-Gets the default right margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
+Notifies the user about an input-related error on this widget.
+If the #GtkSettings:gtk-error-bell setting is %TRUE, it calls
+gdk_window_beep(), otherwise it does nothing.
+
+Note that the effect of gdk_window_beep() can be configured in many
+ways, depending on the windowing backend and the desktop environment
+or window manager that is used.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default right margin
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_lock_path">
+<function name="gtk_tree_get_row_drag_data">
<description>
-Locks the given accelerator path. If the accelerator map doesn't yet contain
-an entry for @accel_path, a new one is created.
-
-Locking an accelerator path prevents its accelerator from being changed
-during runtime. A locked accelerator path can be unlocked by
-gtk_accel_map_unlock_path(). Refer to gtk_accel_map_change_entry()
-for information about runtime accelerator changes.
-
-If called more than once, @accel_path remains locked until
-gtk_accel_map_unlock_path() has been called an equivalent number
-of times.
-
-Note that locking of individual accelerator paths is independent from
-locking the #GtkAccelGroup containing them. For runtime accelerator
-changes to be possible both the accelerator path and its #GtkAccelGroup
-have to be unlocked.
+Obtains a @tree_model and @path from selection data of target type
+%GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW. Normally called from a drag_data_received handler.
+This function can only be used if @selection_data originates from the same
+process that's calling this function, because a pointer to the tree model
+is being passed around. If you aren't in the same process, then you'll
+get memory corruption. In the #GtkTreeDragDest drag_data_received handler,
+you can assume that selection data of type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW is
+in from the current process. The returned path must be freed with
+gtk_tree_path_free().
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> row in @tree_model
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @selection_data had target type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW and
+is otherwise valid
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_error_bell">
+<function name="gtk_cell_editable_remove_widget">
<description>
-Notifies the user about an input-related error on this widget.
-If the #GtkSettings:gtk-error-bell setting is %TRUE, it calls
-gdk_window_beep(), otherwise it does nothing.
-
-Note that the effect of gdk_window_beep() can be configured in many
-ways, depending on the windowing backend and the desktop environment
-or window manager that is used.
-
-Since: 2.12
+Emits the #GtkCellEditable::remove-widget signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="cell_editable">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -55706,28 +58742,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_system_get_bookmark_label">
-<description>
-Gets the label to display for a bookmark, or %NULL.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_system">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> path of the bookmark
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the label for the bookmark @path
-
-Since: 2.8
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_icon_widget">
<description>
Sets @icon as the widget used as icon on @button. If @icon_widget is
@@ -55799,35 +58813,37 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toggle_action_get_draw_as_radio">
+<function name="gtk_stock_item_copy">
<description>
-Returns: whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
+Copies a stock item, mostly useful for language bindings and not in applications.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStockItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> a new #GtkStockItem
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_buffer">
+<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_child_detached">
<description>
-Return value: the buffer
+Whether the handlebox's child is currently detached.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="handle_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the buffer
+<return> %TRUE if the child is currently detached, otherwise %FALSE
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -55845,37 +58861,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_redraw_on_allocate">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_row_spacing">
<description>
-Sets whether the entire widget is queued for drawing when its size
-allocation changes. By default, this setting is %TRUE and
-the entire widget is redrawn on every size change. If your widget
-leaves the upper left unchanged when made bigger, turning this
-setting off will improve performance.
-
-Note that for %NO_WINDOW widgets setting this flag to %FALSE turns
-off all allocation on resizing: the widget will not even redraw if
-its position changes; this is to allow containers that don't draw
-anything to avoid excess invalidations. If you set this flag on a
-%NO_WINDOW widget that &lt;emphasis&gt;does&lt;/emphasis&gt; draw on @widget-&gt;window,
-you are responsible for invalidating both the old and new allocation
-of the widget when the widget is moved and responsible for invalidating
-regions newly when the widget increases size.
+Return value: the space between rows
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="redraw_on_allocate">
-<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the entire widget will be redrawn
-when it is allocated to a new size. Otherwise, only the
-new portion of the widget will be redrawn.
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the space between rows
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_is_composited">
@@ -55884,6 +58884,11 @@
drawn correctly. On X11 this function returns whether a
compositing manager is running for @widget's screen.
+Please note that the semantics of this call will change
+in the future if used on a widget that has a composited
+window in its heirarchy (as set by
+gdk_window_set_composited()).
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -56033,7 +59038,7 @@
Draws a resize grip in the given rectangle on @window using the given
parameters.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_resize_grip() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_resize_grip() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -56168,53 +59173,43 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_duplex">
+<function name="gtk_builder_get_object">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.
+Gets the object named @name. Note that this function does not
+increment the reference count of the returned object.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="duplex">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintDuplex value
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> name of object to get
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the object named @name or %NULL if it could not be
+found in the object tree.
+
+Since: 2.12
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_item_factory_create_items">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_equal_func">
<description>
-Creates the menu items from the @entries.
-
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Return value: the currently used compare function for the search code.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="ifactory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the length of @entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry&lt;!-- --&gt;s whose @callback members
-must by of type #GtkItemFactoryCallback1
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_data">
-<parameter_description> data passed to the callback functions of all entries
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the currently used compare function for the search code.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_remove_filter">
@@ -56253,32 +59248,86 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_iconify">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_blinking">
<description>
-Asks to iconify (i.e. minimize) the specified @window. Note that
-you shouldn't assume the window is definitely iconified afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;) could deiconify it
-again, or there may not be a window manager in which case
-iconification isn't possible, etc. But normally the window will end
-up iconified. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
+Makes the status icon start or stop blinking.
+Note that blinking user interface elements may be problematic
+for some users, and thus may be turned off, in which case
+this setting has no effect.
-It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
-in which case the window will be iconified before it ever appears
-onscreen.
+Since: 2.10
-You can track iconification via the "window_state_event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="blinking">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to turn blinking on, %FALSE to turn it off
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_file">
+<description>
+Sets @file as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing
+to the file's parent folder and actually selecting the file in list. If
+the @chooser is in #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the file's base name
+will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
+
+If the file name isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current
+folder of @chooser will be changed to the folder containing @filename. This
+is equivalent to a sequence of gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all() followed by
+gtk_file_chooser_select_filename().
+
+Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
+for the directory change.
+
+If you are implementing a &lt;guimenuitem&gt;File/Save As...&lt;/guimenuitem&gt; dialog,
+you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
+user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
+does &lt;guimenuitem&gt;File/Save As...&lt;/guimenuitem&gt; on it. If you don't have
+a file name already &mdash; for example, if the user just created a new
+file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
+Instead, use something similar to this:
+|[
+if (document_is_new)
+{
+/&ast; the user just created a new document &ast;/
+gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_file (chooser, default_file_for_saving);
+gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
+}
+else
+{
+/&ast; the user edited an existing document &ast;/
+gtk_file_chooser_set_file (chooser, existing_file);
+}
+]|
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="file">
+<parameter_description> the #GFile to set as current
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> location to store the error, or %NULL to ignore errors.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the file was
+selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_draw_box_gap">
@@ -56286,7 +59335,7 @@
Draws a box in @window using the given style and state and shadow type,
leaving a gap in one side.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_box_gap() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_box_gap() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -56338,6 +59387,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_step_increment">
+<description>
+Retrieves the step increment of the adjustment.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The current step increment of the adjustment.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_orientation">
<description>
Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_ORIENTATION.
@@ -56410,18 +59477,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_border_free">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_reorderable">
<description>
-Frees a #GtkBorder structure.
+Gets whether the tab can be reordered via drag and drop or not.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="border_">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBorder.
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a child #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the tab is reorderable.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_set_adjustment">
@@ -56471,6 +59546,31 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_for_uris">
+<description>
+Requests the contents of the clipboard as URIs. This function waits
+for the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
+timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly-allocated %NULL-terminated array of strings which must
+be freed with g_strfreev(), or %NULL if
+retrieving the selection data failed. (This
+could happen for various reasons, in particular
+if the clipboard was empty or if the contents of
+the clipboard could not be converted into URI form.)
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_target_list_add_table">
<description>
Prepends a table of #GtkTargetEntry to a target list.
@@ -56743,6 +59843,21 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_clickable">
+<description>
+Return value: %TRUE if user can click the column header.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if user can click the column header.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_new_from_stock">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkToggleToolButton containing the image and text from a
@@ -56822,22 +59937,45 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_entry">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_list">
<description>
-Gets the entry @completion has been attached to.
+Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. The icon is used when
+the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
+managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
+frame, or display it in other contexts.
+
+gtk_window_set_icon_list() allows you to pass in the same icon in
+several hand-drawn sizes. The list should contain the natural sizes
+your icon is available in; that is, don't scale the image before
+passing it to GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute,
+when the desired final size is known, to allow best quality.
+
+By passing several sizes, you may improve the final image quality
+of the icon, by reducing or eliminating automatic image scaling.
+
+Recommended sizes to provide: 16x16, 32x32, 48x48 at minimum, and
+larger images (64x64, 128x128) if you have them.
+See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
+for all windows in your application in one go.
+
+Note that transient windows (those who have been set transient for another
+window using gtk_window_set_transient_for()) will inherit their
+icon from their transient parent. So there's no need to explicitly
+set the icon on transient windows.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> list of #GdkPixbuf
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The entry @completion has been attached to.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_list_accel_closures">
@@ -56898,6 +60036,7 @@
<return> a new #GtkFileChooserDialog
Since: 2.4
+Deprecated: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -56922,30 +60061,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_type_hint">
+<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_handle_position">
<description>
-By setting the type hint for the window, you allow the window
-manager to decorate and handle the window in a way which is
-suitable to the function of the window in your application.
-
-This function should be called before the window becomes visible.
-
-gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience functions in GTK+
-will sometimes call gtk_window_set_type_hint() on your behalf.
+Gets the handle position of the handle box. See
+gtk_handle_box_set_handle_position().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="hint">
-<parameter_description> the window type
+<parameter name="handle_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the current handle position.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_current_uri">
@@ -57113,36 +60243,9 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_plug_construct_for_display">
-<description>
-Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
- socket_id which is currently displayed on @display.
-This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from #GtkPlug.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="plug">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay associated with @socket_id's
-#GtkSocket.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="socket_id">
-<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag">
<description>
-Emits the "apply_tag" signal on @buffer. The default
+Emits the "apply-tag" signal on @buffer. The default
handler for the signal applies @tag to the given range.
@start and @end do not have to be in order.
@@ -57204,26 +60307,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden">
-<description>
-Sets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_hidden">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if hidden files and folders should be displayed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_get_default_direction">
<description>
Obtains the current default reading direction. See
@@ -57301,52 +60384,24 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line">
<description>
-Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format (with
-printf()-style), which is marked up with the
-&lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango text markup language&lt;/link&gt;.
-
-Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
-bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
-
-Due to an oversight, this function does not escape special XML characters
-like gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup() does. Thus, if the arguments
-may contain special XML characters, you should use g_markup_printf_escaped()
-to escape it.
-
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
-gchar *msg;
-
-msg = g_markup_printf_escaped (message_format, ...);
-gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup (message_dialog, "&percnt;s", msg);
-g_free (msg);
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
-
-Since: 2.6
+Return value: a line number
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="message_dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="message_format">
-<parameter_description> printf()-style markup string (see
- &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango markup format&lt;/link&gt;), or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a line number
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_style_ref">
<description>
-Deprecated equivalent of g_object_ref().
+Deprecated: 2.0: use g_object_ref() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -57401,18 +60456,29 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_window_creation_hook">
<description>
-Creates an empty status icon object.
+Installs a global function used to create a window
+when a detached tab is dropped in an empty area.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkNotebookWindowCreationFunc, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> user data for @func
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> Destroy notifier for @data, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_pop_composite_child">
@@ -57745,86 +60811,66 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label">
+<function name="gtk_window_new">
<description>
-Sets whether the file chooser should display a stock label with the name of
-the file that is being previewed; the default is %TRUE. Applications that
-want to draw the whole preview area themselves should set this to %FALSE and
-display the name themselves in their preview widget.
+Creates a new #GtkWindow, which is a toplevel window that can
+contain other widgets. Nearly always, the type of the window should
+be #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL. If you're implementing something like a
+popup menu from scratch (which is a bad idea, just use #GtkMenu),
+you might use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP. #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP is not for
+dialogs, though in some other toolkits dialogs are called "popups".
+In GTK+, #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP means a pop-up menu or pop-up tooltip.
+On X11, popup windows are not controlled by the &lt;link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;.
-See also: gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()
+If you simply want an undecorated window (no window borders), use
+gtk_window_set_decorated(), don't use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_label">
-<parameter_description> whether to display a stock label with the name of the previewed file
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> type of window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkWindow.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_visible_vertical">
<description>
-You do not need to use this function. Creates a row reference based on
- path This reference will keep pointing to the node pointed to by @path,
-so long as it exists. If @path isn't a valid path in @model, then %NULL is
-returned. However, unlike references created with
-gtk_tree_row_reference_new(), it does not listen to the model for changes.
-The creator of the row reference must do this explicitly using
-gtk_tree_row_reference_inserted(), gtk_tree_row_reference_deleted(),
-gtk_tree_row_reference_reordered().
-
-These functions must be called exactly once per proxy when the
-corresponding signal on the model is emitted. This single call
-updates all row references for that proxy. Since built-in GTK+
-objects like #GtkTreeView already use this mechanism internally,
-using them as the proxy object will produce unpredictable results.
-Further more, passing the same object as @model and @proxy
-doesn't work for reasons of internal implementation.
-
-This type of row reference is primarily meant by structures that need to
-carefully monitor exactly when a row reference updates itself, and is not
-generally needed by most applications.
-
+Return value: Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> A proxy #GObject
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreePath to monitor
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
+<return> Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
+
+Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_thaw">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_length">
<description>
-This is a deprecated function, it doesn't do anything useful.
+Retrieves the length of the raw data of the selection.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the length of the data of the selection.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_icon_name">
@@ -57852,18 +60898,21 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_widget">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_restrict_to_fill_level">
<description>
-Return value: The #GtkWidget in the column header, or %NULL
+Gets whether the range is restricted to the fill level.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The #GtkWidget in the column header, or %NULL
+<return> %TRUE if @range is restricted to the fill level.
+
+Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -57948,42 +60997,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_system_list_bookmarks">
-<description>
-Queries the list of bookmarks in the file system.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_system">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileSystem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A list of #GtkFilePath, or NULL if there are no configured
-bookmarks. You should use gtk_file_paths_free() to free this list.
-
-See also: gtk_file_system_get_supports_bookmarks()
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_file_paths_copy">
-<description>
-Copies a list of #GtkFilePath structures.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="paths">
-<parameter_description> A #GSList of #GtkFilePath structures.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A copy of @paths. Since the contents of the list are copied as
-well, you should use gtk_file_paths_free() to free the result.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_cell_view_get_cell_renderers">
<description>
Return value: a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the
@@ -58060,6 +61073,21 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_active">
+<description>
+Return value: %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toggle">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_license">
<description>
Sets the license information to be displayed in the secondary
@@ -58123,7 +61151,7 @@
Deletes the menu item which was created for @path by the given
item factory.
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -58139,23 +61167,22 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_title">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_icon_name">
<description>
-Sets the title of the @tree_column. If a custom widget has been set, then
-this value is ignored.
+Retrieves the source icon name, or %NULL if none is set. The
+icon_name is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
+persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> The title of the @tree_column.
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> icon name. This string must not be modified or freed.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_cell_set_cell_data">
@@ -58209,18 +61236,54 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_clickable">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_state">
+<description>
+This function is for use in widget implementations. Sets the state
+of a widget (insensitive, prelighted, etc.) Usually you should set
+the state using wrapper functions such as gtk_widget_set_sensitive().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state">
+<parameter_description> new state for @widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_style_attach">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if user can click the column header.
+Attaches a style to a window; this process allocates the
+colors and creates the GC's for the style - it specializes
+it to a particular visual and colormap. The process may
+involve the creation of a new style if the style has already
+been attached to a window with a different style and colormap.
+
+Since this function may return a new object, you have to use it
+in the following way:
+&lt;literal&gt;style = gtk_style_attach (style, window)&lt;/literal&gt;
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if user can click the column header.
+<return> Either @style, or a newly-created #GtkStyle.
+If the style is newly created, the style parameter
+will be unref'ed, and the new style will have
+a reference count belonging to the caller.
</return>
</function>
@@ -58268,28 +61331,26 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_key_hash_lookup_keyval">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_wrap_width">
<description>
-Looks up the best matching entry or entries in the hash table for a
-given keyval/modifiers pair. It's better to use
-_gtk_key_hash_lookup() if you have the original #GdkEventKey
-available. The results are sorted so that entries with less
-modifiers come before entries with more modifiers.
+Sets the wrap width of @combo_box to be @width. The wrap width is basically
+the preferred number of columns when you want the popup to be layed out
+in a table.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_hash">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkKeyHash
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEvent
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> Preferred number of columns
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GSList of all matching entries.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_append_search_path">
@@ -58379,22 +61440,22 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_lookup_entry">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_ref">
<description>
-Looks up the accelerator entry for @accel_path and fills in @key.
+Increases the reference count of @recent_info by one.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator key to be filled in (optional)
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @accel_path is known, %FALSE otherwise
+<return> the recent info object with its reference count increased
+by one.
+
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
@@ -58431,6 +61492,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_get_modifier_mask">
+<description>
+Gets a #GdkModifierType representing the mask for this
+ accel_group For example, #GDK_CONTROL_MASK, #GDK_SHIFT_MASK, etc.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the modifier mask for this accel group.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_progress_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkCellRendererProgress.
@@ -58536,48 +61616,23 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_finishings">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_page_setup">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS.
+Obtains the #GtkPageSetup that determines the page
+dimensions of the #GtkPrintContext.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="finishings">
-<parameter_description> the finishings
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkUIManager">
-<description>
-The post_activate signal is emitted just after the @action
-is activated.
-
-This is intended for applications to get notification
-just after any action is activated.
-
-Since: 2.4
+<return> the page setup of @context
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="uimanager">
-<parameter_description> the ui manager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="GtkAccelMap">
@@ -58678,6 +61733,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_calendar_set_detail_height_rows">
+<description>
+Updates the height of detail cells.
+See #GtkCalendar:detail-height-rows.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="rows">
+<parameter_description> detail height in rows.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="GtkAction">
<description>
The "activate" signal is emitted when the action is activated.
@@ -58694,91 +61770,80 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_run">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_move_child">
<description>
-Runs the print operation, by first letting the user modify
-print settings in the print dialog, and then print the document.
-
-Normally that this function does not return until the rendering of all
-pages is complete. You can connect to the
-#GtkPrintOperation::status-changed signal on @op to obtain some
-information about the progress of the print operation.
-Furthermore, it may use a recursive mainloop to show the print dialog.
-
-If you call gtk_print_operation_set_allow_async() or set the allow-async
-property the operation will run asyncronously if this is supported on the
-platform. The #GtkPrintOperation::done signal will be emitted with the
-operation results when the operation is done (i.e. when the dialog is
-canceled, or when the print succeeds or fails).
+Updates the position of a child, as for gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window().
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
-if (settings != NULL)
-gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings (print, settings);
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> child widget already added to the text view
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xpos">
+<parameter_description> new X position in window coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypos">
+<parameter_description> new Y position in window coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
-if (page_setup != NULL)
-gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup (print, page_setup);
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_get_items">
+<description>
+Gets the list of recently used resources.
-g_signal_connect (print, "begin-print",
-G_CALLBACK (begin_print), &amp;data);
-g_signal_connect (print, "draw-page",
-G_CALLBACK (draw_page), &amp;data);
-res = gtk_print_operation_run (print, GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG, parent, &amp;error);
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a list of newly allocated #GtkRecentInfo objects. Use
+gtk_recent_info_unref() on each item inside the list, and then
+free the list itself using g_list_free().
-if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR)
-{
-error_dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (GTK_WINDOW (parent),
-GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
-GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
-GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
-"Error printing file:\n&percnt;s",
-error-&gt;message);
-g_signal_connect (error_dialog, "response",
-G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_destroy), NULL);
-gtk_widget_show (error_dialog);
-g_error_free (error);
-}
-else if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY)
-{
-if (settings != NULL)
-g_object_unref (settings);
-settings = g_object_ref (gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings (print));
-}
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
-Note that gtk_print_operation_run() can only be called once on a
-given #GtkPrintOperation.
+<function name="gtk_item_factory_set_translate_func">
+<description>
+Sets a function to be used for translating the path elements before they
+are displayed.
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="ifactory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkItemFactory
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action to start
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkTranslateFunc function to be used to translate path elements
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> Transient parent of the dialog, or %NULL
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @func and @notify
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> Return location for errors, or %NULL
+<parameter name="notify">
+<parameter_description> a #GDestroyNotify function to be called when @ifactory is
+destroyed and when the translation function is changed again
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the result of the print operation. A return value of
-%GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY indicates that the printing was
-completed successfully. In this case, it is a good idea to obtain
-the used print settings with gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings()
-and store them for reuse with the next print operation. A value of
-%GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_IN_PROGRESS means the operation is running
-asynchronously, and will emit the ::done signal when done.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_activate">
@@ -58826,6 +61891,38 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_depth">
+<description>
+Return value: The depth of @path
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The depth of @path
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_dialog_get_action_area">
+<description>
+Returns: the action area.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the action area.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_append_menuitems">
<description>
Add menuitems for various available input methods to a menu;
@@ -58835,7 +61932,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMultiContext
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="menushell">
@@ -58846,6 +61943,34 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_image_get_gicon">
+<description>
+Gets the #GIcon and size being displayed by the #GtkImage.
+The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_GICON (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
+The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
+returned #GIcon.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gicon">
+<parameter_description> place to store a #GIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> place to store an icon size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_get_root_window">
<description>
Get the root window where this widget is located. This function can
@@ -58871,39 +61996,49 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkPlug">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_scroll_to_path">
<description>
-Gets emitted when the plug becomes embedded in a socket
-and when the embedding ends.
+Moves the alignments of @icon_view to the position specified by @path.
+ row_align determines where the row is placed, and @col_align determines
+where @column is placed. Both are expected to be between 0.0 and 1.0.
+0.0 means left/top alignment, 1.0 means right/bottom alignment, 0.5 means
+center.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="plug">
-<parameter_description> the object on which the signal was emitted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+If @use_align is %FALSE, then the alignment arguments are ignored, and the
+tree does the minimum amount of work to scroll the item onto the screen.
+This means that the item will be scrolled to the edge closest to its current
+position. If the item is currently visible on the screen, nothing is done.
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_paper_sizes">
-<description>
-Creates a list of known paper sizes.
+This function only works if the model is set, and @path is a valid row on
+the model. If the model changes before the @icon_view is realized, the
+centered path will be modified to reflect this change.
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="include_custom">
-<parameter_description> whether to include custom paper sizes
-as defined in the page setup dialog
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The path of the item to move to.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_align">
+<parameter_description> whether to use alignment arguments, or %FALSE.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="row_align">
+<parameter_description> The vertical alignment of the item specified by @path.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="col_align">
+<parameter_description> The horizontal alignment of the item specified by @path.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated list of newly
-allocated #GtkPaperSize objects
-
-Since: 2.12
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_stock_id">
@@ -58928,24 +62063,37 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_n_copies">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive_at_cursor">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
+Calls gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive() at the cursor
+position.
+
+ default_editable indicates the editability of text that doesn't
+have a tag affecting editability applied to it. Typically the
+result of gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="num_copies">
-<parameter_description> the number of copies
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> text in UTF-8 format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="len">
+<parameter_description> length of text in bytes, or -1
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="default_editable">
+<parameter_description> default editability of buffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether text was actually inserted
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_hsv_new">
@@ -58961,6 +62109,38 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> A newly-created HSV color selector.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_test_create_widget">
+<description>
+This function wraps g_object_new() for widget types.
+It'll automatically show all created non window widgets, also
+g_object_ref_sink() them (to keep them alive across a running test)
+and set them up for destruction during the next test teardown phase.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget_type">
+<parameter_description> a valid widget type.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="first_property_name">
+<parameter_description> Name of first property to set or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> value to set the first property to, followed by more
+name-value pairs, terminated by %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly created widget.
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -59065,28 +62245,44 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_new_from_stock">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_tooltip_column">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkToolButton containing the image and text from a
-stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
-and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-
-It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
-
+Return value: the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkToolButton
+<return> the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
+used, or -1 if this is disabled.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_page_set">
+<description>
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSet value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog_async">
<description>
Runs a page setup dialog, letting the user modify the values from @page_setup.
@@ -59128,6 +62324,8 @@
Queries the current color in an HSV color selector. Returned values will be
in the [0.0, 1.0] range.
+Since: 2.14
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="hsv">
@@ -59173,6 +62371,7 @@
<return> a new button widget.
Since: 2.6
+Deprecated: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -59263,24 +62462,55 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_uris">
+<function name="gtk_test_display_button_window">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the selection data as array of URIs.
+Create a window with window title @window_title, text contents @dialog_text,
+and a number of buttons, according to the paired argument list given
+as @... parameters.
+Each button is created with a @label and a ::clicked signal handler that
+incremrents the integer stored in @nump.
+The window will be automatically shown with gtk_widget_show_now() after
+creation, so when this function returns it has already been mapped,
+resized and positioned on screen.
+The window will quit any running gtk_main()-loop when destroyed, and it
+will automatically be destroyed upon test function teardown.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+<parameter name="window_title">
+<parameter_description> Title of the window to be displayed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dialog_text">
+<parameter_description> Text inside the window to be displayed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> %NULL terminated list of (const char *label, int *nump) pairs.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> if the selection data contains a list of
-URIs, a newly allocated %NULL-terminated string array
-containing the URIs, otherwise %NULL. If the result is
-non-%NULL it must be freed with g_strfreev().
+<return> a widget pointer to the newly created GtkWindow.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_dialog_get_content_area">
+<description>
+Returns: the content area #GtkVBox.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the content area #GtkVBox.
+
+Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
@@ -59309,7 +62539,7 @@
<function name="gtk_print_settings_new_from_file">
<description>
-Reads the print settings from @filename. Returns a new #GtkPrintSettings
+Reads the print settings from @file_name. Returns a new #GtkPrintSettings
object with the restored settings, or %NULL if an error occurred.
See gtk_print_settings_to_file().
@@ -59331,16 +62561,22 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkMenuItem">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_copy">
<description>
-The submenu attached to the menu item, or NULL if it has none.
+Copies a #GtkTreeRowReference.
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="reference">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeRowReference
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a copy of @reference.
+
+Since: 2.2
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_set_transient_for">
@@ -59412,6 +62648,24 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_cancel_button">
+<description>
+Gets the 'Cancel' button.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GtkWidget used in the dialog for the 'Cancel' button.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_group_translate_string">
<description>
Translates a string using the specified translate_func(). This
@@ -59487,34 +62741,37 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_header_image">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_after">
<description>
-Gets the header image for @page.
+Inserts a new row after @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will be
+prepended to the beginning of the list. @iter will be changed to point to
+this new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill
+in values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the header image for @page, or %NULL
-if there's no header image for the page.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<parameter name="sibling">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_draw_flat_box">
<description>
Draws a flat box on @window with the given parameters.
-Deprecated: Use gtk_paint_flat_box() instead.
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_flat_box() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -59589,7 +62846,7 @@
so the first button in the list will be the leftmost button in the dialog.
Here's a simple example:
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+|[
GtkWidget *dialog = gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons ("My dialog",
main_app_window,
GTK_DIALOG_MODAL | GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
@@ -59598,7 +62855,7 @@
GTK_STOCK_CANCEL,
GTK_RESPONSE_REJECT,
NULL);
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+]|
</description>
@@ -59711,6 +62968,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_file">
+<description>
+Unselects the file referred to by @file. If the file is not in the current
+directory, does not exist, or is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="file">
+<parameter_description> a #GFile
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_get_name">
<description>
Retrieves the name of a widget. See gtk_widget_set_name() for the
@@ -59748,10 +63026,26 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_current_alpha">
+<description>
+Return value: an integer between 0 and 65535.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> an integer between 0 and 65535.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_get_composite_name">
<description>
Obtains the composite name of a widget.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
@@ -59760,11 +63054,32 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the composite name of @widget, or %NULL if @widget is not
-a composite child. The string should not be freed when it is no
+a composite child. The string should be freed when it is no
longer needed.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_unix_dialog_set_page_setup">
+<description>
+Sets the #GtkPageSetup from which the page setup
+dialog takes its values.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetupUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_size_lookup_for_settings">
<description>
Obtains the pixel size of a semantic icon size, possibly
@@ -59850,7 +63165,7 @@
submenu, then the submenu is returned. If you are interested in the menu
item, use gtk_item_factory_get_item() instead.
-Deprecated: 2.4:
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -60024,33 +63339,69 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_unref">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_menu_label_text">
<description>
-Deprecated equivalent of g_object_unref().
+Retrieves the text of the menu label for the page containing
+ child
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle.
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the child widget of a page of the notebook.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the text of the tab label, or %NULL if the
+widget does not have a menu label other than
+the default menu label, or the menu label widget
+is not a #GtkLabel. The string is owned by
+the widget and must not be freed.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_destroy_with_parent">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_usize">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the window will be destroyed with its transient parent.
+Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget's size
+request will be @width by @height. You can use this function to
+force a widget to be either larger or smaller than it is. The
+strange "usize" name dates from the early days of GTK+, and derives
+from X Window System terminology. In many cases,
+gtk_window_set_default_size() is a better choice for toplevel
+windows than this function; setting the default size will still
+allow users to shrink the window. Setting the usize will force them
+to leave the window at least as large as the usize. When dealing
+with window sizes, gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can be a useful
+function as well.
+
+Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes,
+translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action
+can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's
+basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be
+correct.
+
+Deprecated: 2.2: Use gtk_widget_set_size_request() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> minimum width, or -1 to unset
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> minimum height, or -1 to unset
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the window will be destroyed with its transient parent.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_wrap">
@@ -60101,15 +63452,16 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the label displayed in menu items and on buttons
+<parameter_description> the label displayed in menu items and on buttons, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> a tooltip for the action
+<parameter_description> a tooltip for the action, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the stock icon to display in widgets representing the action
+<parameter_description> the stock icon to display in widgets representing the
+action, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -60147,26 +63499,53 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_screen">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_load_icon">
<description>
-Sets the #GdkScreen where @status_icon is displayed; if
-the icon is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and
-then remapped on the new screen.
+Looks up an icon in an icon theme, scales it to the given size
+and renders it into a pixbuf. This is a convenience function;
+if more details about the icon are needed, use
+gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon() followed by gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
+
+Note that you probably want to listen for icon theme changes and
+update the icon. This is usually done by connecting to the
+GtkWidget::style-set signal. If for some reason you do not want to
+update the icon when the icon theme changes, you should consider
+using gdk_pixbuf_copy() to make a private copy of the pixbuf
+returned by this function. Otherwise GTK+ may need to keep the old
+icon theme loaded, which would be a waste of memory.
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the icon to lookup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> the desired icon size. The resulting icon may not be
+exactly this size; see gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> Location to store error information on failure, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the rendered icon; this may be a newly created icon
+or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must not modify
+the icon. Use g_object_unref() to release your reference to the
+icon. %NULL if the icon isn't found.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_unselect_uri">
@@ -60189,48 +63568,19 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_insertion_cursor">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_widget_new">
<description>
-Draws a text caret on @drawable at @location. This is not a style function
-but merely a convenience function for drawing the standard cursor shape.
+Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget object. This is an embeddable widget
+used to access the recently used resources list.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="location">
-<parameter_description> location where to draw the cursor (@location-&gt;width is ignored)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_primary">
-<parameter_description> if the cursor should be the primary cursor color.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="direction">
-<parameter_description> whether the cursor is left-to-right or
-right-to-left. Should never be #GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="draw_arrow">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to draw a directional arrow on the
-cursor. Should be %FALSE unless the cursor is split.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_preedit_string">
@@ -60295,19 +63645,22 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_key_hash_remove_entry">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_prepend_text">
<description>
-Removes a value previously added to the key hash with
-_gtk_key_hash_add_entry().
+Prepends @string to the list of strings stored in @combo_box. Note that
+you can only use this function with combo boxes constructed with
+gtk_combo_box_new_text().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_hash">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkKeyHash
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox constructed with gtk_combo_box_new_text()
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> value previously added with _gtk_key_hash_add_entry()
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> A string
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -60336,23 +63689,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_blinking">
-<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the icon is blinking
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the icon is blinking
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_range_set_fill_level">
<description>
Set the new position of the fill level indicator.
@@ -60456,7 +63792,7 @@
toolbar where it will be inserted.
@callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
-arguments. Use the GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC() to cast the function to #GtkSignalFunc.
+arguments. Use G_CALLBACK() to cast the function to #GCallback.
</description>
@@ -60495,6 +63831,8 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the new toolbar item as a #GtkWidget.
+
+Deprecated: 2.4: Use gtk_toolbar_insert() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -60510,6 +63848,31 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_test_create_simple_window">
+<description>
+Create a simple window with window title @window_title and
+text contents @dialog_text.
+The window will quit any running gtk_main()-loop when destroyed, and it
+will automatically be destroyed upon test function teardown.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window_title">
+<parameter_description> Title of the window to be displayed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dialog_text">
+<parameter_description> Text inside the window to be displayed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a widget pointer to the newly created GtkWindow.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_notebook_reorder_child">
<description>
Reorders the page containing @child, so that it appears in position
@@ -60607,20 +63970,77 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_link_button_set_uri">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_x11_window_id">
<description>
-Sets @uri as the URI where the #GtkLinkButton points.
+This function is only useful on the X11/freedesktop.org platform.
+It returns a window ID for the widget in the underlying
+status icon implementation. This is useful for the Galago
+notification service, which can send a window ID in the protocol
+in order for the server to position notification windows
+pointing to a status icon reliably.
+
+This function is not intended for other use cases which are
+more likely to be met by one of the non-X11 specific methods, such
+as gtk_status_icon_position_menu().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="link_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLinkButton
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> a valid URI
+</parameters>
+<return> An 32 bit unsigned integer identifier for the
+underlying X11 Window
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_paint_string">
+<description>
+Draws a text string on @window with the given parameters.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_paint_layout() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail (may be %NULL)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="string">
+<parameter_description> the string to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -60680,7 +64100,7 @@
in which case the window will be kept below when it appears onscreen
initially.
-You can track the below state via the "window_state_event" signal
+You can track the below state via the "window-state-event" signal
on #GtkWidget.
Note that, according to the &lt;ulink
@@ -60769,27 +64189,15 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_widget_hide">
<description>
-Hooks up an adjustment to the cursor position in an entry, so that when
-the cursor is moved, the adjustment is scrolled to show that position.
-See gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
-the adjustment.
-
-The adjustment has to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system
-as the entry.
-
-Since: 2.12
+Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
+hidden (invisible to the user).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the cursor
-is moved, or %NULL
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -60850,21 +64258,78 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_ellipsize">
+<function name="gtk_init">
<description>
-Return value: #PangoEllipsizeMode
+Call this function before using any other GTK+ functions in your GUI
+applications. It will initialize everything needed to operate the
+toolkit and parses some standard command line options. @argc and
+ argv are adjusted accordingly so your own code will
+never see those standard arguments.
+
+Note that there are some alternative ways to initialize GTK+:
+if you are calling gtk_parse_args(), gtk_init_check(),
+gtk_init_with_args() or g_option_context_parse() with
+the option group returned by gtk_get_option_group(), you
+&lt;emphasis&gt;don't&lt;/emphasis&gt; have to call gtk_init().
+
+&lt;note&gt;&lt;para&gt;
+This function will terminate your program if it was unable to initialize
+the GUI for some reason. If you want your program to fall back to a
+textual interface you want to call gtk_init_check() instead.
+&lt;/para&gt;&lt;/note&gt;
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description> Address of the &lt;parameter&gt;argc&lt;/parameter&gt; parameter of your
+main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description> Address of the &lt;parameter&gt;argv&lt;/parameter&gt; parameter of main().
+Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> #PangoEllipsizeMode
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column">
+<description>
+If you only plan to have simple (text-only) tooltips on full items, you
+can use this function to have #GtkIconView handle these automatically
+for you. @column should be set to the column in @icon_view's model
+containing the tooltip texts, or -1 to disable this feature.
+
+When enabled, #GtkWidget::has-tooltip will be set to %TRUE and
+ icon_view will connect a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip signal handler.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> an integer, which is a valid column number for @icon_view's model
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="GtkToggleAction">
+<description>
+If the toggle action should be active in or not.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_columns_autosize">
@@ -60910,10 +64375,10 @@
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_line">
<description>
-Moves @iter to the start of the next line. Returns %TRUE if there
-was a next line to move to, and %FALSE if @iter was simply moved to
-the end of the buffer and is now not dereferenceable, or if @iter was
-already at the end of the buffer.
+Moves @iter to the start of the next line. If the iter is already on the
+last line of the buffer, moves the iter to the end of the current line.
+If after the operation, the iter is at the end of the buffer and not
+dereferencable, returns %FALSE. Otherwise, returns %TRUE.
</description>
@@ -60950,6 +64415,23 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_get_sensitive">
+<description>
+Return value: %TRUE if the action itself is sensitive.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the action itself is sensitive.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_widget_new_for_manager">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget with a specified recent manager.
@@ -60992,38 +64474,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_complete">
-<description>
-Requests a completion operation, or in other words a refiltering of the
-current list with completions, using the current key. The completion list
-view will be updated accordingly.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="GtkSettings">
-<description>
-How long to show the last inputted character in hidden
-entries. This value is in milliseconds. 0 disables showing the
-last char. 600 is a good value for enabling it.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_connect_accelerator">
<description>
Installs the accelerator for @action if @action has an
@@ -61047,6 +64497,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_family_list">
+<description>
+This returns the #GtkTreeView that lists font families, for
+example, 'Sans', 'Serif', etc.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #GtkWidget.
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_layout_pack_end">
<description>
Adds the @cell to the end of @cell_layout. If @expand is %FALSE, then the
@@ -61094,22 +64563,16 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_copy">
+<function name="GtkMenuItem">
<description>
-Copies a #GtkTreeRowReference.
+The minimum desired width of the menu item in characters.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="reference">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeRowReference
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a copy of @reference.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_statusbar_push">
@@ -61209,6 +64672,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_editable_delete_selection">
+<description>
+Deletes the currently selected text of the editable.
+This call will not do anything if there is no selected text.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_positions">
<description>
Moves up to @count cursor positions. See
@@ -61313,6 +64791,28 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_info_new_for_pixbuf">
+<description>
+Creates a #GtkIconInfo for a #GtkPixbuf.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> the pixbuf to wrap in a #GtkIconInfo
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GtkIconInfo
+
+Since: 2.14
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_remove_shortcut_folder_uri">
<description>
Removes a folder URI from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders.
@@ -61418,21 +64918,20 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_create_menu_item">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_blinking">
<description>
-Creates a menu item widget that proxies for the given action.
-
+Return value: %TRUE if the icon is blinking
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a menu item connected to the action.
+<return> %TRUE if the icon is blinking
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
Modified: trunk/gtk/src/gtk_docs_override.xml
==============================================================================
--- trunk/gtk/src/gtk_docs_override.xml (original)
+++ trunk/gtk/src/gtk_docs_override.xml Mon Oct 20 12:22:47 2008
@@ -494,6 +494,27 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row">
+<description>
+Sets the tip area of tooltip to be the area covered by the row at path.
+ee also set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
+
+See also Tooltip::set_tip_area().
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description>A Gtk::Tooltip.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description>A Gtk::TreePath.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+
<function name="gtk_window_get_default_icon_list">
<description>
[
Date Prev][
Date Next] [
Thread Prev][
Thread Next]
[
Thread Index]
[
Date Index]
[
Author Index]
